download a complete copy of NTP-8 (D) - Navy-Marine Corps MARS

UNCLASSIFIED NTP 8(D)NAVAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROCEDURESU.S. NAVY-MARINE CORPSMILITARY AUXILIARY RADIO SYSTEM(MARS)COMMUNICATIONS INSTRUCTIONSNTP 8(D)Commander, Naval Network Warfare CommandAUGUST 2011Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies only foroperational use. Other requests for this document shall bereferred to COMNAVNETWARCOM.i

UNCLASSIFIED NTP 8(D)ii

UNCLASSIFIEDNTP 8(D)DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVYNAVAL NETWORK AND SPACE OPERATIONS COMMAND5280 FOURTH STREETDAHLGREN, VIRGINIA 22448-5300LETTER OF PROMULGATION1. NTP 8(D), U. S. NAVY-MARINE CORPS MILITARY AFFILIATE RADIOSYSTEM (MARS), COMMUNICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS, was developed underthe direction of the Commander, Naval Network and SpaceOperations Command and is promulgated for use by the U. S. Navyand Marine Corps.2. NTP 8(D) is an UNCLASSIFIED, nonregistered publication.3. NTP 8(D) is EFFECTIVE UPON RECEIPT.4. NTP 8(D) supercedes NTP 8(C).5. Permission is granted to copy or take extracts from thispublication without the consent of the Commander, Naval Networkand Space Operations Command.6. This publication, or extracts thereof, may be carried inaircraft for use therein.7. Correspondence concerning this publication should beaddressed via the normal military chain of command to Chief,Navy-Marine Corps MARS, Cheatham Annex Building 117, 108 SandaAvenue, Williamsburg, VA 23185-5830.iii

UNCLASSIFIEDNTP 8(D)iv

NTP-8(D)EXECUTIVE SUMMARYNTP 8(D) has been updated to reflect administrative andoperational changes in the Navy-Marine Corps MARS program. Thepublication includes changes recommended by seasoned volunteerauxiliary MARS members.Major and significant changes and additions include:- Updated to reflect the changes from DoD Instruction4650.02 of December 2009- Changed all chapters and annexes to reflect thereorganization from 7 Regions which reflected the formernaval district organization to 4 Areas headed byvolunteer directors that more closely align with currentnavy regions.- Established 10 new regions headed by volunteerdirectors that correspond to the Federal ResponseRegions. Each region director works under one of thevolunteer area directors.- Updated the chapter describing the different “DigitalModes” (Chapter Nine) by including newly developedpersonal computer sound card modes.- Changed the frequency accuracy requirements of Annex Bto conform to current NTIA specifications.- Added a new Auxiliary Radio Team operational readinessreport to report deployment to an emergencycommunications support site.- Updated portions of several chapters to reflectcurrent traffic systems and modes:- WINLINK 2000 for all administrative andemergency traffic on a national level,- Automatic Link Establishment for linking andsending text messages and- various soundcard modes for low-cost relay ofemergency traffic on the local levelv

NTP-8(D)THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKvi

NTP-8(D)RECORD OF CHANGES AND CORRECTIONSEnter Change or Correction in Appropriate ColumnIdentification of Change orCorrection; Message date-time-group;etc.DateChange/CorrectionEnteredChange/CorrectionEntered by(Signature)ACN 01-2012ACN 02-2012ACN 03-2012ACN 01-2013ACN 02-2013ACN 04-2014CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURGVA 121200Z NOV 2012CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURGVA 121200Z DEC 2012CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURGVA 131500Z DEC 2012CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURGVA 272100Z DEC 2013CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURGVA 272200Z DEC 2013CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURGVA 281200Z FEB 201421 DEC 2012 /S/ B. G. LINDFORS21 DEC 2012 /S/ B. G. LINDFORS21 DEC 2012 /S/ B. G. LINDFORS03 JAN 2014 /S/ B. G. LINDFORS03 JAN 2014 /S/ B. G. LINDFORS28 FEB 2014 /S/ B. G. LINDFORSvii

NTP-8(D)Identification of Change orCorrection; Message date-time-group;etc.DateChange/CorrectionEnteredChange/CorrectionEntered by(Signature)viii

NTP 8(D)U.S. NAVY-MARINE CORPS MILITARY AFFILIATE RADIO SYSTEM (MARS)COMMUNICATIONS INSTRUCTIONSTABLE OF CONTENTSParagraph Subject PageCHAPTER 1MISSION AND POLICY NAVY-MARINE CORPS MARS101. DEFINITION 1-1102. ARMY AND AIR FORCE MARS 1-1103. NAVY'S EARLY ASSOCIATIONS 1-1104. NAVY-MARINE CORPS MARS AUTHORIZED 1-2105. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SUPPORT 1-2106. MISSION AND FUNCTIONS 1-2107. MARS POLICY 1-3108. PRIMARY CONCEPT 1-4CHAPTER 2ORGANIZATION200. COMMAND AUTHORITY 2-1201. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS RESPONSIBILITIES 2-2202. TYPES OF MARS MEMBER STATIONS 2-3210. HEADQUARTERS, NAVMARCORMARS RADIO STATION (NAV) 2-3211. MARS COGNIZANT OFFICER 2-3212. COMMAND/ACTIVITY MARS OFFICER 2-3213. MILITARY AUSPICES STATION MARS CHIEF OPERATOR 2-3214. MILITARY AUSPICES STATION CUSTODIAN 2-3220. MARS AREA DIRECTOR 2-4221. AREA DIRECTOR CRITERIA 2-4222. AREA DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES 2-4223. AREA DIRECTOR STAFF ASSISTANT APPOINTMENTS 2-5224. AREA STAFF ASSISTANT DUTIES 2-6230. ASSISTANT AREA DIRECTOR 2-10231. ASSISTANT AREA DIRECTOR QUALIFICATIONS 2-10232. ASSISTANT AREA DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES 2-11233. ASSISTANT AREA DIRECTOR DUTIES 2-11240. MARS REGION DIRECTOR 2-11241. REGION DIRECTOR CRITERIA 2-12242. REGION DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES 2-12243. REGION DIRECTOR STAFF ASSISTANT APPOINTMENTS 2-13244. REGION STAFF ASSISTANT DUTIES 2-13250. VOLUNTEER ORGANIZATION 2-14260. SPECIAL ASSISTANTS TO CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS 2-15270. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATORS 2-15ix

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________Page271. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR QUALIFICATIONS 2-15272. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR RESPONSIBILITIES 2-15273. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR DUTIES 2-16280. STATE DIRECTOR 2-16281. STATE DIRECTOR QUALIFICATIONS 2-16282. STATE DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES 2-17283. STATE DIRECTOR DUTIES 2-17284. STATE DIRECTOR APPOINTMENTS 2-18CHAPTER 3ADMINISTRATION300. MEMBERSHIP CRITERIA 3-1301. INDIVIDUAL STATIONS 3-1302. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICES 3-1303. MEMBERSHIP APPLICATIONS AND ACCEPTANCE - GENERAL 3-2304. INDIVIDUAL,CLUB AND AGENCY MEMBERSHIP 3-2305. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICES - ASHORE 3-2306. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICES - AFLOAT 3-3310. RENEWAL APPLICATIONS 3-3311. MODIFICATIONS APPLICATIONS 3-3312. MEMBERSHIP APPROVAL 3-4313. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: ADDRESS CHANGES 3-4320. PARTICIPATION 3-5321. MILITARY AUSPICES STATIONS NETWORK ASSIGNMENTS 3-5322. INDIVIDUAL STATION NETWORK ASSIGNMENTS 3-5323. PARTICIPATION REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT 3-5324. NETWORK PARTICIPATION 3-6325. SPECIALTY AND OTHER NETWORK PARTICIPATION 3-6326. ADDITIONAL PARTICIPATION CREDIT 3-7327. RETIREMENT CREDIT 3-7330. INACTIVE STATUS, TERMINATIONS, RESIGNATIONS 3-8331. INACTIVE MEMBERSHIP 3-8332. TERMINATION 3-8333. TERMINATION FOR NON-PARTICIPATION 3-9334. TERMINATION FOR CAUSE 3-9335. RESIGNATIONS/DISESTABLISHMENTS 3-10336. EXPIRATIONS 3-10340. SPECIAL MEMBERSHIP CATEGORIES 3-10350. MEMBERSHIP RECORDS 3-11351. MEMBER DATA RECORD (NM-630-1) 3-11352. RECORD TRANSFER 3-12360. REPORTS (NET CONTROL STATIONS AND NET MANAGERS) 3-12361. STATE DIRECTOR FREQUENCY USAGE REPORT 3-12362. STATE DIRECTOR QUARTERLY ACTIVITY SUMMARY REPORT 3-12363. ASSISTANTS AND SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATORS 3-12xORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________Page364. AREA DIRECTOR FREQUENCY USAGE REPORT 3-12365. AREA DIRECTOR QUARTERLY ACTIVITY SUMMARY REPORT 3-13370. CORRESPONDENCE 3-13371. DIRECTION 3-13372. COMMUNICATION CONTENT 3-13380. NEWS MEDIA 3-13390. EQUIPMENT AND FUNDING 3-14391. EXCESS PERSONAL PROPERTY 3-14392. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES PROCUREMENT 3-14393. SUPPORT 3-14CHAPTER 4TRAINING AND QUALIFICATIONS400. TRAINING PROGRAM OVERVIEW 4-1401. TRAINING PROGRAM SUMMARY 4-1402. MANAGEMENT TEAM TRAINING PHILOSOPHY 4-3403. RESPONSIBILITY 4-3404. FULFILLING TRAINING RESPONSIBILITIES 4-4405. DEVELOPING AN EFFECTIVE TRAINING PROGRAM 4-4410. NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO) 4-5411. THIRD CLASS NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO3) 4-6412. SECOND CLASS NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO2) 4-6413. FIRST CLASS NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO1) 4-7414. CHIEF NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMOC) 4-7415. SENIOR CHIEF NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMOSC) 4-8416. MASTER CHIEF NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMOMC) 4-8CHAPTER 5OPERATIONAL CONCEPT500. NETWORK ESTABLISHMENT 5-1501. TYPES OF NETWORKS 5-1502. NETWORK OPERATIONAL CONTROLS 5-2503. NETWORK OPERATIONS 5-2504. MARS VHF FM REPEATER SYSTEMS (MARSREPSYS) 5-3505. JOINT SERVICE MARS INTEROPERABILITY 5-3506. AMATEUR REFILE POINTS/STATIONS 5-3507. QUALITY ASSURANCE 5-3508. MARS CALL SIGNS 5-5510. FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT 5-5520. MESSAGE HANDLING 5-6521. SAFEGUARDING COMMUNICATIONS 5-6530. MESSAGE CRITERIA 5-7540. MESSAGE SOLICITATION 5-9550. INTERFACING MARS WITH THE AMATEUR RADIO SERVICE 5-10xiORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________Page560. MESSAGE AND STATION RECORDS 5-10561. RECORDS DISPOSAL 5-11570. MINIMIZE 5-12580. COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY/INFORMATION CLASSIFICATION 5-13581. PREVENTING AND REPORTING LOSS OR UNAUTHORIZED 5-13DISCLOSURECHAPTER 6GENERAL COMMUNICATION OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS600. MESSAGE DEFINITION 6-1601. MESSAGES: BASIC FORMS 6-1602. MESSAGE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 6-2603. DISCUSSION OF SPECIFIC MESSAGE ELEMENTS 6-3604. MESSAGE TEXT FORMAT 6-8610. BASIC MESSAGE TYPES 6-9611. SERVICE MESSAGES 6-9612. MESSAGE READDRESSAL 6-10613. SINGLE ADDRESS MESSAGES 6-12614. MULTIPLE ADDRESS MESSAGES 6-12615. BOOK MESSAGES 6-12616. GENERAL MESSAGES 6-13620. MISSING AND DELAYED MESSAGES 6-14621. TRACER MESSAGES 6-14622. DELAYED MESSAGES 6-14623. LOST MESSAGES 6-15624. UNDELIVERABLE MESSAGES 6-16630. MESSAGE PRECEDENCE 6-17631. PRECEDENCE ASSIGNMENT 6-17632. SPEED OF SERVICE OBJECTIVES 6-18640. MESSAGE CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES 6-18641. PUNCTUATION 6-18642. PHONETIC ALPHABET 6-19643. NUMBERS 6-20644. MONTH ABBREVIATIONS 6-21645. STATE ABBREVIATIONS 6-21646. FOREIGN COUNTRIES AND OTHER ABBREVIATIONS 6-22650. REFILING MESSAGES 6-22651. MESSAGE REFILE BASIC PROCEDURES 6-22652. AMATEUR RADIO TO MARS REFILE 6-22653. MARS TO AMATEUR RADIO REFILE 6-23654. NAVMARCORMARS REFILE TO OR FROM ARMY OR 6-24AIR FORCE MARS REFILE660. CONTROL OF NETWORKS 6-24xiiORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________PageCHAPTER 7RADIOTELEPHONE PROCEDURE700. GENERAL INFORMATION 7-11. TERMS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 7-12. GENERAL PROCEDURES 7-13. OPENING A NET 7-24. FREE AND DIRECTED NETS 7-55. ABBREVIATED CALL SIGNS 7-66. CHANGING NET CONTROL STATIONS 7-67. PASSING TRAFFIC 7-88. CLOSING DOWN 7-10CHAPTER 8DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS PROCEDURES800. INTRODUCTION 8-1801. DEFINITIONS 8-1810. DIGITAL VOICE AND ALE 8-2820. WINLINK 2000 (WL2K) 8-2830. LIAISON OUTSIDE MARS 8-2840. CONTENT PROTOCOL 8-2850. TRAINING AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT 8-3860. ACCEPTABLE MODES 8-3861. OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 8-7862. MODE SETTINGS 8-8863. MESSAGE ALIGNMENT 8-9870. PROSIGNS AND OPERATING SIGNALS 8-10871. PROSIGN - MEANINGS AND EXPLANATIONS 8-10872. OPERATING SIGNALS (OPSIGs) 8-11880. CORRECTION, VERIFICATION, CANCELLATION 8-12881. OBTAINING CORRECTIONS AND REPETITIONS 8-12882. MESSAGES FORWARDED SUBJECT TO CORRECTION 8-13883. VERIFICATIONS 8-14884. CANCELLATION OF MESSAGES 8-14885. CANCELLATION OF A TRANSMISSION 8-14890. TRACER ACTION 8-15891. DEFINITION 8-15892. TRACER ACTION 8-15CHAPTER 9DIGITAL MODES900. INTRODUCTION 9-1910. BASIC DIGITAL MODES CONCEPT 9-1920. RADIOTELETYPE (RTTY) 9-1xiiiORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________Page921. RTTY BACKGROUND 9-1922. RTTY CONCEPTS 9-1923. RTTY ERROR CHECKING 9-2924. RTTY MODE CHARACTERISTICS 9-2925. RTTY THROUGHPUT 9-2930. AMTOR 9-2931. BACKGROUND 9-2932. AMTOR CONCEPTS 9-2933. AMTOR ERROR CHECKING 9-3934. AMTOR MODE CHARACTERISTICS 9-3935. AMTOR THROUGHPUT 9-4940. FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION (FEC) 9-4941. FEC BACKGROUND 9-4942. FEC CONCEPTS 9-5943. FEC ERROR CHECKING 9-5944. FEC CHARACTERISTICS 9-5950. PACKET RADIO 9-5951. PACKET RADIO BACKGROUND 9-5952. PACKET RADIO CONCEPTS 9-6953. PACKET RADIO ERROR CHECKING 9-6954. PACKET RADIO MODE CHARACTERISTICS 9-6955. PACKET RADIO THROUGHPUT 9-7960. PACTOR 9-8961. PACTOR BACKGROUND 9-8962. PACTOR CONCEPTS 9-8963. PACTOR ERROR CHECKING 9-8964. PACTOR MODE CHARACTERISTICS 9-8965. PACTOR MODE THROUGHPUT 9-9970. CLOVER II 9-9971. CLOVER II BACKGROUND 9-9972. CLOVER II CONCEPTS 9-10973. CLOVER II ERROR CORRECTION 9-10974. CLOVER II MODE CHARACTERISTICS 9-10975. CLOVER THROUGHPUT 9-12980. SOUND CARD MODES 9-12981. OPERATION WITH SOUND CARD MODES 9-13ANNEX ANET ORGANIZATIONA100. NETWORKS A-1A101. ADMINISTRATIVE NET A-1A102. TRAFFIC NET A-1A103. TRAINING NET A-1A104. COMMAND NET A-1A105. TACTICAL NET A-1xivORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________PageA106. SPECIALTY NET A-1A107. EMERGENCY NET A-2A200. AREA AND REGION DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITY: A-2NETWORK MANAGEMENTA300. STATE DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITY: NETWORK MANAGEMENT A-2A400. NETWORK ESTABLISHMENT A-2A410. BASIC CONCEPTS IN ESTABLISHING NETS A-2A420. CRITERIA FOR ESTABLISHING NETS A-2A500. NET DESIGNATORS A-3A510. BASIC CONCEPT FOR ASSIGNING DESIGNATORS A-3A520. METHOD TO ASSIGN NET DESIGNATORS A-3A521. EXAMPLES OF NET DESIGNATORS A-4ANNEX BPRINCIPLES OF FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENTB100. INTRODUCTION B-1B110. BASIC CONCEPTS B-1B120. NON-MILITARY PROCEDURES ON MARS FREQUENCIES B-1B200. FREQUENCY SHARING B-1B210. FREQUENCY SHARING PLAN B-1B300. FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT PROCEDURES AND POLICY B-3B310. AUTHORIZATION OF FREQUENCIES TO MARS B-3B320. ALLOCATION OF FREQUENCIES WITHIN MARS B-3B400. DEFINITIONS AND EXAMPLES B-4B410. BASIC DEFINITIONS B-4B420. EMISSION DESIGNATIONS USED BY NAVMARCORMARS B-5B421. EXAMPLE B-5B500. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS B-6B510. POWER LIMITS B-6B520. FREQUENCY TOLERANCE B-6B521. FREQUENCY TOLERANCE BELOW 30 MHZ B-6B522. FREQUENCY TOLERANCE ABOVE 30 MHZ B-6B600. FREQUENCY VIOLATION REPORTS B-6B700. FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE B-7B710. UNSATISFACTORY FREQUENCY B-7B720. INTERFERENCE TO OPERATIONAL NAVY COMMUNICATIONS B-7B730. REPORTING OF INTERFERENCE B-7B800. SPURIOUS EMISSIONS B-8ANNEX COPERATING SIGNALS, PROSIGNS AND PROWORDSC100. OPERATING SIGNALS ("Q" AND "Z") C-1C200. PROSIGNS AND PROWORDS C-20C201. DEFINITIONS C-20xvORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________PageC202. USE OF PROSIGNS AND PROWORDS C-20C203. PROSIGN AND PROWORD LIST C-21C204. DESCRIPTION AND USE OF PROSIGNS C-25ANNEX DEMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS (ECOM) PLANNINGD100. INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW D-1D110. PURPOSE D-1D120. DEFINITION D-1D130. SCOPE D-1D140. POLICY D-1D150. ORGANIZATION D-2D200. RESPONSIBILITIES D-2D210. AREA DIRECTORS D-2D220. REGION DIRECTORS D-4D230. STATE DIRECTORS D-5D240. EACH MILITARY AUSPICES STATION D-6D250. EACH NAVMARCORMARS MEMBER D-7D300. EXECUTION D-7D400. ALERTING D-8D410. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION THREE (COMCON III) D-8D420. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION TWO (COMCON II) D-8D430. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION ONE (COMCON I) D-8D440. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION ZERO (COMCON Ø) D-9D500. MINIMIZE D-9D600. EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS OPERATIONS AND PROCEDURES D-9D610. GENERAL OPERATIONS D-9D620. COMMON FREQUENCIES D-9D630. TACTICAL NET D-10D640. INTER-AREA COMMUNICATIONS D-10D650. INTRA-AREA COMMUNICATIONS D-10D660. SPECIAL EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS TEAMS D-10D661. AUXILIARY RADIO TEAM (ART) D-11D662. STATION AUGMENTATION TEAM (SAT) D-13D700. REPORTS D-13D710. IMPLEMENTATION REPORTS D-14D720. ART OPERATIONAL READINESS REPORTS D-15D730. REPORTS REQUIRED DURING THE EMERGENCY D-16D740. REPORTS REQUIRED AT TERMINATION OF AN EMERGENCY D-18D800. EXERCISES D-18D810. EXERCISE MESSAGE FORMAT D-19D820. EXERCISE NOTIFICATION D-19D830. JOINT EXERCISES D-20D900. ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS OF INFORMATION (EEI) MESSAGES D-20D901. EEI MESSAGE FORMAT D-21xviORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________PageD902. EEI IDENTIFIERS D-23D903. EVENT SUPPORT IDENTIFIERS D-24ANNEX EWINLINK 2000 SYSTEME100. WINLINK 2000 SYSTEM (WL2K) E-1E200. ADDRESSING TRAFFIC IN WL2K E-1E300. OTHER MESSAGE SYSTEMS E-2ANNEX FVHF REPEATER SYSTEM (MARSREPSYS)F100. INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW F-1F110. PURPOSE F-1F120. SCOPE F-1F130. CONCEPT F-1F140. ORGANIZATION F-1F200. RESPONSIBILITY F-2F210. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS F-2F220. MARS AREA DIRECTOR F-2F230. STATE DIRECTOR F-3F240. STATION ENGINEER F-3F300. VHF REPEATER STATION LOCATION F-4F400. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS F-4F500. STATION DESIGNATOR F-6F600. LINKS F-7F700. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM OPERATIONS F-8F710. GENERAL OPERATIONS F-8F720. EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS OPERATIONS F-9F730. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM SIGNALING AND CONTROL F-9F740. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM CHANGES AND EXPANSION F-10F750. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM AUTOPATCH OPERATIONS F-11F800. VHF REPEATER STATION FREQUENCY REQUIREMENTS F-11F810. VHF REPEATER MIGRATION TO NARROW BAND OPERATIONS F-11F900. VHF REPEATER EQUIPMENT AND ANTENNAS F-11F910. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS F-11F920. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS F-12F930. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM ANTENNA SPECIFICATIONS F-13F940. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM LINK FREQUENCY ANTENNA F-13ANNEX GSPECIALTY NETWORKSG100. SPECIALTY NETWORKS: INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW G-1G110. PURPOSE G-1xviiORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________PageG120. DEFINITION G-1G200. RESPONSIBILITY G-1G210. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS G-1G220. MARS AREA DIRECTORS G-1G230. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATORS G-1G240. SPECIALTY NETWORK STATIONS G-2G300. SPECIALTY NETWORK STATION ASSIGNMENTS G-2G400. NAVMARCORMARS SPECIALTY NETWORKS G-3G410. ANTARCTIC NETWORK G-3G420. AFLOAT AND OVERSEAS OPERATIONS NETWORK G-3G500. SPECIALTY NETWORK STATION RECORDS G-3G600. LANGUAGE RESTRICTION G-4ANNEX HGLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS, SHORT TITLES, AND COMMUNICATION TERMSH100. DEFINITIONS H-1H200. UTILIZATION H-1H300. NAVY POLICY H-2H400. COMMUNICATION TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS H-3ANNEX IEQUIPMENT PROGRAMI100. INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW I-1I110. PURPOSE I-1I120. SCOPE I-1I200. ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITY I-1I210. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS I-1I220. NAVMARCORMARS AREA DIRECTOR I-2I230. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICES I-2I240. MARS INDIVIDUAL STATIONS I-2I300. EQUIPMENT SOURCES I-2I310. DOD AND GSA EXCESS PROPERTY I-3I320. NAVY EXCESS PROPERTY I-3I330. ACCOUNTABILITY AND CONTROL I-3I400. ACCOUNTING IDENTIFICATION I-3I500. POLICY AND PROCEDURES I-4I510. POLICY GOVERNING EXCESS PROPERTY REQUESTS I-4I520. POLICY GOVERNING EXCESS PROPERTY ACQUISITION I-4I530. REQUISITIONS I-4I540. COMMODITY GROUPS I-5I550. PICKUP OF EQUIPMENT FROM HOLDING ACTIVITY I-5I560. POLICY GOVERNING EQUIPMENT ISSUE I-6I570. EXCESS PROPERTY ISSUE PROCEDURES I-7I571. RECORDS I-7xviiiORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________PageI572. EQUIPMENT ISSUE ACKNOWLEDGMENT I-7I573. DISTRIBUTION OF CUSTODY RECEIPT FORMS I-8I574. CUSTODY/RECEIPT FROM NM-2070-4 I-8I600. EQUIPMENT ISSUE LOG I-9ANNEX JJOINT SERVICE MARS INTEROPERABILITYJ100. COORDINATION J-1J110. HISTORY J-1J200. JOINT OPERATIONS J-1J210. MESSAGE FORMAT AND REFILING J-1J300. NET OPERATIONS J-2ANNEX KCALL SIGNS, SPECIAL CALL SIGNS AND COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNSK100. OVERVIEW AND INTRODUCTION K-1K110. PURPOSE K-1K120. SUMMARY: CALLS ASSIGNED TO NAVMARCORMARS K-1K121. SPECIAL CALLS ASSIGNED FOR VHF AND WINLINK USE K-2K130. DEFINITIONS AND TERMS K-3K131. ADDRESS DESIGNATORS K-3K132. CALL SIGNS K-3K133. PLAIN LANGUAGE ADDRESS K-3K134. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNS K-4K200. GENERAL INFORMATION K-4K300. DESIGNATED CALL SIGNS FOR MARS OFFICES K-5K301. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS, ASSISTANTS AND REGION K-5DIRECTORSK302. REGION DIRECTORS CALL SIGNS AND ASSIGNED STATES K-6K310. STATE DIRECTOR CALL SIGNS K-7K320. ASSIGNMENT OF REGIONS TO AREAS K-8K330. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR CALL SIGNS K-8K400. NAVMARCORMARS STAFF DESIGNATORS (CALLSIGN SUFFIX K-8EXTENSIONS)K410. GENERAL INFORMATION K-8K420. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS K-8K500. NAVMARCORMARS HEADQUARTERS STATION K-9K600. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNS K-9K610. AUTHORIZED USERS OF COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNS K-9K611. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNS WITH VARYING MEMBERSHIP K-9K620. AUTHORIZED COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNS K-9K621. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGN LIMITATIONS AND MODIFIERS K-10K700. RADIO STATION LOCATION IDENTIFIERS K-11K800. PLAIN LANGUAGE ADDRESS DESIGNATOR (PLAD) K-12xixORIGINAL

NTP-8(D)Paragraph_____________Subject__________________________________________________PageANNEX LABBREVIATED TEXTSL100. GENERAL L-1L110. NAVY-MARINE CORPS MARS ABBREVIATED TEXTS (NMAT) L-1L120. ARRL NUMBERED RADIOGRAMS L-2ANNEX MTELECOMMUNICATIONSM100. INTRODUCTION M-1M110. TELEPHONE M-1M120. FAX M-1M130. INTERNET M-1M200. E-MAIL M-1M300. WORLD WIDE WEB M-2M301. NATIONAL WEB SITE M-2M302. AREA, REGION AND STATE WEB SITES M-3LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONSFIGURE 2-1. VOLUNTEER STRUCTURE 2-17xxORIGINAL

NTP 8(D)CHAPTER 1MISSION AND POLICYNAVY-MARINE CORPS MARS101. DEFINITIONThe Navy-Marine Corps Military Auxiliary Radio System(NAVMARCORMARS) is a program conducted by the Department of theNavy in which licensed U.S. amateur radio stations and operatorsvoluntarily participate and contribute to the mission of providingauxiliary communications on a local, national or internationalbasis as an adjunct to normal naval communications. "MARS" inthis instruction refers only to the Navy-Marine Corps MARS Programunless Army or Air Force MARS is specified.102. ARMY AND AIR FORCE MARSMARS was originally known as the Military Amateur RadioSystem. This system was established on 26 November 1948 byauthority of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air Force inJoint Regulations (SR 105-75-1 and AF 102-3, CommunicationsMilitary Amateur Radio System). Subsequently, by order of theSecretaries of the Army and Air Force, the identity of MARS waschanged to the "Military Affiliate Radio System". In 2009, theidentity was changed to the "Military Auxiliary Radio System".103. NAVY'S EARLY ASSOCIATIONSThe U.S. Navy's association with amateur radio dates back tothe very inception of the art of wireless communications. Withthe commissioning of Navy Radio, Arlington, "NAA", in 1913,another source of practice for continuous wave (CW) was born, andmany of the "old timers" cut their "CW" teeth on the weatherreports, time signals, and notices to mariners emanating from theold landmark. The U.S. Navy realized immediately the immensepotential to be gained by a close relationship with amateur radioand assumed a policy of encouragement and support. Within tendays of the United States' entry into World War I on 7 April 1917,500 of the 6000 U.S. radio amateurs enlisted for duty in the U.S.Navy; before the end of the war, another 3500 amateurs had joinedthe Armed Forces. World War II saw over 25,000 amateur radiooperators serving with the Armed Forces and many thousands moreassisting in industry and war research work. These earlyassociations with amateur radio have been the basis of a long and1-1

NTP 8(D)continuing close relationship between the U.S. Navy and theamateur radio fraternity.104. NAVY-MARINE CORPS MARS AUTHORIZEDOn 17 August 1962, the Honorable Fred Korth, Secretary of theNavy, approved a recommendation made by the Chief of NavalOperations to organize a Navy-Marine Corps MARS program forimplementation on 1 January 1963.105. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SUPPORTOn 30 November 1968, the Department of Defense (DoD) issued adirective formalizing the composition, mission, functions, and theorganization of the Military Affiliate Radio System (MARS). Itset forth policies concerning DoD support of both MARS and civilAmateur Radio activities. On 23 December 2009, the DoD replacedthe Directive with a DoD Instruction adding another mission tosupport defense support to civil authorities (DSCA).106. MISSION AND FUNCTIONSa. The mission of MARS is to provide Department of the Navyand Department of Defense sponsored emergency communications on alocal, national, and international basis as an adjunct to normalnaval communications and to provide communication support forDSCA.b. The functions of MARS are to:(1) Provide contingency radio communications support toU.S. Government operations through the utilization of organizedvolunteer radio operators and operating facilities as directed byand coordinated within the DoD.(2) Provide contingency radio communication support to theDoD Components.(3) Provide contingency radio communications support tocivil authorities at all levels, in fulfillment of DoDresponsibilities under DoD Directive 5111.13.(4) Provide health, morale, and welfare radiocommunications support to military members, civilian employees andcontractors of DoD Components, and civil agency employees andcontractors, when in remote or isolated areas, in contingencies orwhenever appropriate.1-2

NTP 8(D)(5) Provide support to the National Communication SystemsShared Resources High Frequency (HF) (SHARES) Radio Program forinteroperability between HF radio systems used by Federaldepartments and agencies.(6) Create interest and furnish a means of trainingmembers in naval communications procedures to provide a potentialreserve of trained radio communications personnel for militaryduty when needed.(7) Conduct, in conjunction with the MARS Programs of theDepartments of the Army and Air Force, an appropriate amateurradio program as a part of the annual celebration of Armed ForcesDay.(8) Initiate efforts to improve high frequency (HF) andvery high frequency (VHF) radio communications, computer systems,operating techniques and state-of-the-art technology throughexperimentation and testing.107. MARS POLICYThe Military Auxiliary Radio System shall:a. Support and encourage MARS and amateur radio activitywithin the Department of the Navy and avoid any action that wouldjeopardize the independent prerogatives of the individual amateurradio operator.b. Recognize the technical and operating proficienciesinherent in the possession of a valid amateur radio license issuedby the Federal Communications Commission or other competent U.S.authority.c. Encourage and cooperate in the development of amateur andprivate communication activities of the United States toward theenhancement of their military and civil value.d. Maintain liaison with the Departments of the Army and AirForce, recognized U.S. Amateur Radio organizations, and theFederal Communication Commission on matters concerning the MARSprogram.1-3

NTP 8(D)108. PRIMARY CONCEPTa. The primary concept of MARS is to meet the requirements oftraining for any communications emergency. To this end,organization, methods, and facilities must be adequate to meet anyemergency requirements and must be flexible in order to providefor rapid expansion. Normal methods must be such that only minorchanges will be required when shifting to an emergency status.b. Based upon the above concept, the following principleshave been proven under all conditions. Reliability, security, andspeed are the three fundamental requirements of MARScommunications. Reliability is always paramount. It must never besacrificed to achieve security or speed.c. The most detailed instructional publications and the mostup-to-date equipment in no way lessen the need for initiative,common sense, and good judgment in the planning and conduct ofMARS communications. Correct methods of operation and precise useof established procedures are essential for effective appreciationof how, when, and where to send messages. Rapid communicationsmust be limited to the minimum required for the successfulaccomplishment of the operational task assigned.d. The procedures established in the following chapters andannexes have been based primarily on standard militarycommunication procedures. Due to the unique nature of theMilitary Auxiliary Radio System, certain procedures contained inthis publication will vary from those established in AlliedCommunications Publications (ACP's), Naval TelecommunicationPublications (NTP's), and related publications.e. New members who plan on entering military service in acommunications field, or those members currently on active duty,should refer to official correspondence courses or thosepublications mentioned above when undertaking a course of studyleading toward military promotion/advancement.1-4

NTP 8(D)CHAPTER 2ORGANIZATION200. COMMAND AUTHORITYa. The Chief of Naval Operations (CNO) has assignedCommanding Officer, Naval Computer and Telecommunications AreaMaster Station, Atlantic, (NCTAMS LANT) as the Central Coordinatorto act for the Secretary of the Navy (SECNAV) in exercisingauthority over and carrying out MARS responsibilities.b. NCTAMS LANT has vested Chief, NAVMARCORMARS with theauthority to carry out the Department of the Navy's (DON)responsibilities towards MARS per Department of Defense (DOD)Instruction 4650.02. This includes the authority to:(1) Ensure maximum effectiveness of Navy and Marine CorpsMARS activities.(2) Manage, control, technically guide, supervise, andexecute the NAVMARCORMARS program.(3) Provide operational, technical and administrativedirection to the NAVMARCORMARS volunteer area directors.(4) Direct the NAVMARCORMARS Headquarters Radio Stationoperations and NAVMARCORMARS radio networks throughout the world.201. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS RESPONSIBILITIESa. Develop and prepare MARS program resource requirements forsubmission to the Secretary of Defense (SECDEF) in the annualSecretary of the Navy (SECNAV) Program Objectives Memorandum (POM)or other appropriate Program Change Requests (PCR).b. Determine the need for and assist with the preparation,coordination, and revision of Navy directives and operatinginstructions relating to the MARS program.c. Maintain liaison with Marine Corps Headquarters, the MARSCognizant Officer on the staffs of Fleet and Force Commanders,Navy Emergency Preparedness Liaison Officers, and Command ActivityMARS Officers in matters relating to MARS operations andadministration.2-1

NTP 8(D)e. Manage the allocation of MARS call signs and distributionof MARS publications to new members.f. Coordinate and direct the operations of the MARS digitaltraffic systems; supervise MARS networks, make recommendations,and implement changes.g. Coordinate and consult with the Departments of Defense,Army, Air Force, and civilian organizations on matters pertainingto MARS operations and activities.h. Supervise and coordinate all aspects of the MARS equipmentprogram and approve requisitions associated therewith.i. Prepare and execute the annual Headquarters, NAVMARCORMARSbudget.j. Consult with representatives of the Utilization Division,Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office (DRMO), the Utilizationand Sales Division, General Service Administration, andappropriate Department of the Navy commands and offices on policymatters relative to the MARS equipment program.k. Represent MARS at national and region conventions,meetings of the American Radio Relay League (ARRL), and othercommunications/electronics organizations.l. Coordinate frequency assignments relating to the MARSprogram and promulgate.m. Initiate plans and execute staff actions to improve andincrease the effectiveness and efficiency of the MARS program.n. Prepare or direct preparation and approve all pressreleases on matters relating to the MARS program.o. Coordinate the Department of the Navy's participation inan appropriate amateur radio program as a part of the annualcelebration of Armed Forces Day.202. TYPES OF MARS MEMBER STATIONSa. Individual Station: A station operated by an individualaffiliated with MARS.b. Stations under Military Auspices:2-2

NTP 8(D)(1) Military Unit Station: A station operated by activeduty military or civilian personnel who are serving in a MARSbillet as a primary duty.(2) Military Auxiliary Station: A station manned andoperated by volunteer personnel.c. Agency Station: A station operated by individualsassociated with non-Department of Defense federal agencies or nongovernmentalorganizations.210. HEADQUARTERS, NAVMARCORMARS RADIO STATION (NAV)Headquarters, Navy-Marine Corps MARS Radio Station NAV (HQNAVMARCORMARS RADSTA) is in an active operating status, reportingvia Chief, NAVMARCORMARS to Commanding Officer, NCTAMS LANT.211. COMMAND/ACTIVITY MARS OFFICERA command/activity MARS Officer is assigned as a collateralduty at each U.S. Navy and Marine Corps activity sponsoring a MARSstation. The MARS Officer, as the representative of theCommanding General/Commanding Officer/Officer in Charge, providesthe necessary supervision for the operation and administration ofthe Command/Activity MARS station.212. MILITARY AUSPICES STATION MARS CHIEF OPERATORA MARS Chief Operator is assigned as either a primary orcollateral duty at each U.S. Navy and Marine CorpsCommand/Activity with an established MARS station. The chiefoperator provides direct supervision for the operation andadministration of the Command/Activity MARS station.213. MILITARY AUSPICES STATION CUSTODIANThe station custodian is appointed as a collateral duty ateach U.S. Navy and Marine Corps Command/Activity with anestablished MARS station. The custodian is responsible for theaccountability of the equipment and security of the station. TheMARS officer or the chief operator may be appointed custodian atthe discretion of the Command/Activity.220. MARS AREA DIRECTORThe MARS area director is a qualified volunteer memberappointed by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. MARS area directors are2-3

NTP 8(D)responsible for MARS operations in the regions within theirassigned areas. With the exception of member personnel matters,MARS area directors are responsible for the administration andoperation of the MARS program within their assigned areas.221. AREA DIRECTOR CRITERIAThe area director appointment is voluntary and thereforemilitary orders, per se, cannot be enforced. However, it isreasonable to assume that the individual accepting the appointmentwill have no compunction against fulfilling the duties andcarrying out the responsibilities of the position. This is ahighly responsible position; therefore, the followingqualifications are desirable:a. Have been a member of the MARS program for at least fouryears.b. Have a General class or higher amateur radio licenseissued by the FCC.c. Have a broad background of experience in radiocommunications, and be thoroughly familiar with the mission,functions, and operations of the MARS program.d. Be particularly skillful in dealing with others.222. AREA DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIESEach MARS area director is directly responsible to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS, for the proper administration and operation of theMARS program within the assigned MARS area with duties as follows:a. Maintain and operate a MARS radio station, capable ofoperating on all MARS frequencies assigned to the area in order tofacilitate program administration.b. Monitor and supervise area MARS networks in order toensure compliance with established procedures and frequencytolerances.c. Coordinate and implement MARS frequency assignments.d. Establish and disestablish MARS radio networks necessaryto conduct area-wide training and emergency communications.2-4

NTP 8(D)e. Prepare and promulgate area operations guides, bulletinsand other forms or publications as supplements to MARS directives.f. Represent Chief, NAVMARCORMARS when attending MARS,Amateur Radio, and other public activities in the interest ofpublic affairs and furtherance of the MARS program.g. Provide technical assistance and appropriate coordinationnecessary to accomplish special MARS projects.h. Prepare and promulgate emergency communication plans basedon those of higher authority.i. Perform special coordination duties assigned by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS.j. Perform such other duties as directed and/or necessary tofurther the MARS program.223. AREA DIRECTOR STAFF ASSISTANT APPOINTMENTSThe director selects and issues appropriate appointments toqualified individuals from the volunteer membership to serve asspecial assistants and advisors to the director and provides thenecessary coordination and supervision of matters pertaining tothe appointments. It is desirable that the appointee have been amember of MARS for at least four years. The director'sadministrative call sign with a numerical suffix will be assignedto each appointed assistant for use when conducting matterspertaining to the appointment. The following suffix numbers andtitles are prescribed:ONE:TWO:THREE:FOUR:FIVE:SIX:SEVEN:EIGHT:NINE:TEN:ELEVEN:TWELVE:THIRTEEN:FOURTEEN:FIFTEEN:Assistant DirectorEmergency Communications PlanningNet Operations/ReportsTrainingTelecommunicationsSpecial Projects and High TechnologyVHF and FM RepeatersPublic Affairs and NewslettersLibraryDigital Systems OperationsLogisticsEquipment AdministrationPersonnel AdministrationComputers/Data ProcessingInteroperability2-5

NTP 8(D)SIXTEEN:SEVENTEEN:Agency Station LiaisonMilitary Auspices Station Coordinator224. AREA STAFF ASSISTANT DUTIESAssistants to the director will perform the duties listedbelow. This is not an all-encompassing list and additional dutiesmay be assigned at the director's discretion.a. Assistant Director (NNNØAS_ ONE). The assistantdirector's responsibilities and duties are delineated inparagraphs 232 and 233, respectively.b. Assistant for Emergency Communications Planning(NNNØAS_ TWO). The assistant to the director for emergencycommunications planning is the principal advisor to the directoron all matters relating to emergency communications and homelandsecurity. The assistant shall:(1) Prepare and maintain an up-to-date emergencycommunications plan to meet all anticipated emergencies.(2) Coordinate among and provide advice and assistance tothe region and state directors and their assistants for emergencycommunications matters.(3) Schedule and oversee emergency communicationsexercises and provide comments/recommendations to region and statedirectors for the purpose of improving operations.c. Assistant for Net Operations/Reports (NNNØAS_ THREE). Theassistant to the director for net operations is the primaryadvisor to the director on matters pertaining to the organizationand operation of the nets. The assistant shall:(1) Coordinate area frequency requests per existinginstructions.(2) Manage all the frequencies assigned to the area.(3) Assign and oversee net managers for the designatedarea nets.(4) Maintain a master copy of the net directory of allarea, region and state nets and submit changes or revisions forpublication.2-6

NTP 8(D)(5) Advise the area net managers and region and statedirectors on matters concerning improvements and/or changes forbetter net operations. Coordinate training requirements with theassistant to the director for training.(6) Prepare and submit to the director frequency usage andtraffic reports.(7) Inform the director of the need to establish ordisestablish area, region and state nets.(8) Advise the director on all matters concerningoperations within the area.d. Assistant for Training (NNNØAS_ FOUR). The assistant tothe director for training is the advisor to the director onmatters concerning training of the membership. The assistantshall:(1) Develop and maintain current training programs to meetthe needs of the area.(2) Monitor area, region and state nets for the purpose ofproviding "on-the-job" training and to obtain first hand knowledgeof areas where training is required.(3) Coordinate with and advise the region and statedirectors in regards to changes that affect operational proceduresand general MARS information.(4) Issue training memoranda to amplify and/or clarifyexisting directives.(5) Coordinate with the assistant for net operationsrelative to the establishment of training nets to ensure properprocedure.e. Assistant for Telecommunications (NNNØAS_ FIVE). Theassistant to the director for telecommunications will advise thearea, region and state directors on technical matters concerningthe Internet, electronic mail (e-mail) and the World Wide Web(www).f. Assistant for Special Projects and High Technology(NNNØAS_ SIX). The assistant for special projects and hightechnology will assist the director in accomplishing tasks of aone-time nature and investigate new developments in technology2-7

NTP 8(D)that might be beneficial to the MARS program. The assistant willprovide to the director recommendations and status reportperiodically as the projects develop.g. Assistant for VHF and FM Repeaters (NNNØAS_ SEVEN). Theassistant to the director for repeaters is the primary advisor tothe director on all matters concerning the area repeater systemand shall:(1) Provide advice and guidance to state personnelregarding installation, maintenance, and support of repeaterequipment.(2) Maintain an up-to-date listing of all area repeatersproviding frequency, location, station engineer, etc., for use bythe director.(3) Initiate action to resolve interference problems.h. Assistant for Public Affairs and Newsletters(NNNØAS_ EIGHT). The assistant to the director for public affairswill be the primary advisor responsible to the director forpublication of an area newsletter, and shall providerecommendations and advice to the director regarding improvingpublic awareness of the MARS program.i. Assistant for Library (NNNØAS_ NINE). The assistant tothe director for the library is the primary advisor to thedirector for listing available technical publications and shall:(1) Maintain an up-to-date listing of all publicationsavailable within the area and at the National Library.(2) Provide assistance to the state director's staff inobtaining technical publications.j. Assistant for Digital Systems Operations (NNNØAS_ TEN).The assistant to the director for all matters concerning policyand procedures within the area for digital traffic systems andshall:(1) Provide guidance and instructions for the properformatting of record traffic.(2) Develop and promulgate instructions and procedures forthe use of the Winlink 2000 digital traffic system.2-8

NTP 8(D)k. Assistant for Logistics (NNNØAS_ ELEVEN). The assistantto the director for logistics has the responsibility to maintain astock of supplies for use throughout the area and shall:(1) Report to the director any unusual usage of suppliesby any region or state.(2) Keep the director notified concerning the status ofsupplies held in stock.l. Assistant for Equipment Administration (NNNØAS_ TWELVE).The assistant for equipment administration has the responsibilityof maintaining a list (to include official/proper documentingpaper trail), by location, of all equipment allocated to the areaand shall:(1) Advise the director regarding the status of allaccountable area equipment.(2) Upon disenrollment of a MARS member, advise thedirector concerning the amount and nomenclature of equipment heldby the member and make a recommendation for return of suchequipment.m. Assistant for Personnel Administration (NNNØAS_ THIRTEEN).The assistant for personnel administration has the responsibilityof providing an up-to-date listing of the area membership, andshall ensure the membership listing is provided to the director ona quarterly basis or as requested by the director.n. Assistant for Computer/Data Processing (NNNØAS_ FOURTEEN).The assistant for computer/data processing is the primary advisorto the director on all matters that apply to computer utilizationwithin the area and shall:(1) Keep the director informed of all new technology thatcan be used within the area and provide advice as to itsutilization.(2) Provide to the region and state directors informationand guidance concerning the use of computers in the MARS program.(3) Maintain a master listing of available computerprograms for MARS use.o. Assistant for Interoperability (NNN0AS_ FIFTEEN). Theassistant for interoperability will advise the area, region and2-9

NTP 8(D)state directors on Army and Air Force MARS and SHARES proceduresand help resolve interoperability issues when they arise.p. Assistant for Agency Station Liaison (NNN0AS_ SIXTEEN).The Agency Station Liaison is a volunteer who is the primaryadvisor to the director for all matters concerning the operationand duties of agency stations and shall:(1) Coordinate and liaise with agency stations.(2) Ensure agency stations receive training on therequirements of this and other pertinent publications(3) Advise the director on all matters concerning theoperation of the agency stations and provide recommendations forimprovements.(4) Encourage agency stations to participate in state ECOMexercise.q. Military Station Coordinator (NNNØAS_ SEVENTEEN). Themilitary station coordinator is an active duty service member whois the primary advisor to the director for all matters concerningthe operation and duties of the military stations and shall:(1) Coordinate, oversee, and assign stationresponsibilities.(2) Ensure stations comply with the requirements of thispublication.(3) Advise the director on all matters concerning theoperation of the military stations and provide recommendations forimprovements.230. ASSISTANT AREA DIRECTORThe assistant area director is a qualified volunteer membernominated by the area director and appointed by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS.231. ASSISTANT DIRECTOR QUALIFICATIONSThe assistant director appointment is voluntary and thereforemilitary orders, per se, cannot be enforced. However, it isreasonable to assume that the individual accepting the appointmentwill have no compunction against fulfilling the duties and2-10

NTP 8(D)carrying out the responsibilities of the position. This is ahighly responsible position; therefore, the followingqualifications are desirable:a. Have been a member of the MARS program for at least fouryears.b. Have a General class or higher amateur radio licenseissued by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC).c. Have a broad background of experience in radiocommunications, and be thoroughly familiar with the mission,functions, and operations of the MARS program.d. Be particularly skillful in dealing with others.e. Possess a high degree of administrative ability.232. ASSISTANT DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIESThe MARS assistant director is responsible for providingadvice and assistance to the director and provides continuitybetween the director and his successor when required. The MARSassistant director shall provide liaison and coordination betweenthe commands, Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, volunteer appointees, regionand state directors and individual members to ensure continuednetwork operations.233. ASSISTANT DIRECTOR DUTIESIn order to fulfill the above responsibilities, the MARSassistant director is expected to:a. Maintain and operate a MARS radio station, capable ofoperating on all MARS frequencies assigned to the area in order tofacilitate program administration and be available as an adjunctto the director's radio station.b. Maintain, insofar as possible, a duplicate file and recordsystem to that of the director in order to effectively assume,temporarily, the duties of the director.c. Perform such other duties as requested by appropriateauthority or as necessary to further the MARS program.240. MARS REGION DIRECTOR2-11

NTP 8(D)The MARS region director is a qualified volunteer membernominated by the area director and appointed by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS. MARS region directors are responsible, under thearea director, for MARS operations within their assigned regions.241. REGION DIRECTOR CRITERIAThe region director appointment is voluntary and thereforemilitary orders, per se, cannot be enforced. However, it isreasonable to assume that the individual accepting the appointmentwill have no compunction against fulfilling the duties andcarrying out the responsibilities of the position. This is ahighly responsible position; therefore, the followingqualifications are desirable:a. Have been a member of the MARS program for at least threeyears.b. Have a General class or higher amateur radio licenseissued by the FCC.c. Have a broad background of experience in radiocommunications, and be thoroughly familiar with the mission,functions, and operations of the MARS program.d. Be particularly skillful in dealing with others.242. REGION DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIESEach MARS region director is directly responsible to theirrespective area director for the proper operation of the MARSprogram within the assigned MARS region with duties as follows:a. Maintain and operate a MARS radio station, capable ofoperating on all MARS frequencies assigned to the region in orderto direct region operations.b. Monitor and supervise MARS region networks to ensurecompliance with established procedures and frequency tolerances.c. Coordinate with the area staff to implement MARS frequencyassignments.2-12

NTP 8(D)d. Establish and disestablish MARS radio networks necessaryto conduct training and emergency communications within theassigned region.e. Coordinate MARS activity with offices of the American RedCross, Civil Defense, ARES, RACES and other service MARS programs.f. Represent Chief, NAVMARCORMARS when attending MARS,Amateur Radio, and other public activities in the interest ofpublic affairs and furtherance of the MARS program.g. Assist state directors to prepare and promulgate emergencycommunication plans based upon those of higher authority.h. Perform special coordination duties assigned by the areadirector.i. Perform such other duties as directed and/or necessary tofurther the MARS program.243. REGION DIRECTOR STAFF ASSISTANT APPOINTMENTSThe region director selects and issues appropriateappointments to qualified individuals from the volunteermembership to serve as special assistants and advisors to thedirector and provides the necessary coordination and supervisionof matters pertaining to the appointments. The appointee shouldhave been a member of MARS for at least three years. Thedirector's administrative call sign with a numerical suffix willbe assigned to each appointed assistant for use when conductingmatters pertaining to the appointment. The following suffixnumbers and titles should be filled. Others similar to paragraph223 and 224 may be assigned:ONE:TWO:THREE:Assistant DirectorEmergency Communications PlanningNet Operations244. REGION STAFF ASSISTANT DUTIESAssistants to the region director, when assigned, willperform the duties listed for their position in paragraph 224.2-13

NTP 8(D)VOLUNTEER STRUCTURECHIEFNAVMARCORMARSSPECIALASSISTANTSSPECIALTY NETWORKCOORDINATORSMILITARY NAVMARCORMARS MILITARYAUXILIARY AREA DIRECTORS UNITSTATIONSSTATIONSASSISTANTDIRECTORDIRECTOR'SSTAFFREGIONDIRECTORSTATEDIRECTORREGIONDIRECTOR'SSTAFFNETSTATECONTROLDIRECTOR'SSTATIONS MEMBERS STAFF250. VOLUNTEER ORGANIZATIONFIGURE 2-1: VOLUNTEER STRUCTUREa. A block diagram of the volunteer structure is contained inFigure 2-1.b. The selection of the volunteer region and state directorsis a function of the area director, subject to the concurrence ofChief, NAVMARCORMARS and the senior Naval command in overseasareas.c. Operations shall be subject to the directives of the NavalForce Commanders/CNO when operating in overseas areas under theirjurisdiction.2-14

NTP 8(D)260. SPECIAL ASSISTANTS TO CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARSChief, NAVMARCORMARS may appoint qualified volunteer MARSmembers as special assistants when deemed necessary to assistand/or coordinate matters pertaining to the appointment. Specialassistants are considered members of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS AdvisoryStaff.270. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATORSA specialty network coordinator is appointed by andresponsible to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS for organizing, administering,and supervising the operation of the network to which assigned.271. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR QUALIFICATIONSMARS specialty network coordinator appointments are voluntaryand therefore military orders, per se, cannot be enforced.However, it is reasonable to assume that the individual acceptingthe appointment will have no compunction against fulfilling theduties and carrying out the responsibilities of the position. Theappointments are responsible positions; therefore, it is desirablethat selected individuals have the following qualifications:a. Have been a member of the MARS program for at least fiveyears.b. Have a General class or higher amateur radio licenseissued by the FCC.c. Have a broad background of experience in the radiocommunication specialty for which the appointment is made and befamiliar with the mission, functions, and operations of the MARSprogram.d. Be skillful in dealing with others.e. Possess administrative ability.272. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR RESPONSIBILITIESMARS specialty network coordinators are responsible forproviding advice and assistance to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS for theoperation and administration of the specialty network to whichassigned. The coordinator provides the necessary coordinationbetween the Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, state directors, and stationsassigned, per this publication and appropriate directives and2-15

NTP 8(D)instructions issued by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. The coordinator willmanage all day-to-day operations of the network.273. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR DUTIESa. Maintain and operate a MARS radio station capable ofoperating in mode(s) and on frequencies authorized for thespecialty network for which the appointment is made.b. Assign stations to the network within the area of assignedresponsibility.c. Coordinate frequency assignments with Chief,NAVMARCORMARS.280. STATE DIRECTORThe state director is a qualified volunteer member appointedby the area director. The state director is responsible to assistthe MARS area director in program administration and to assist theMARS region director with operations within the assigned state.The appointment is normally for a two year period that may beextended upon mutual agreement between the area director and theappointee.281. STATE DIRECTOR QUALIFICATIONSThe MARS state director appointment is voluntary and,therefore, military orders, per se, cannot be enforced. However,it is assumed that the individual accepting the appointment willhave no compunction against fulfilling the duties and carrying outthe responsibilities of the position. This is a highlyresponsible position; therefore, the following qualifications aredesirable:a. Have been a MARS member for at least two years.b. Have a General class or higher amateur radio licenseissued by the FCC.c. Be thoroughly familiar with the mission, functions, andoperations of the MARS program.d. Be particularly skillful in dealing with others.e. Possess a high degree of administrative ability.2-16

NTP 8(D)282. STATE DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITIESa. The MARS state director is responsible to the areadirector for the administration of the MARS program within theassigned state in consonance with the director's responsibilitiesand duties listed in paragraph 222 and per this publication andother directives and instructions issued by the Chief,NAVMARCORMARS and the area director.b. The state director is responsible to the region directorfor proper net operations.283. STATE DIRECTOR DUTIESTo fulfill the above responsibilities, state directors areexpected to perform the following duties:a. Maintain and operate a MARS radio station capable ofoperating on all assigned MARS frequencies in order to facilitateprogram administration.b. Recommend to the region director the establishment anddisestablishment of radio networks, assigning net control stations(NCS) within the state to fulfill requirements to meet the MARSmission, and to carry out all functions of the program.c. Monitor and supervise state networks to ensure compliancewith established procedures and frequency tolerances.d. Maintain individual membership files per Chapter 3.e. Effect assignment to networks and other activities ofmember stations within the state.f. Review quarterly, individual member participation.Recommend membership termination of members failing to maintainminimum participation requirements, and those who fail to abide bythe rules and regulations governing MARS, per Chapter 3.g. Determine the need for equipment and materials to meetstate requirements based on program requirements and individualmember's ability to utilize such equipment in the MARS program.h. Prepare and promulgate a state emergency communicationplan based on those of higher authority and Annex Delta, tofulfill the MARS mission. Such plans will be submitted to the2-17

NTP 8(D)area director via the region director for approval beforepromulgation.i. Coordinate MARS activity with local amateur radio clubs,office of the American Red Cross, Civil Defense, ARES, RACES,local military authorities and other service MARS programs.j. Perform such other duties as requested by appropriateauthority to further the MARS program.284. STATE DIRECTOR APPOINTMENTSThe state director selects and appoints qualified individualsfrom the volunteer membership of the state as special assistantssimilar to director staff assistants listed in paragraphs 223 and224 to provide necessary coordination for and supervision overmatters pertaining to the appointments. The staff call signassigned is that of the state director, with a numbered suffixcorresponding to the list in paragraph 223.2-18

NTP 8(D)CHAPTER 3ADMINISTRATION300. MEMBERSHIP CRITERIA301. INDIVIDUAL STATIONSAcceptance of membership is subject to the needs of MARSand the satisfactory completion of a 90 day trial period. Theterm of membership is concurrent with the member's valid amateurradio license unless sooner modified or revoked. In order tomeet the criteria for membership, the applicant must:a. Possess a valid amateur radio license issued by theFederal Communications Commission or other competent U.S.Authority that will remain valid for a minimum of one yearsubsequent to the date of application.b. Successfully complete the MARS Operator Course.c. Not be a member of Army or Air Force MARS.d. Possess an operating station capable of operating on aminimum of two MARS frequencies within the 2-30 MHz range usedwithin the applicant's area (unless waived by the statedirector).e. Agree to operate, per the rules and regulationsgoverning MARS, for a minimum of 18 hours per quarter, 12 ofwhich must be on established HF nets. No more than 12 hours permonth may be credited toward the 18 hours per quarter.Maintenance of the minimum 18 hours requirement does not initself ensure continued eligibility for membership.f. The applicant must be 18 years of age or older and mustbe a citizen of the United States or have been lawfully admittedto the United States for permanent residence under theprovisions of Chapter 12 of Title 8, United State Code.302. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICES AND AGENCY STATIONSAn amateur radio license is not required for MARSaffiliation. However, all station operators are encouraged toobtain and/or maintain a valid amateur radio license.3-1

NTP 8(D)303. MEMBERSHIP APPLICATIONS AND ACCEPTANCE - GENERALa. Applications for MARS membership must be submitted onNMC Form 2093/1, "Application for Membership." This form isprovided on the http://navymars.org website and can be completedon-line. This form is then submitted to Chief, NAVMARCORMARSwho will forward it to the cognizant state director.b. Other applications will be submitted for the type ofstation desired as described in paragraphs 304 through 306.304. INDIVIDUAL, CLUB AND AGENCY MEMBERSHIPa. For Individual membership:(1) civilian and military personnel located outside thejurisdiction of a military command, who apply for establishmentof a MARS station, shall complete NMC Form 2093/1 and submitthem as per article 303.a. above.(2) applicants whose stations are located within thejurisdiction of a military command should forward them by letterof transmittal originated by the command exercising militaryjurisdiction. Information copies of the transmittal lettershould be addressed to the chain of command. The applicationmust be signed where indicated.b. For Club membership, the club trustee must be aNAVMARCORMARS member. The trustee will be responsible for theproper operation and administration of the station. Submit NMCForm 2093/1 as per article 303.a. abovec. For Agency membership (non-DoD federal agencies, localgovernment agencies or recognized non-government organizations(NGO)), forward completed NMC Form 2093/1 by letter oftransmittal originated by the agency or NGO exercising authorityto Chief, Navy-Marine Corps Military Auxiliary Radio System,Cheatham Annex Building 117, 108 Sanda Avenue, Williamsburg VA23185-5830.305. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICES - ASHOREForward completed NMC Form 2093/1 by letter of transmittaloriginated by the command exercising military jurisdiction toChief, Navy-Marine Corps Military Auxiliary Radio System,Cheatham Annex Building 117, 108 Sanda Avenue, Williamsburg VA23185-5830. Information copies of the transmittal letter shall3-2

NTP 8(D)be addressed to the chain of command. The unit identificationcode (UIC) should be included.306. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICES - AFLOATU.S. Navy ships desiring to operate MARS stations willapply by routine message to NCTAMS LANT Code 300.310. RENEWAL APPLICATIONSa. Individual Stations - MARS membership is concurrent witha member's valid amateur radio license. Therefore, MARSmembership must be renewed upon receipt of renewed amateur radiolicense. A MARS member may continue MARS participation for 60days after the expiration of MARS license.b. Military Auspices and Agency Stations - MilitaryAuspices Station and Agency affiliation is for an indefiniteperiod of time without expiration. Renewal applicationstherefore are not required. See Modification Applicationsparagraph 311.c. In the event the amateur license renewal has not beenreceived during the 60-day period, the period may be extended bythe state director and/or area director upon notification by themember. Complete NMC Form 2093/1 and submit on-line as perarticle 303.a. above. See Modification Applications paragraph311.311. MODIFICATIONS APPLICATIONSa. Whenever the information contained on a member, agencyor club station's current NMC Form 2093/1 changes, complete anew NMC Form 2093/1 shall be completed indicating "Modify" andsubmitted on-line as per article 303.a. above.b. Change of address - Any MARS member transferred or movedpermanently from one location to another within the same statewill notify the state director within 10 days of such move. Anymove from one state to another will be reported to both the oldand new state directors. In either case, upon arrival at thenew address, submit appropriate forms per the instructionsabove. See paragraph 313 for additional guidance.3-3

NTP 8(D)312. MEMBERSHIP APPROVALa. All new applications (NMC Form 2093/1) shall be reviewedto ensure that the application is properly completed, dated, andsigned, and that the applicant meets the membership criteria.The NMC Form 2093/1 shall be reviewed to determine if thepotential member's field(s) of interest and/or stationcapability will enhance or meet the needs of the program.Applications improperly completed, or failing to substantiateeligibility for membership, shall be returned to the applicant.Prospective members not meeting program needs will be providedsufficient explanation; applications and the NMC Form 2093/1will be returned.b. The state director shall assign a MARS call sign. Theletter "T," indicating "Trial Member," shall be added as thefourth suffix of the call to permit immediate identification"on-the-air" so that other members can offer assistance. Thesecall signs shall be written as NNNØAAAT.c. The expiration date of a temporary member's trial periodwill always be on the last day of the month, which allows aminimum of four consecutive months. This period permits theapplicant a minimum of 30 days for administrative processing and90 days to meet minimum requirements. Example: A member isapproved on 10 April; the expiration date would be 31 August.d. The trial member will be notified of his/her acceptanceas a member subject to the satisfactory completion of the 90 daytrial period. In this regard, the first 18 hours must includesuccessful completion of a basic training program and the MARSOperator Course.e. After notification of successful completion, Chief,NAVMARCORMARS will mail the MARS license, Membership Card andother appropriate information.313. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: ADDRESS CHANGESApplications (NMC Form 2093/1) submitted by current membersfor renewal or modification of membership and addressedotherwise, shall be readdressed per paragraph 311. The statedirector shall review the member's record for satisfactoryparticipation. If a member has been authorized inactive statusper this chapter, it will be considered as satisfactoryparticipation. In the event a regular member fails to meet the3-4

NTP 8(D)requirements, the member may be recommended to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS for membership termination.320. PARTICIPATION321. MILITARY AUSPICES AND AGENCY STATIONS NETWORK ASSIGNMENTSa. Military Unit Stations - The area director or Chief,NAVMARCORMARS will normally make network assignments providingthe sponsoring command does not object. Assignments, onceaccepted, shall be regarded as bona fide communicationresponsibility. In the event that circumstances necessitaterelief from assignments, Chief, NAVMARCORMARS and theappropriate director shall be notified. The notification shallprovide sufficient time in order to meet the responsibilities ofthe station.b. Military Auxiliary Stations - In view of the volunteermanning of a Military Auxiliary Station, network assignmentswill be similar to those for individual stations. Other networkassignments will be consistent with emergency communicationplanning and with regard to the availability of operatingpersonnel.c. Agency Stations - Network assignments will be consistentwith emergency communication planning and with regard to theavailability of operating personnel.322. INDIVIDUAL STATION NETWORK ASSIGNMENTSUpon the acceptance of a member station or the arrival of acurrent member into a state, the state director will inform themember of area, region and state net schedules. Each MARSmember will be expected to be an active participant and to makeworthwhile contributions to state/region/area HF networks andMARS.323. PARTICIPATION REQUIREMENTS AND CREDITa. Each member shall attain a minimum participation of 18hours each quarter. Credit can be obtained through many formsof participation. The recommendations of net control stationsand state directors will be the determining factor in evaluatinga member's contribution to MARS.3-5

NTP 8(D)b. While MARS membership does not impose a mobilizationassignment, each MARS member does have a moral obligation toparticipate as directed by competent authorities during periodsof national crisis.c. Credit Guidelines - No more than 6 hours per quarter fornon-HF participation will be credited toward meeting the minimum18 hours per quarter.324. NETWORK PARTICIPATIONIt is the responsibility of the individual member to reportnet participation to the state director. In most states, thenet control stations for nets report member participation eachmonth. Other participation should be reported by message.a. If a member participates from a station other thanhis/her own, such as a military auspices MARS station, thisparticipation must also be reported in order that proper creditis obtained. When operating from such a station, the membershould indicate his call sign as operator on check in with theNCS from the military auspices station.Example:NNNØABC DE NNNØNNN OPERATOR NNNØXYZ NO TRAFFIC OVERb. Members are encouraged to send participation reports viamessage.325. SPECIALTY AND OTHER NETWORK PARTICIPATIONIt is the responsibility of the individual member to reportother forms of MARS participation. The activity should bereported using Form NM-2070-1 or message per the followingguidelines:a. Copying Scheduled Transmissions - List type(NAVMARCORMARS, REGION, AREA, etc.,), appropriate broadcastnumber(s), Date/Time (UTC) of receipt of each, and number hourscredit claimed.b. Monitoring Activity - List net designator, NCS,Date/Time (UTC), and number of hours credit claimed.3-6

NTP 8(D)c. Studying this publication and other MARS relatedInstructions - List Chapter(s)/Annex(es), etc., and number ofhours credit claimed.d. Correspondence Courses - List course title, lessonnumber(s), grade(s) attained, and number of hours credit(prorated per lesson of the total credit allowed for completecourse).e. "Off-the-air" activity required of members appointed,designated or assigned to a position, function orresponsibility.f. Time involved originating and delivering messages.g. Other non-HF activities - List what, when, who, how,etc., as appropriate and the number of hours credit claimed.h. Exceptions to the participation requirement stated inparagraph 301 may only be made with the written approval of themember's area director. The letter of approval will explain thereason for the exception and define the specific period of timecovered. The member shall retain the original letter ofapproval with a copy retained by both the cognizant statedirector and area director.326. ADDITIONAL PARTICIPATION CREDITCertain participation (listed below) will be credited tothe member at twice the rate of normal participation. In nocase will a member be granted more than double participationcredit for any actual hour of participation.a. Time spent in actual or exercise disaster communicationsor operating with emergency power.b. Time spent as the net control station or trafficrepresentative.327. RETIREMENT CREDITMARS participation will qualify naval reservists to receiveretirement credit provided the reservist has made applicationand received from his/her Regional Naval Reserve ReadinessCommand (NAVRESREDCOM) the necessary training and support dutywithout pay orders. Chief, NAVMARCORMARS will provide thenecessary participation certification as specified in the3-7

NTP 8(D)orders. Copies of orders and associated correspondence shall beforwarded to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. Retirement points will begranted to qualified participants per BUPERS Instruction 1001.39series (Administrative Procedures for Naval Reservists onInactive Duty).330. INACTIVE STATUS, TERMINATIONS, RESIGNATIONS331. INACTIVE MEMBERSHIPa. From time to time, individual MARS members may requesttransfer to inactive status because of transfer to an overseasarea where MARS is not operational, personal or professionalproblems, illness, or equipment failures, etc., whichtemporarily prevent them from meeting the minimum participationrequirements.b. Periods of inactivity are valid for a maximum of fiveyears - after that, either the member must re-activate or beterminated.c. The MARS member shall send a letter to the statedirector with justification for the inactive status. The statedirector will prepare an Inactive Membership Letter and send tothe member, file a copy of the letter in the member's staterecord, send a copy to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS for inclusion in themember’s headquarters record and retain the member's record.d. Chief NAVMARCORMARS will place the member in inactivestatus until the member's return to an operational status.e. During the period of inactivity, the member will beineligible for equipment issue, but remains an active member inall other respects.f. Leave of Absence (LOA): State directors may grant LOAstatus up to ninety days on a case basis. This status means themember is exempt from all participation requirements but inevery other respect is a full member. Extensions of an LOA past180 days require written approval of the Area Director.332. TERMINATIONTermination can result from non-participation, or can beordered for cause. MARS membership termination will be theresponsibility of the area director. When termination occurs,the member will be notified by letter from the area director.3-8

NTP 8(D)Recommendation for termination for reason of non-participationor cause will normally be initiated by the state director. Itis the responsibility of each individual member to keep theappropriate state director informed of any modification tohis/her record or any information that would affect his/herparticipation to preclude inadvertent termination.333. TERMINATION FOR NON-PARTICIPATIONWithout prior notification, membership may be terminatedwhen a member has failed to maintain a minimum of 18 hours ofcreditable participation per any normal period of threeconsecutive months. Normal three month periods will correspondto the quarterly periods, beginning on 1 January. Terminationdue to failure to meet participation requirements will result ina minimum one year termination period.334. TERMINATION FOR CAUSEa. When a member is recommended for termination for cause,the letter to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS shall explain in detail thecircumstances involved. The letter shall include as enclosuresall pertinent documents and appropriate affidavits tosubstantiate the infraction(s) of the rules and regulations.Pending disposition of the request for termination, or compilingof same, the state director, with approval of the area director,may suspend the member's MARS activities. When a member'samateur license has been revoked, a notification with sufficientdocumentation will suffice. Termination for cause is notnecessarily limited to the following:(1) Excessive violation of frequency tolerance oroperating rules.(2) "On-the-air" conduct or other actions thatembarrasses or which is not in the best interest of the U.S.Government. This includes formal or informal comments criticalof the U.S. Government, the Department of the Navy, MARS, andits various echelons.(3) Failure to abide by the rules and regulationsgoverning MARS.b. Members will be informed of the recommendation fortermination for cause. If there exist mitigating circumstances,which are not apparent, this information should be provided inwriting to the area director. Should termination occur, the3-9

NTP 8(D)member may appeal to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS via the state directorproviding sufficient justification for reconsideration. Pendingresults of an appeal, however, the member will cease all MARSactivity.c. All terminations for cause are effective for a minimumperiod of five years.335. RESIGNATIONS/DISESTABLISHMENTSa. Letters of resignation of MARS members wishing to bedisenrolled from the program shall be addressed to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS via the cognizant state director.b. Military auspices stations will not be disestablishedunless officially requested by the sponsoring command. Officialrequests for disestablishment shall be addressed to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS.c. All resignations are effective for a minimum period ofat least one year.d. If a member has resigned and rejoins or joins anotherMARS service (Army or Air Force), full retraining is required ifthe dormant period has been more than two years. If less thantwo years, the appropriate MARS Chief shall specify retrainingrequired on a case-by-case basis.336. EXPIRATIONSMARS membership is effective concurrent with an individualmember's valid amateur radio license. Therefore, it isnecessary for members to renew their MARS membership upon thereceipt of the renewed amateur license. In the event renewalapplications (NMC Form 2093/1) are not received within a 60-dayperiod after a member's amateur license has expired, and unlessotherwise notified by the member, it will be assumed thatcontinued membership is not desired. The state director willthen recommend termination to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. In theevent the member possesses government-owned equipment consideredeconomical to return, it shall be recalled per Annex India.340. SPECIAL MEMBERSHIP CATEGORIESIn recognition of substantial contributions, Chief,NAVMARCORMARS is authorized to make the following appointments:3-10

NTP 8(D)a. Associate Member - A MARS member who because ofcircumstances can not meet participation requirements forcontinued membership, but nevertheless has contributedsubstantially to MARS in the past.b. Honorary Member - A person who does not possess therequired amateur radio license or otherwise does not meetmembership criteria, but contributes substantially to MARSdirectly or indirectly. An Honorary Member may be authorized toparticipate in MARS network operations, but is not eligible forthe MARS Equipment Program.c. Recommendations for the appointments shall be submittedto Chief, NAVMARCORMARS via the appropriate state director andarea director. The recommendation shall contain sufficientjustification and be accompanied by NMC Form 2093/1,“Application for Membership.”d. Associate and Honorary memberships are lifetimeappointments. In order to operate, these members need only keepan up to date NMC Form 2093/1 with the state director in whosestate they will operate. The amateur license need not be keptup to date.350. MEMBERSHIP RECORDSUpon acceptance of a trial member as a regular member, thestate director and Chief, NAVMARCORMARS shall establish amembership record. The record will be used to record a member'sassociation and activities in MARS and to file related documentsand information, such as the completed MARS Application (NMCForm 2093/1), Member Data Record, equipment issue custodyreceipts, and station capabilities. It is the member'sresponsibility to ensure that information concerning stationcapability and other activity is provided to the state director.351. MEMBER DATA RECORD (NM-630-1)The state director will complete the applicable blockscontained on the member data record (NM-630-1). This form willbe used to record the member's participation and other pertinentinformation. The state director will transcribe from theindividual participation reports and/or the net control stationreports, the member's participation in hours in the appropriateblocks to ensure proper credit and to record the member's MARSexperience.3-11

NTP 8(D)352. RECORD TRANSFERRecords will only be transferred upon receipt of an NMCForm 2093/1 modification/renewal application indicating a changeof address from one state to another. The member's record andthe NMC Forms 2093/1 will be forwarded to Chief, NAVMARCORMARSChief, NAVMARCORMARS will review and forward the records andmake distribution of the application forms to the member's newstate director.360. REPORTS (NET CONTROL STATIONS AND NET MANAGERS)Each net control station and net manager, as appropriate,shall report station participation and frequency usage to thestate director or specialty network coordinator as soon aspossible after the last net of the month. (The standard MARSreporting period is from the first to the last day of thepreceding month.)361. STATE AND REGION DIRECTOR FREQUENCY USAGE REPORTSEach state director shall report all state frequency usageto the region director. The report shall be submitted to theregion director no later than the fifth day of the month. Theregion director will compile all the state reports and includeregion net frequency usage and report the totals to the areadirector. (The standard MARS reporting period is from the firstto the last day of the preceding month.)362. STATE DIRECTOR QUARTERLY ACTIVITY SUMMARY REPORTEach state director shall submit a State Quarterly ActivitySummary report to the area director. The report will besubmitted at the end of the third month of each quarter thatbegins 1 January, 1 April, 1 July and 1 October.363. ASSISTANTS AND SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATORSAssistants to Chief MARS and Specialty Network Coordinators(as applicable) shall maintain records and provide reports toChief, NAVMARCORMARS when requested.364. AREA DIRECTOR FREQUENCY USAGE REPORTArea directors shall submit frequency usage reports perNAVMARCORMARSINST 5214.1. The report shall be submitted3-12

NTP 8(D)quarterly to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS to arrive no later than the15th of the succeeding month.365. AREA DIRECTOR QUARTERLY ACTIVITY SUMMARY REPORTArea directors shall submit a quarterly activity summaryreport on activity within their area of responsibility to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS per NAVMARCORMARSINST 5214.1. The report shall besubmitted at the end of each quarter after the receipt of thestate directors summary reports, but not later than the 15th ofthe month following the end of the reporting period.370. CORRESPONDENCE371. DIRECTIONCorrespondence concerning MARS shall be handled within theframework of the MARS organization. However, if it isconsidered that the subject or the nature of the correspondenceshould be addressed otherwise, such correspondence shall beaddressed to the Commanding Officer, Naval Computer andTelecommunications Command, Atlantic, as the command exercisingauthority over NAVMARCORMARS. MARS members are to correspondwith the lowest echelon of the MARS organization from which ananswer or action can be expected, via all individualintermediate activities. The ultimate addressee may forwardcorrespondence to a higher echelon if deemed appropriate ornecessary. When it is obvious to the originator ofcorrespondence that intermediate echelons would only forwardcorrespondence, because comment or approvals are not required,the originator may send the correspondence directly to theultimate addressee with copies to intermediate echelons. Wheninitiating correspondence, the member should include the MARScall sign for additional identification and limit the subjectmatter to a single topic to promote a rapid response.372. COMMUNICATION CONTENTTo preclude any misunderstanding and to enhance the imageof the individual as well as MARS, the content of anycommunication, including press releases, must be accurate andbased on fact.380. NEWS MEDIAThe term news media is considered synonymous withinformation media and public information agencies, and shall3-13

NTP 8(D)mean publicizing, broadcasting, telecasting, or pictorialfeature services, newspaper periodicals, radio broadcasting andtelecasting organizations, and newsreel companies. The localrelease of information concerning MARS to the media by anindividual MARS member will be accurate and factual to precludeincorrect interpretation by the public and will bereviewed/approved by the area director prior to release. Therelease of information by personnel of a military auspicesstation shall be per the U.S. Navy Public Information Manual anddirectives issued by the parent command. Copies of newsreleases concerning MARS shall be provided to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS via the appropriate area director. Informationconcerning MARS of a national interest or proposed release tonational news media must be forwarded to Chief, NAVMARCORMARSfor appropriate coordination and release.390. EQUIPMENT AND FUNDING391. EXCESS PERSONAL PROPERTYThe MARS Equipment Program supplements existing facilitiesat MARS stations in order to enhance their ability to fulfillthe MARS mission. Accordingly, Chief, NAVMARCORMARS isauthorized to issue excess personal property to MARS memberstations per the policy and procedures governing the MARSEquipment Program contained in Annex I. Issues will be limitedby quantities available and by the eligibility requirements.392. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES PROCUREMENTAs the occasion arises, Chief, NAVMARCORMARS will programfor the procurement of equipment and supplies applicable totechniques and/or modes of operation. Such equipment andsupplies acquired through other than the procedures contained inAnnex India are not within the MARS Equipment Program.Therefore, accountability must be per the NAVCOMPT Manual andother appropriate directives.393. SUPPORTIn addition to the normal support provided for theoperations of the Headquarters Navy-Marine Corps MARS RadioStation (NAV) as a Navy shore activity, the Commanding Officer,Naval Computer and Telecommunications Command, Atlantic, willprovide support for the administration and operations of theHeadquarters MARS radio station. The support of other militaryand individual MARS radio stations must be provided by the3-14

NTP 8(D)appropriate military command, agency, or individual, except formaterials available at no cost through the MARS EquipmentProgram. Military commands sponsoring a MARS Station shouldbudget for the operations and maintenance of their stationthrough appropriated and/or non-appropriated funds per currentdirectives.3-15

NTP 8(D)THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK3-16

NTP 8(D)400. TRAINING PROGRAM OVERVIEW401. TRAINING PROGRAM SUMMARYCHAPTER 4TRAINING AND QUALIFICATIONSThe key to successful communication operations is thequalification and training of communication personnel at alllevels. For MARS to achieve maximum communication effectiveness,members must have the opportunity to receive thorough training inmilitary communication procedures and techniques to increase theirskills and ability. The overall comprehensive MARS trainingprogram for each area must include initial training procedures fornew members ("TANGO" members); U. S. Navy Correspondence Courses(available at no cost to members); and continuing/on-goingtraining procedures for all members. The following generalphilosophy applies to these three basic components of thecomprehensive MARS training program:a. Initial Training Procedures for New Members: The initialtraining, or Trial Service period, is a time for learning. It isalso a time for the program to assess the candidate and thecandidate to determine whether the program is right for him orher.b. The candidate is expected to complete the training periodby the last day of the month following 4 full months sincenotification of acceptance as a Trial Service member. The statedirector may extend this up to 90 days for good cause. Thecandidate must submit a request in writing (message or e-mail isacceptable) explaining the reason for the request. The statedirector will then determine whether or not the request should begranted. An extension beyond 90 days requires approval of Chief,Navy-Marine Corps MARS. Such request shall be forwarded to ChiefMARS via the state director. The state director must includehis/her endorsement (for, against, or no opinion).c. The state director has primary responsibility to followthe progress of all trial members, assess any shortcomings of thecandidate or the program in meeting the candidate's goals, andsubmit appropriate recommendations on the candidate in a timelymanner.d. During the training period each area will develop and usea formalized program which each trial member must complete prior4-1

NTP 8(D)to being accepted as a regular member. The details of thistraining program are left to the discretion of each director andthe area Assistant for Training (NNNØAS_-FOUR), but potentialelements of a typical area member training program might include:(1) Assignment of an "Elmer" or "big brother" mentor toeach member.(2) Specific trial training nets on the air.(3) Successful completion of the MARS Operator Course(this is not an option; it is required of all members).(4) Requirement for the member to serve as net control onstate nets a specified number of times.(5) Meet the minimum participation requirements of NTP-8for regular members.(6) Other requirements as deemed appropriate by the areadirector.e. U. S. Navy Correspondence Courses: The Navy and/or U. S.Marine Corps make many of their official correspondence coursesavailable at no cost to MARS members such as courses onelectricity, electronics, radio, and communications principles andprocedures. Directors should maintain an inventory of the coursesavailable and encourage members to take advantage of this benefit.The Navy Electricity and Electronics Training Series ("NEETS")courses are particularly useful and all members should beencouraged to take advantage of this series.f. Continuing/On-going Training Procedures for All Hands:There is a tendency to ignore or disregard general trainingpolicies and procedures after the initial training phases fortrial (training) members are complete. It is critical that eachdirector and the area assistant for training (NNNØAS_ - FOUR)develop a master comprehensive area training program that includessubstantive and aggressive training on a continuing basis for allhands. Potential elements of this portion of the area overalltraining structure might include (but are not limited to):hands.(1) Periodic state, area or region training nets for all(2) On-the-air analysis or critiques of previous netoperations and procedures.4-2

NTP 8(D)(3) Periodic state, area or region ECOM drills.(4) "Pre-staging" MARS messages with known format errors,sending them, then querying the net to identify which errors wererecognized.(5) Net control impromptu training on topic(s) of his/herchoice after all the traffic is passed.(6) Periodic "Training Bulletin" messages from area orstate -FOURS to all hands.402. MANAGEMENT TEAM TRAINING PHILOSOPHYa. There is a natural tendency to keep a leader, manager, orcoordinator in a job that he/she knows best. This stems from adesire to achieve and maintain a smooth working team. Such actionlimits the scope of knowledge of the individual and does notprovide for replacement or advancement to positions of greaterresponsibility within MARS.b. To offset this tendency, it is recommended that there be aplan for rotating staff personnel to ensure complete coverage ofall necessary assignments and appointments. This policy is at thediscretion of each director but it is strongly recommended.c. Training is a major factor contributing to effectivecommunication operations and readiness. The prime objective oftraining is to increase the ability of individuals to operate andadminister the MARS program effectively under all conditions.Training objectives for members must contain provisions forgeneral training in military communications and operations inaddition to administration, including a means of recognizing themember's attained skills.d. To meet training requirements, an effective trainingprogram must be conducted on a continual basis. Each areadirector and state director must pursue a vigorous trainingprogram consistent with requirements to achieve maximum results.403. RESPONSIBILITYa. The area director, through the state directors, volunteerappointees, and net control stations, is responsible for theadministration of a productive training program which provides aneffective communication team in his/her area. Each director may4-3

NTP 8(D)opt to delegate some or all of this authority to the areaassistant for training (NNNØAS_-FOUR). Liaison and directdiscussions among the directors is encouraged, but the overallresponsibility for the Area Training Program rests fully on thearea director.b. The Assistant to Chief MARS for Training (NNNØASN) isavailable for consultation on training: goals, methodologies,content, or other help as needed. Requests for assistance shouldbe filed via chain of command through the Area Director or AreaAssistant to the Director for Training (FOUR) with info to allintermediate directors and FOURs. Assistance is also available onthe National Navy-Marine Corps MARS web site under “Training”.404. FULFILLING TRAINING RESPONSIBILITIESArea directors, area -FOUR's, state directors, and state -FOUR's should keep in mind the following general responsibilities,which effective training programs should fulfill:a. Know individual MARS members' present qualifications,potential, and station capabilities.b. Know the mission and concepts of MARS.c. Know the communication requirements within the area ofresponsibility.d. Thoroughly plan the communication training objectives(i.e. develop meaningful training plans).e. Be cognizant of all training facilities available (e.g.correspondence courses, state, region and area training networks,etc.).f. Assign competent and qualified members as net controlstations, special assistants, and instructors.g. Make frequent checks on training progress.405. DEVELOPING AN EFFECTIVE TRAINING PROGRAMArea directors, area -FOURs, state directors, and state -FOURs should keep in mind the following general considerations fordeveloping effective training programs:4-4

NTP 8(D)a. Ensure the training program meets the requirements for allthree of the basic categories of training discussed in paragraph401.b. Training is sometimes more effective when based onopportunity rather than on a rigidly scheduled program.c. Training can and should be effected during the course ofnetwork participation.d. Rotating staff assignments is an effective method oftraining members.e. Discussions during training or questionnaires effectivelymeasure knowledge and ability.f. Ensure proper indoctrination of newly appointed netcontrol stations, assistants, and appointees.410. NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO)In recognition of a member's personal achievements,organizational and staff capability development, length ofservice, and operating expertise, a MARS member may be designatedas a NAVMARCORMARS Operator (NMO) upon meeting the requirementsfor the various class operators listed in paragraphs 411 through416. The NMO series of qualifications is a progression ofachievements very similar to the active duty petty officer - chiefpetty officer ladder of progression in place in the U. S. Navy.The basic and initial level qualification is NMO Third Class(NMO3). Before a member attains the next highest level ofqualification, he/she must first meet the requirements and havebeen designated to those of the lower classes. The followinginformation pertains:a. It should be clearly understood that the rating ofNAVMARCORMARS Operator is strictly a means of recognition. Itdoes not carry any specific responsibility or authority in theNAVMARCORMARS organization.b. Applications should be submitted to Chief, NAVMARCORMARSvia the cognizant state director and area director, who shallverify the member's qualifications and endorse accordingly.c. Waivers for specific requirements listed in paragraphs 411through 416 will be entertained via the chain of command, but, ingeneral, unless there are strong over-riding considerations4-5

NTP 8(D)documented in the waiver request, the criteria set forth belowwill be rigidly adhered to. Chief, NAVMARCORMARS is the onlylevel which can authorize waivers or exceptions to the criteriaestablished in paragraphs 411 through 416.d. Successful candidates for NMOCS (paragraph 415) will beissued a special distinctive call sign (in the NNNØGFA-NNNØGJZblock).e. Successful candidates for NMOCM (paragraph 416) will beissued a special distinctive call sign (in the NNNØGKA-NNNØGOZblock).411. THIRD CLASS NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO3)To be designated a Third Class NAVMARCORMARS Operator theapplicant must:a. Be a full member (training member time does not count) ofMARS for at least six months.b. Attain and record in the state MARS member records aminimum participation credit of 80 hours during the past sixmonths.c. Complete the following portions of 'Information SystemsTechnician Training Series' with an average grade of at least 3.4:(1) NAVEDTRA 14222, assignment 2(2) NAVEDTRA 14225, assignments 1 and 2(3) NAVEDTRA 14226, assignments 1 and 2412. SECOND CLASS NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO2)To be designated a Second Class NAVMARCORMARS Operator theapplicant must:a. Be a member of MARS for a least one year.b. Have been designated NMO3 for six months.c. Attain and record in the state MARS member records aminimum participation credit of 160 hours during the past year.4-6

NTP 8(D)d. Complete the Navy Correspondence Course "Navy Electricityand Electronics Training Series" (NEETS) Modules 1 through 5 withan average grade of at least 3.4.413. FIRST CLASS NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMO1)To be designated a First Class NAVMARCORMARS Operator theapplicant must:a. Be a member of MARS for at least two years.b. Have been designated NMO2 for one year.c. Attain and record in the state MARS member records aminimum participation credit of 320 hours during the past year.d. Complete the Navy Correspondence Course "Navy Electricityand Electronics Training Series" (NEETS) Modules 6 through 11 withan average grade of at least 3.4.e. Possess an FCC General Class Amateur Radio License (orhigher).f. Serve as a staff assistant to the state director for aminimum six month period OR serve as a net control station (NCS)on an state net for a minimum three month period.g. Demonstrate thorough familiarity with generating, listing,relaying, and managing digital traffic at the state, area orregion level.414. CHIEF NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMOC)To be designated a Chief NAVMARCORMARS Operator the applicantmust:a. Be a member of MARS for at least four years.b. Have been designated NMO1 for two years.c. Attain and record in the state MARS member records aminimum participation credit of 320 hours during the past year.d. Complete the Navy Correspondence Course "Navy Electricityand Electronics Training Series" (NEETS) Modules 12 through 18(Modules 15 and 18 are optional) with an average grade of 3.4.4-7

NTP 8(D)e. Serve as a staff assistant to the area or region directorfor a minimum six month period, OR serve as state director or thestate -ONE, -TWO, -THREE, -FOUR, -TEN, or -THIRTEEN for a minimumsix month period.f. Serve as a net control station (NCS) on an area or regionnet for a minimum three month period (if area or region nets areavailable).415. SENIOR CHIEF NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMOCS)Successful candidates will be assigned a specialNAVMARCORMARS call sign. To be designated a Senior ChiefNAVMARCORMARS Operator the applicant must:a. Be a member of MARS for at least six years.b. Have been designated NMOC for two years.c. Attain and record in the state MARS member records aminimum participation credit of 320 hours in the past year.d. Possess an FCC Extra Class amateur radio license.e. Serve as a staff assistant to the area or region directorfor a minimum 18 month period, OR serve as an assistant to ChiefNAVMARCORMARS (or serve as a staff member on one of the nationallevel Specialty Networks).416. MASTER CHIEF NAVMARCORMARS OPERATOR (NMOCM)Successful candidates will be assigned a specialNAVMARCORMARS call sign. To be designated a Master ChiefNAVMARCORMARS Operator the applicant must:a. Be a member of MARS for at least eight years.b. Have been designated NMOCS for two years.c. Attain and record in the state MARS member records aminimum participation credit of 320 hours in the past year.d. Serve as a state director, OR as the area or region -ONE,-TWO, -THREE, -FOUR, -TEN, or -THIRTEEN for a minimum of sixmonths.4-8

NTP 8(D)500. NETWORK ESTABLISHMENTCHAPTER 5OPERATIONAL CONCEPTTo enable MARS to fulfill its mission, it is necessary thatboth intra- and inter-area networks be established and maintainedto meet the requirements for effective and efficientcommunications. Chief, NAVMARCORMARS will direct the operationsof the MARS networks throughout the world through the area andregion directors, specialty network coordinators, and statedirectors. Networks will be established and disestablished byChief MARS, the area, region and state directors to meetrequirements of the program. Networks are categorized by primaryuse, however all networks are available to meet the requirementsof the MARS mission. Net designators will be assigned to eachnetwork per the provisions of Annex A.501. TYPES OF NETWORKSa. Administrative Net: A net primarily established foradministrative purposes linking any echelon of authority withimmediate subordinates and such other stations as may bespecifically designated.b. Traffic Net: A net primarily established to handlemessage traffic.c. Emergency Net: A net primarily established to handleemergency command and control functions or emergency traffic.d. Training Net: A net primarily established to promotetechnical and procedural training in matters pertaining tomilitary communications.e. Specialty Net: A net primarily established for a purposeother than traffic handling or training. Specialty networks areestablished only under the cognizance of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.Authorization to participate in these nets must be obtained fromthe respective specialty network coordinator via the statedirector.f. Command Net: A net primarily established for coordinationpurposes among Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, Headquarters, MARS RadioStation (NAV), MARS directors and such other stations specificallyauthorized.5-1

NTP 8(D)g. Tactical Net: A net primarily established to meetrequirements for emergency point-to-point operations amongstations specifically authorized per Annex D.502. NETWORK OPERATIONAL CONTROLSa. Net Control Station (NCS) - The net control station (NCS)is a station designated by appropriate authority to direct andcontrol the operation and flow of all traffic on the net. Wherepracticable, NCS assignments should be rotated among members totake advantage of the significant training value of this keyposition.b. Authority of the NCS extends only to the net operations.Within their scope of authority, decisions of the NCS are final.The NCS does not have jurisdiction over the administration of theindividual stations within the net, except for reporting networkparticipation. NCS is charged with the followingresponsibilities:(1) Expedite traffic on the net;(2) Maintain circuit discipline;(3) Monitor net operations to determine and initiatecorrective action on procedural discrepancies; and(4) Submit a report of net participation to the designatedauthority on completion of the net.c. Alternate Net Control Station (ANCS): An Alternate NetControl Station (ANCS) shall be designated to assume the duties ofNCS when directed or when NCS has failed to answer after threesuccessive calls. When assuming NCS duties, the ANCS willannounce NCS assumption by a transmission to all stations. In theevent NCS or ANCS are not present, another member of the netshould assume the duties of NCS until such time as the NCS or ANCSreport into the net.503. NETWORK OPERATIONSa. Directed Net: When operating on a directed net, stationsmust obtain NCS permission prior to transmitting. Record trafficmay only be passed during a directed net.b. Free Net: When operating conditions permit, the NCS maydirect that the net be operated as a free net. Member stations5-2

NTP 8(D)are then authorized to communicate with other net stations withoutobtaining prior permission from the NCS. Record traffic may notbe passed during a free net. Free net operation does not relievethe NCS of the responsibility for circuit discipline.504. MARS VHF FM REPEATER SYSTEMS (MARSREPSYS)The MARS VHF FM repeater System will function to facilitatethe handling of record and voice communications using VHFcommunication and to be responsive to the requirements fordisaster communications. Repeater stations will be installed andoperated per Annex F.505. JOINT SERVICE MARS INTEROPERABILITYa. Interoperability between the MARS services is available toall members of all services on HF and VHF. Messages best handledor delivered by another MARS service should be crossed over totheir circuits at the state level whenever possible.b. ANNEX J contains more detailed information and imposessome limitations due to frequency authorizations.506. AMATEUR REFILE POINTS/STATIONSMARS members may engage in amateur/MARS refile for thepurpose of accepting amateur radio service messages addressed toArmed Forces personnel or refiling MARS messages with the amateurradio service to effect delivery. Messages for refile shall beper the instructions contained in paragraph 560. Amateur/MARSrefile activity may be credited for participation under the "OtherNetwork Activity" provisions of paragraph 325. MARS membersparticipating in this activity should provide their State directorwith the following information for dissemination to NCS:a. Frequency(ies)b. Schedule(s)c. Name of Amateur Network (if any)507. QUALITY ASSURANCEThe ability of NAVMARCORMARS to fulfill its mission dependsupon the readiness of its personnel and material resources.Quality assurance activities provide protection againstdegradation of "System Readiness" through proactive efforts.5-3

NTP 8(D)(Examples include training, and detection and analysis measureswhich give early warning about impending problems - such asservice message inquiries on traffic with excessively oldorigination dates or having persistent patterns of format errors.)The quality of system performance is the direct result of theperformance of the individual members; therefore, qualityassurance efforts must be the responsibility of all members, notjust staff personnel.a. Training: A process of continual training and improvementof operational skills and equipment performance is achievedthrough routine net operations, dedicated training nets, drillmessages and emergency communications exercises. Adherence toestablished procedures and constructive on-air discussions aboutpoints of difficulty are the primary means for assuring overallSystem performance quality.b. Communication Improvement Memorandum (CIM): In theinterest of improving communications within the MARS networks andto enhance Naval communication training, Communication ImprovementMemoranda (CIM's) may be exchanged between stations to point outmessage discrepancies and procedural errors. CIM's exchangedbetween members must include complete identification of message orincident involved, a concise explanation of the errors, andreference the appropriate paragraph of the governing publication.CIM's will be mailed without delay directly to the stationconcerned with a copy to the area director or the trainingassistant, who shall use the information only in compiling datafor training purposes.c. Forbidden practices: The following practices areforbidden:(1) "On the air" conduct or actions causing embarrassmentto, or that which is not in the best interest of, the U.S.Government including MARS and MARS members.(2) Violation of radio silence whenever imposed.(3) Violation of MINIMIZE when in effect.(4) Use of profane, indecent, or obscene language, eitherspoken or implied.(5) Exceeding the specific power ratings placed on MARSfrequencies.5-4

NTP 8(D)(6) Use of other than authorized prosigns, prowords, oroperating signals.508. MARS CALL SIGNSa. Call sign assignment - Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, through theAfloat and Overseas Operations Network Coordinator and statedirectors, assigns MARS call signs from the NNNØAAA-NNNØZZZseries. All MARS stations will be assigned a call sign from thisblock. Requests for special assignments are not desired. Callsigns are allocated by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, subject to somespecial reservations for administrative assignments. (The NNA0AAthrough NNZ9ZZ series is also available for specific purposes.)Detailed instructions for the assignment and use of MARS callsigns and address designators are contained in ANNEX K.b. Authority for use:(1) Use of MARS call signs normally shall be restricted toMARS networks. When specifically authorized by competentauthority, MARS call signs may be used while representingNAVMARCORMARS on other U.S. Government agency networks.(2) U.S. Military and U.S. Government agency call signsmay be used on MARS networks during actual or exercisecommunication emergencies or when otherwise authorized bycompetent authority.(3) The use of amateur radio call signs on MARS networksis not authorized.510. FREQUENCY MANAGEMENTThe Navy-Marine Corps Spectrum Center (NMSC) assigns MARSfrequencies to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. Chief, NAVMARCORMARS willcoordinate and effect implementation of MARS frequencyassignments. These assignments must be utilized so as to avoidinterference with other naval communications, which takeprecedence. The principles of MARS frequency management aredetailed in ANNEX B.a. Emissions - Emissions on MARS networks will be limited toauthorized frequencies and shall be maintained within thetolerances prescribed in ANNEX B.b. Power - Frequencies assigned for MARS use are shared inmost cases among the various MARS states and areas as well as with5-5

NTP 8(D)other authorized users. In order to reduce mutual interference,stations will use minimum power consistent with goodcommunications. At no time shall power be used in excess of thatauthorized for the frequency.c. Frequency Sharing - It is the policy of Chief,NAVMARCORMARS to maximize utilization of the limited number ofavailable frequencies through shared use among the various statesand areas. This may be achieved through time schedules, frequencyoffset within the allowed bandwidth, or geographic separation.520. MESSAGE HANDLINGa. Origination responsibility - No person shall knowingly orwillfully originate or accept for transmission false or misleadingmessages. Each MARS member originating messages or initiallyaccepting messages for transmission via MARS is responsible forscreening and determining that the messages meet the criteria inparagraph 540 prior to transmission.b. The message originator is the person or command by whoseauthority a message is sent. An originating station is thestation from which a message was originally transmitted. MARSmembers are authorized to originate messages. The originator hasthe following specific responsibilities:(1) Designate the addressees. Keep the number ofaddressees to a minimum.(2) Assign the precedence. Reserve high precedence formessages requiring immediate action.(3) Properly draft the message. Keep the text briefthrough proper choice of words, use of punctuation and goodwriting techniques. Avoid repetitious words and phrases.Abbreviations will not be used unless the originator is certainthat the meaning is clear and unmistakable to all addressees. Inthe interest of brevity, NAVMARCORMARS and ARRL Abbreviated Texts(NMAT and ARL) should be used whenever possible. See Annex L.521. SAFEGUARDING COMMUNICATIONSa. Official messages are inviolable. Their content shall notbe revealed to anyone except as designated by the originator,addressee(s) or their designated representative(s). Transmissionor revelation to an unauthorized person of information affecting5-6

NTP 8(D)the national defense of the United States is prohibited by law.Espionage laws, Title 18, U.S.C., SECTIONS 793 and 794 apply.b. All personal and commercial messages handled by navalcommunications are equally inviolable. Contents of such messagesshall not be revealed to anyone but the person addressed and asnecessary for communication processing. Unauthorized disclosureof the contents of any personal or commercial message isprohibited by law and punishable under the Federal CommunicationsAct of 1934.c. No person is entitled to knowledge or possession ofclassified or unclassified communications solely by virtue of hisrank, position, office, or security clearance.d. Relay and Delivery Responsibility - The station acceptinga message for transmission, relay or delivery is responsible forthe message until it has been accepted by another station ordelivered to the addressee. When a station cannot relay ordeliver a message, it must notify the originating station viaservice message. Instructions from the originating station totake no further action relieves the station holding the message ofany further responsibility.e. Cancellation of Messages - Only the originating stationcan cancel a message. Cancellation of a message which has beentransmitted may be accomplished only by a new message, which maybe a message taking the place of the one canceled. Operatingsignals shall not be used to cancel a message which has beenreceipted.530. MESSAGE CRITERIAMembers must consider the capabilities of MARS facilitieswhen accepting messages for transmission via MARS. Types ofmessages authorized for transmission on MARS networks will berestricted to the following unclassified messages:a. Administrative traffic pertaining to MARS.b. Traffic of an official, semi- or quasi-official nature.c. Exercise traffic.d. Training traffic (drill messages).5-7

NTP 8(D)e. During periods of local, national, or internationalemergencies, any message relative to the emergency.f. Personal messages addressed to or from Armed Forcespersonnel (active duty, retired or reserve), NAVMARCORMARSmembers, Veterans Hospital patients and staff and authorizedgovernment employees and government contractors overseas.g. Only personal messages in the English language that are ofnon-business nature and which would not normally be sent byavailable commercial means may be handled. Format line six (FMline) of such messages must always contain the title, name andlocation of the person who actually originates the contents of thetext, in addition to the call sign and state of the originatingstation, e.g.,FM MRS C NOBLE SYLVANIA GA/NNNØPSX GAh. Serious illness or death: Messages concerning the initialnotification of serious illness or death of a member of theimmediate family (wife, child, mother, father, brother, sister) or"in loco parentis" (guardian or parent substitute) shall not behandled via MARS. Individuals desiring to originate such messagesshould be referred immediately to the American Red Cross.Messages concerning plans and inquiries thereto, or messagesconcerning notification of serious illness or death of otherrelatives or close friends normally are not handled by theAmerican Red Cross. Therefore, such messages are permissible onMARS networks provided they would not normally be sent byavailable commercial means and are addressed to the commandingofficer, officer in charge, or the chaplain of the activity inwhich the addressee is assigned and the relationship of thedeceased is indicated.i. Legislative matters: No messages will be handled by MARSwhich relate to legislative matters. In this regard, no messageaddressed to a legislator which circumvents the normal militarychain of command will be accepted for transmission.j. Military Operations: Personal messages which relate tomilitary operations will not be handled by MARS. Any messageconcerning the following specific information is prohibited:(1) Military information pertaining to unit designation,strength, function, or logistical matters.5-8

NTP 8(D)(2) Location and movement of units, aircraft, ships,supplies and personnel.(3) Information of economic, political, or morale naturepertaining to troops or nationals of the United States or anyforeign country.(4) Casualty information relating to injuries and deathsfrom enemy action.k. Business matters: Any message which may result infinancial or material gain is considered business in nature andwill not be handled via MARS networks.l. Avoidance of postage fees: Messages deemed to be anobvious attempt to avoid postage fees will not be accepted by theoriginating MARS station.m. Any additional topics as may be designated by appropriateauthority. The restrictions of this article also apply tostation-to-station and radio-telephone patch communications.n. The use of personally derived codes in any message isprohibited.540. MESSAGE SOLICITATIONa. A MARS member may publicize his personal message handlingcapabilities, but will not actively solicit personal messages fromthe general public for transmission via MARS. This does notprohibit a member from advising message recipients on how to sendreplies. Stations may advise military units (regular and reserve)of MARS message handling capability. Unit Commanders may publishthis capability in on-station publications (Plan of the Day,newsletters, etc.). Stations may contact emergency managementagencies and local and state police, etc., to advise them of MARScapabilities.b. MARS members may request permission to establish aportable station for the purpose of accepting messages from thegeneral public, provided that such a station is co-located with anappropriate MARS display that depicts the purpose of MARS and thatthe station will be operated in conjunction with a public eventwhich is consistent with the MARS mission. Requests forpermission to establish such a station shall be addressed to theChief, NAVMARCORMARS via the state and area director. Requestsshould include the following information:5-9

NTP 8(D)(1) Convention or program sponsor.(2) Location of proposed station.(3) Call sign(s) of station(s). If a joint MARSoperation, the call sign of other stations involved.c. Under no circumstances will message blanks or solicitationof traffic be advertised by the news media, as defined inparagraph 380.550. INTERFACING MARS WITH THE AMATEUR RADIO SERVICEa. MARS to Amateur refile: Refiling of MARS administrativeofficial, semi- or quasi-official traffic into the amateur radioservices is strictly forbidden. This includes amateur radiosystems that forward MARS related e-mails over radio frequencies.Only personal messages may be re-filed into the amateur radioservice. Messages are to be re-filed into the amateur radioservice only when it is impracticable to effect delivery via MARSchannels, including Army or Air Force MARS, without undue delay.Before refile is effected, it is necessary that the message beconverted into the recognized ARRL National Traffic Serviceformat. Under no circumstances will a MARS message be re-filed inthe military format.b. Amateur to Navy-Marine Corps MARS refile: Messages thatare to be re-filed from the amateur radio service into a MARSnetwork must meet the message criteria set forth in paragraph 540.After receipt, and prior to re-transmission, delivery, or mailing,the MARS station must convert the message to the standard MARSformat.560. MESSAGE AND STATION RECORDSa. The MESSAGE FILE will contain a copy of every message sentor received in date-time-group order. Messages processed withouta date-time-group will be filed behind DTG messages for the samedate. Separate incoming and outgoing files may be maintained atthe option of the station.b. Stations involved in message relay will establish aSTATION FILE which contains a copy of every message relayed.Messages processed will be filed in date-time-group order wherepracticable.5-10

NTP 8(D)c. The GENERAL MESSAGE FILE contains a copy of all generalmessages (see paragraph 616) that require retention by the member.This file is subdivided by the title of each general message andfiled in serial number order.d. Files may be combined for convenience of storage, filing,and referencing. They may be maintained by electronic means(removable media, not hard disk drives).e. COMMUNICATION LOGS - A log of station operations will bemaintained in chronological order. Contents should include, atthe minimum, time, frequency, station called, mode of operationand summary of traffic handled. Any transmission relating to asignificant event or emergency also should be summarized.Relevant, unchanging information such as power output need not berepeated. Automated logging systems associated with mailboxoperations are sufficient when supported by a one-time record offixed information.561. RECORDS DISPOSALa. Communication files and logs shall be retained as follows(after which they may be destroyed):YEARS.(1) Messages incident to distress or disaster: THREE(2) Messages incident to or involved in any claim orcomplaint of which the station has been notified: TWO YEARS, oruntil complaint or claim has been fully satisfied (whicheverhappens last).(3) Messages of historical or continuing interest:PERMANENTLY. When no longer needed for local reference, thesemessages shall be forwarded to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.(4) General Messages: UNTIL SUPERSEDED OR CANCELED.(5) All other messages: SIXTY DAYS.b. Logs, record sheets, registers, or incoming and outgoingmessages, and facsimile files shall be retained and/or destroyedper the preceding provisions for messages containing similarinformation.5-11

NTP 8(D)570. MINIMIZEMINIMIZE is a condition designed to drastically reduce normalmessage and radiotelephone traffic in order that messagesconnected with an actual or simulated emergency will not bedelayed.a. Authority to impose MINIMIZE on MARS networks is limitedto Chief, NAVMARCORMARS and above. Any decision to imposeMINIMIZE will be based, in part, upon the followingconsiderations:(1) The advice or information received from an areadirector.(2) Impact incoming traffic is having on local MARS radiostations and their ability to effect delivery.(3) Degree of operational necessity based upon presentindications or past experience.b. MINIMIZE may be imposed in a specific MARS state or worldwideand include either message or radiotelephone traffic or both.Depending upon the circumstances, MINIMIZE may include incomingand/or outgoing traffic to the state. When MINIMIZE is necessary,Chief, NAVMARCORMARS will notify all MARS areas by message. Themessage ordering MINIMIZE will include the word "MINIMIZE" andspecify the scope and the reason, if required. The message mayalso contain the duration (if known). When MINIMIZE is imposed onMARS networks, the criteria set forth below will be followed byall stations:(1) The release of welfare and routine traffic destinedfor the emergency area will be discontinued.(2) Routine traffic already in the system and destined forthe emergency area will be held by the respective station untilMINIMIZE is lifted.(3) Stations will continue to transmit any message that isPRIORITY or above via normal channels.(4) Official communications will normally be handled aheadof personal messages regardless of precedence.5-12

NTP 8(D)(5) Chief, NAVMARCORMARS will cancel MINIMIZE whenconditions permit.580. COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY/INFORMATION CLASSIFICATIONa. Communications security is the protective measure taken todeny unauthorized persons information derived from communicationsmaterial or to mislead unauthorized persons in theirinterpretation of such communications. Communications security isa means, not an end. Rules governing communications security donot attempt to meet every conceivable situation. With operationalefficiency, it is possible to obtain a satisfactory degree ofsecurity with minimum delay or interference.b. Classified matter is information or material in any formor of any nature which requires protection in the interest ofnational defense. MARS members shall not knowingly accept anymessage containing classified matter.c. Sensitive information may not necessarily be classified,but could be harmful to the United States interests, activities,or policies if improperly disclosed. The following specifiedinformation falls in this category; the transmission of suchinformation over a Navy-Marine Corps MARS network is prohibited:(1) Military unit designation, strength, composition,function, or logistical matters.(2) Location and movement of units, aircraft, ships,supplies, and personnel.(3) Economic, political, or morale information pertainingto U.S. or foreign troops or nationals.(4) Casualty information relating to injuries and deathsfrom enemy action.(5) International problems or political discussions.581. PREVENTING AND REPORTING LOSS OR UNAUTHORIZED DISCLOSUREa. Each person who has knowledge or custody of classifiedinformation is responsible for preventing its loss or unauthorizeddisclosure. MARS members accepting communications fortransmission via MARS are responsible to assist in preventing theunauthorized disclosure by screening message contents or byinstructing users in regard to security.5-13

NTP 8(D)b. Any person discovering a suspected loss or unauthorizeddisclosure of classified matter shall notify the MARS areadirector, or in the case of an operator at the military auspicesstation, his immediate superior or other appropriate authority, asrapidly as possible. The subject shall not be discussed over theair or telephone. Non-military MARS members, after making theinitial notification, shall await further instructions from theappropriate authority.5-14

NTP 8(D)CHAPTER 6GENERAL COMMUNICATION OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS600. MESSAGE DEFINITIONA message is any thought or idea expressed briefly in plainor cryptic language, prepared in a form suitable for transmissionby any means of communication. Communications requiring deliverynormally are prepared for transmission as brief and concisemessages.601. MESSAGES: BASIC FORMSa. PLAINDRESS - A message in which the originator andaddressee designations are external to the text. Unless the callserves as the address, a PLAINDRESS message contains all thecomponents shown in the basic message schematic diagram inparagraph 602, except that the prefix may be omitted. APLAINDRESS message always must include the following elements:(1) Precedence and(2) Date-Time-Groupb. ABBREVIATED PLAINDRESS - Operational requirement for speedof handling a message may require abbreviation of PLAINDRESSmessage headings. In such a case, any or all of the following maybe omitted:(1) Precedence(2) Date(3) Date-Time-Group (A time-group consisting of the hourand minutes may be used either in the message heading or at themessage ending, following the BT prosign); and/or(4) Group count.c. CODRESS - A CODRESS message carries in the encrypted textthe entire address, i.e., originator and all addressees. Theheading contains all components shown in the message schematicdiagram except the address. Upon receipt of the message in thearea of destination, the message will be re-filed into the NavalTelecommunication System at or by one of the designated MARS/Naval6-1

NTP 8(D)Communication System refile points/stations. CODRESS messageswill not be normally handled by NAVMARCORMARS.602. MESSAGE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMa. Messages prepared for transmission will be eitherPLAINDRESS, ABBREVIATED PLAINDRESS, or CODRESS and will have threeparts as follows:(1) Heading(2) Text and(3) Ending.b. Message "PARTS" are sub-divided into "COMPONENTS".c. Message "COMPONENTS" are sub-divided into "ELEMENTS".d. In the following diagram, it should be noted that everyelement is indicated in the order of appearance in the message,but the contents of the various elements are not necessarilyindicated as they will appear. For radiotelephone operations,substitute the corresponding prowords and phrases for the prosignsand operating signals.MESSAGE FORMAT SCHEMATICFORMATPARTS COMPONENTS ELEMENTS LINE CONTENTSHandling 1InstructionsProcedure Call 2,3 Station(s) calledH(Prosign XMT, exemptedcalls). Prosign DE andstation calling.TransmissionStation serial number.IdentificationETransmissionInstructions4 Prosign T; G; F;Operating signals; Callsigns; Address groups;plain language.6-2

NTP 8(D)Preamble Precedence,Adate-timegroup,messageinstructionsD Address Originator'ssign;originatorActionIaddresseesign; actionaddressee.InformationNaddresseesign;informationaddressee.GExemptedaddresseesign;exemptedaddressee.Prefix Accountinginformation;Group count.5 Precedence prosign; dateand time expressed indigits and zone suffix;month and year, operatingsignals.6 Prosign FM; Originator'sdesignator. (Call sign orplain language.)7 Prosign TO; actionaddressee designator.(Call sign or plainlanguage.)8 Prosign INFO; informationaddressee designator.(Call sign or plainlanguage.)9 Prosign XMT; exemptedaddressee. (Call sign orplain language.)10 Accounting symbol; groupcount.BREAK 11 Prosign BTTEXText Subjectmatter.12 Internal instructions;basic idea of theoriginator.TBREAK 13 Prosign BTENDINGProcedure Time group 14 Hours and minutesexpressed in digits andzone suffix, whenappropriate.Final15 Prosigns B; AS; C;instructionsoperating signals.Ending sign 16 Prosigns K; AR.603. DISCUSSION OF SPECIFIC MESSAGE ELEMENTSa. Handling Instructions are used in traffic relay andconsists of the precedence prosign repeated twice followed by therouting indicators designating delivery responsibility.6-3

NTP 8(D)Example: RR NOASA NOASGb. Call - Contains the call sign(s) of the station(s) called,the prosign XMT and exempted call sign(s), the prosign DE and thecall sign of the calling station. The call is used only inradiotelephone or keyboard-to-keyboard digital nets.Example: NNNØALS XMT NNNØADD NNNØBBB DE NNNØAAA ....etc.c. Transmission Identification - Used only in traffic relay.It is a number assigned by operating personnel to a message tofacilitate its identification and handling. Generally, stationserial numbers are assigned consecutively to each outgoingmessage. A new set of station serial numbers is begun at 0001Zeach day or the first day of each week, month or year and eachmessage is assigned a consecutive serial number without regard tothe station to which the message is transmitted.Example: RR NOASGDE NNNØADD ØØ1d. Transmission Instructions - Prosigns, address designationsand operating signals concerning the actual transmission of amessage which are appended by communications personnel. When notin direct communication with all addressees, transmissioninstructions must be used except when routing indicators areassigned or when the station called has fixed responsibility fordelivery.Example: NNNØADD DE NNNØAAAT ... etc.e. Precedence - Assigned and handled per paragraph 631 andindicated by the appropriate prosign. Dual precedence may beused. The higher precedence (for action addressees) is indicatedfirst.Example: NNNØADD DE NNNØAAATP R ..etc.f. Date-Time-Group - The date-time-group is expressed as sixdigits and a zone suffix, followed by the abbreviation of themonth and the four digits of the year. The first two digitsdenote the day of the month; the second pair of digits denotes thehour; and the third pair of digits denotes the minutes. UTC isnormally used and the zone suffix therefore would normally be Z6-4

NTP 8(D)(ZULU). The first to the ninth days of the month are representedby Ø1 to Ø9. Abbreviated PLAINDRESS messages may carry nodate-time-group or the DTG may be replaced by a time group,omitting the date, and transmitted after the precedencedesignation or before the final instructions.(1) Each message originated by a station shall be assigneda different date-time-group.(2) The times 24ØØZ and ØØØØZ shall not be used andpatterns of even times should be avoided to avoid confusion.g. Message Instructions - The message instructions containany operating signal which pertains to the message itself and mustbe transmitted to all addressees.Example: NNNØADD DE NNNØAAATP R 131ØØØZ MAR 2Ø1Ø ZELh. Address Elements - The elements in the address componentof a message use address designators which include call signs,address groups, plain language titles (including abbreviatedtitles), and routing indicators. Any combination of letters andnumerals or pronounceable words designated for use in messageheadings to identify a command, authority, unit or communicationfacility, or to assist in the transmission and delivery ofmessages may be classed as an address designator. Plain languageaddress designators are normally confined to abbreviated titles ofcommands and activities. All numerals in abbreviated short titlesshall be spelled out except numbers one through nineteen whichwill be spelled or written as such.EXAMPLES:Commander Sixth Fleet ............. COMSIXTHFLTCommander Task Force 140 .......... CTF ONE FOUR ZEROCommander Destroyer Squadron 10 ... COMDESRON TENThe use of both plain language and call sign designators in amessage address is not authorized. However, to improve efficiencyin the handling of personal communication within MARS, personalmessages may contain the call sign of the originating station andthe plain language designator of the addressee. The address shouldinclude the telephone number or UNK, if not known. This appliesonly to third party messages and does not preclude the use of6-5

NTP 8(D)passing instructions to be included in the text if delivery via aspecific MARS station is desired.Example: R 1316Ø1Z MAR 2Ø1ØFM MRS JOSEPH P JONES ALEXANDRIA VA/NNN0ATS VATO MR JOSEPH P JONES1234 MAIN STREET NEPEAKSVILLE SC 294ØØ8Ø3-324-5522i. Originator - Contains the originator prosign "FM" followedby the originator's designation. In the interest of brevity, callsigns shall be used when possible.Example: FM NNNØASA VAj. Action Addressee - Contains the action prosign "TO"followed by the action addressee(s) designation(s).Example: TO NNNØASN ORk. Information Addressee - Contains the information prosign"INFO" followed by the information addressee(s) designation(s).Example: INFO NNNØASG MIl. Exempted Addressee - The exempted addressee is only usedin conjunction with collective calls, e.g. NNNØALL, NNNØALS,NNNØALD, if the originator desires a specific station(s) includedin the collective call sign to be exempt. The exempt addresseecontains the prosign, XMT followed by the addressee designation(s)of the exempted station(s).Example: INFO NNNØALDXMT NNNØASI PANNNØASG MIm. Accounting Information - Accounting information is usedonly on messages for refile with commercial facilities through thedesignated refile stations within the Naval TelecommunicationSystem.n. Group Count - The group count is normally contained incoded group messages only. However, when used in plain languagemessages, groups are to be counted per the following rules:6-6

NTP 8(D)(1) Count text groups only.(2) Punctuation and symbols are not counted unless spelledout or abbreviated.(3) Sequence of characters not interrupted by a space iscounted as one group.(4) The proper names of countries, cities, or streetsconsisting of two or more separate words should normally bewritten and counted as one group, i.e. San Salvador, San Diego,Salt Lake City, but when written separately, they will betransmitted and counted as separate groupsGROUPCOUNTDate-time-group 1Date time group 3New York 2(Joseph Smith) 2PAREN Joseph Smith UNPAREN 4Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS 4Chief, NAVMARCORMARS 2Example: GR 9BTUNCLASTHE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOGBTo. Text - The text format will be in accordance withparagraph 604.p. Time Group - The Time Group contains the hour and minutesexpressed in four digits and the Zone suffix. The time group isnormally used only in Abbreviated PLAINDRESS.q. Final Instructions - Includes the prosigns B, C, and/or AS(operating signals and address designations as required).r. Ending Sign - The ending sign is to indicate the end ofthe message and contains the proword OVER or OUT (prosigns K andAR, respectively). The two prowords will NOT be used in any onetransmission. In record messages, four N's will be used toindicate the end of message.6-7

NTP 8(D)Example for record messages: (text)BTNNNNExample radio telephone messages: (text)BTOVERExample for keyboard-to-keyboard SCD messages: (text)BTNNNNK604. MESSAGE TEXT FORMATEach message text, except tactical and proforma messages,shall be in the following sequence. Where elements listed areomitted, the sequence shall be adjusted accordingly.a. Classification or the abbreviation UNCLAS.b. Exercise identification (EXERCISE SPEED-COMM) (DRILL)NOTE: EXERCISE messages are handled like any other message.DRILL messages are sent between individual stations for trainingpurposes and are not introduced into the Winlink 2000 System.c. Subject line, concise identification of subject matter notnormally to exceed one line.Example: SUBJ: NET OPERATIONSd. Special handling instructions that cannot be properlyindicated in the HEADING section may be included after the subjectline and before the references or message text.Example: PASS TO ALL NET CONTROL STATIONSe. Reference(s), identified by letter(s).Example: A. NNNØASA VA 12Ø5ØØZ MAR 2Ø1ØB. MY 14Ø3Ø2Z MAR 2Ø1Øf. When a referenced letter or message is not held by anaddee and not needed, the reference shall be followed by the word"NOTAL".6-8

NTP 8(D)Example: A. NNNØASA VA 12Ø5ØØZ MAR 2Ø1Ø NOTALg. When a reference is not held by an addee and is needed,the reference shall be followed by the word "PASEP" and thereference passed to the addee(s) by forwarding a copy of a letteror readdressing the message.h. If a referenced message was forwarded by mail, e-mail orcourier, so indicate.Example: A. NNNØASA 12Ø5ØØZ MAR 2Ø1Ø MAILi. Expression of the thought: in the interest of brevity,abbreviations which are well known and/or those contained in AnnexH should be used.j. Paragraphs are numbered.k. Subparagraphs are lettered or numbered as appropriate.l. The American Relay Radio League (ARRL) and/or NMATabbreviated text may be used in personal messages, following theabove format as necessary.Example: BTUNCLASARL SIXTY THREEBTm. Service messages need not adhere to the format prescribed.See paragraph 611.610. BASIC MESSAGE TYPES611. SERVICE MESSAGESA service message is a short, concise message betweencommunication personnel which is used to obtain informationregarding the handling of communication matters. A servicemessage is a bonafide message and shall be accorded promptattention. If action cannot be completed within a reasonabletime, the station originating the service will be so notified.Prosigns and operating signals will be used to the maximum extentto obtain and provide corrections, or repetitions. Servicemessages are normally assigned a precedence the same as themessage being serviced. A service message may be identified byone of the following:6-9

NTP 8(D)a. Reference to an original message.b. Reference to another service message.c. The abbreviation SVC is the first word of the textfollowing the classification, (UNCLAS).Example 1 - (Request message, referencing an originalmessage):R 12Ø8Ø3Z MAR 2Ø1ØFM NAV VATO NNNØGAN HIBTUNCLAS SVCZEI NNNØGAN 1122Ø1Z MAR 2Ø1Ø. TO MRS SAM JONES 2365 WESTDALE CT,WALDORF MD 2Ø6Ø1-Ø13Ø 3Ø1-555-1234 BT.BT(ZEI - ACCURACY IS DOUBTFUL OF HEADING OF MESSAGE RECEIVEDAS FOLLOWS...CHECK TO STATION OF ORIGIN IF NECESSARY ANDREPEAT.)Example 2 - (Reply message, referencing another SVCmessage):R 13ØØ11Z MAR 2Ø1ØFM NNNØGAN HITO NAV VABTUNCLAS SVCZUI YOUR 12Ø8Ø3Z MAR 2Ø1Ø. C MY 1122Ø1Z MAR 2Ø1Ø TO READ TOMRS SAM JONES 3256 WESTDALE CT, WALDORF MD 2Ø6Ø1-Ø13Ø3Ø1-555-1234 BT.BT(ZUI - YOUR ATTENTION IS INVITED TO...)612. MESSAGE READDRESSALWhen an additional addressee requires or needs to have theinformation contained in a particular message, the messagerecipient may readdress that message to additional addressee(s) bya supplemental heading. The readdressal header will show thereaddressing addressee as the originator, action and/orinformation addressees, a precedence prosign, a date-time-group,6-10

NTP 8(D)and, when necessary, message instructions and transmissioninstructions. The following rules apply to message readdressals:a. That part of the original message preceding the preambleis omitted.b. The new precedence assigned applies to the supplementaryheading.c. The preamble of the original message indicates thebeginning of the original message.d. Readdressed messages are filed under the original DTG.The READDRESSAL DTG will not be used as a message reference.e. A message received for information (INFO) may only bereaddressed for information (INFO). A message received for actionmay be readdressed for action (TO) or information (INFO).f. If it is necessary to inform any of the originaladdressees or the originator that a message has been readdressed,they may be included in the supplementary heading.g. An originator desiring to add addressees to a messagepreviously transmitted will normally do so by READDRESSAL.Example: Original message:R 13Ø5Ø5Z MAR 2Ø1ØFM NNNØASA VATO NNNØASG MIINFO NNNØASF NEKNNNØASE ORBT...Readdressal of original message:R 141122Z MAR 2Ø1ØFM NNNØASF NEKINFO NNNØASI PAR 13Ø5Ø5Z MAR 2Ø1ØFM NNNØASA VA...6-11

NTP 8(D)613. SINGLE ADDRESS MESSAGESA single address message is destined for only one addressee.614. MULTIPLE ADDRESS MESSAGESA multiple address message is destined for two or moreaddressees, each of whom must be informed of all the addressees.Originators of messages should limit the number of addressees,whether action or information, to those for whom the informationcontained in the text is essential. Over addressing of messagescan lead to a burden on those who handle the message.615. BOOK MESSAGESA book message is destined for two or more addressees and isof such a nature that the originator considers that addresseesneed not be informed of other addressees. However, each addresseewill be indicated as an action or information recipient. A bookmessage is identified by the operating signal "ZEX" (and ZEZ ifappropriate), in format line 5. Addressees of book messages aredivided into groups according to the relay stations which servethem. For each group of addressees, a separate message isprepared and transmitted. Each book message is assigned a newstation serial number but retains the same date-time-group for allbooks of the same message. A receiving relay station may furtherreduce the book message to a single address message to itsstations of responsibility, if desired. This applies whether themessage is delivered by rapid means or by mail and includes allconfirmation copies. Addressees shall not readdress book messagesoutside their area of responsibility.Example: Message as originated:R 132218Z MAR 2Ø10 ZEXFM NNNØASA VATO NNNØASG MINNNØASE ORNNNØASF NEKBTSame message as prepared for transmission over differentchannels:R 132218Z MAR 2Ø1Ø ZEXFM NNNØASA VATO NNNØASE ORBT6-12

NTP 8(D)R 132218Z MAR 2Ø1Ø ZEXFM NNNØASA VATO NNNØASG MINNNØASF NEKBT..ETC..616. GENERAL MESSAGESA general message has a wide distribution and is assignedan identifying title. Each message of a given title carries aserial number in a sequence which covers a calendar year. Ageneral message content may be directive in nature or promulgateinformation to the addressees. General messages may only beoriginated by Chief, MARS, area, region or state directors andspecialty network coordinators.a. Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS Broadcasts are sent usingthe following format:FM CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURG VATO ALNAVMARCORMARSBTUNCLASSUBJ: CHNAVMARCORMARS BCST 11-Ø9etc.b. Area Broadcasts are sent using the following format:FM NNNØASI PATO NNNØALL NORTHEAST AREAINFO NNNØASA VANNNØALD (OPTIONAL)BTUNCLASSUBJ: NORTHEAST AREA BCST Ø3/Ø9etc.c. Region Broadcasts are sent using the following format:FM NNNØAS3 VATO NNNØALL REGION THREEINFO NNNØASA VABTUNCLASSUBJ: REGION THREE BCST Ø3/Ø4etc.d. Broadcasts sent by state directors or specialty networkcoordinators shall follow a format similar to that for RegionBroadcasts above except the action addressee shall use the6-13

NTP 8(D)collective call sign for the state or specialty network as setforth in Annex K.e. Broadcasts remain effective until canceled by theoriginator.f. The first broadcast of each calendar year shall list allbroadcasts which remain in effect from previous years. Allprevious years broadcasts which are not in this listing arecanceled and need no longer be retained.620. MISSING AND DELAYED MESSAGES621. TRACER MESSAGESA tracer message is a service message to determine the reasonfor inordinate delay in delivery or non-delivery of a message.Tracer action must commence within 30 days from the date of themessage being traced. All tracer messages must be acted uponpromptly. A station's failure to respond to tracer action canonly be construed to mean that the fault lies within that station.All tracer messages shall include Chief, NAVMARCORMARS and theappropriate area and region directors as information addressees.622. DELAYED MESSAGESThe MARS Station making the ultimate delivery to theaddressee will initiate tracer action by notifying the originatorof an inordinate delay of a message. The stations will firstcarefully examine their records and the message heading todetermine if the cause can be ascertained and adequately explainedprior to commencing tracer action. Cognizance must be taken ofany adverse circuit or traffic conditions previously known orreported by intermediate relay stations which would have causeddelay before initiating such action. If the cause for delaycannot be locally established, the originating station of thatmessage will normally transmit a routine tracer message to thefirst relay station to which the delayed message was transmitted,citing the message date-time-group, station serial number, thedate and time the message was transmitted (TOD) and otheramplifying data as required. Tracer action will continue on astation-to-station basis until the cause of delay has beendetermined. Upon receipt of an inordinate delay tracer, eachstation will examine its records for time of receipt and time oftransmission of the traced message. This information will becompiled and transmitted with the tracer action to the nextstation in the relay path and INFO to the station which originatedthe tracer, Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, the area and region directors.6-14

NTP 8(D)If any station which handled the tracer message caused delay, thereason for the delay and corrective action taken will be stated inthe report.Examples:Inordinate delay tracer to first relay by originating stationR 16Ø23ØZ JAN 2Ø1ØFM NNNØAAB SCATO NAV VAINFO NNNØASA VANNNØASE ORNNNØAS9 AZNNNØEFB SCBTUNCLAS SVCZUI NNNØAAB 1Ø1425Z JAN 2Ø1Ø NNN0EFB TOR 15/1Ø28Z. 5 DAYSDELAY. ZDNBTNote: ZDN - REPORT DISPOSAL OF MESSAGE YOUR STA WITH ANYREASON FOR DELAYRelay station's report on an excessive delay tracer:R 16Ø25ØZ MAR 2Ø10FM NAV VATO NNNØRSE SCINFO NNNØASA VANNNØAAB SCANNNØASE ORNNNØASG MINNNØAS4 GANNNØAS9 AZNNNØEFB SCBTUNCLAS SVCZUI NNNØAAB 1Ø1425Z MAR 2Ø1Ø NNNØEFB TOR 15/1Ø28Z. 5 DAYSDELAY. TOR 1Ø/1438Z ZDQ NNNØRSE 1Ø/2347Z. 9 HOURS DELAYTHIS STA DUE SKED. ZDNBT623. LOST MESSAGESUpon verification of non-receipt of a message, theoriginating station will retransmit the message as a duplicate6-15

NTP 8(D)(ZFG) to the station(s) claiming non-delivery and transmit aservice message tracer to the first relay station involved withthe original transmission. The latter station, after determiningthat mishandling was not involved, will then transmit the tracerto the next relay station for action and to the originatingstation, the station claiming non-delivery, Chief, NAVMARCORMARS,and the area and region directors for information. Such actionwill be continued on a station-to-station basis until the causefor the lost message has been determined and reported to theoriginating station, station(s) claiming non-delivery, Chief,NAVMARCORMARS, area and region directors. The following is arecommended SVC message text to be used when initiating orcontinuing tracer action regarding non-deliveries:R 141521Z MAR 2Ø10FM NNNØJPJ SCATO NNNØTEF SNDINFO NNNØASA VANNNØASE ORNNNØPPC MINNNØAS8 CWYNNNØAS9 AZBTUNCLAS SVCNNNØPPC CLAIMS NON DLVY NNNØJPJ Ø9141ØZ MAR 2Ø1Ø ZDQNNNØTEF 09/1422Z NCA. TRACE TO DESTINATION AND ADVISEBT624. UNDELIVERABLE MESSAGESA message that cannot be delivered due to incorrect orincomplete addressees will be serviced back to the originatingstation. The service message should state that the message wasnot delivered and show the portion of the heading in question asreceived (with maximum utilization of "Q" and "Z" signals).Example:BTUNCLAS SVCZDE4 YOUR 1ØØØØ1Z AUG 2Ø09 TO MRS SAM JONES 2ØØ1NOWHERE STREET. WALDORF MDBT6-16

NTP 8(D)630. MESSAGE PRECEDENCE631. PRECEDENCE ASSIGNMENTa. Assignment of the precedence to a message is theoriginators responsibility; however, the subject matter and timefactor involved determine the precedence. Precedence designationsindicate the relative order in which a message is handled withrespect to all other precedence designators, as follows:(1) To the originator - required speed of delivery to theaddressee.(2) To communication personnel - relative order ofhandling and delivery.(3) To the addressee - relative order in which he shouldnote the message.b. The precedence assigned to multiple address messageshaving both action and information addressees may be assigned asingle precedence, which indicates the precedence is for alladdressees, or two precedences, one precedence for all actionaddressees and a lower precedence for all information addressees.The higher precedence will always be placed first in the preamble.c. Precedences available include:(1) FLASH (Z): FLASH precedence is reserved for initialenemy contact messages or operational combat messages of extremeurgency. Brevity is mandatory. FLASH messages will be handcarried, processed, transmitted and delivered in the orderreceived and ahead of all other messages. Messages of lowerprecedence will be interrupted on all circuits involved untilhandling of the FLASH message is completed.(2) IMMEDIATE (O): IMMEDIATE is the precedence reservedfor very urgent messages relating to situations which gravelyaffect the security of national forces or populace. IMMEDIATEprecedence may be used on messages concerning the amplification ofinitial enemy contacts, logistical support when essential tosustain operations, widespread civil disturbance, warning of gravenatural disaster (earthquake, flood, storm, etc.), and distressassistance. IMMEDIATE messages are processed, transmitted anddelivered in the order received and ahead of all messages of lowerprecedence. Messages of lower precedence will be interrupted onall circuits involved until the handling of the IMMEDIATE message6-17

NTP 8(D)is completed. This is the highest precedence level expected to behandled on MARS circuits.(3) PRIORITY (P): PRIORITY is the precedence reserved formessages concerning the conduct of operations in progress and forother important and urgent matters when ROUTINE precedence willnot suffice. This is the highest precedence which normally may beassigned to administrative or personal messages. PRIORITYmessages will be processed, transmitted, and delivered in theorder received and ahead of all messages of ROUTINE precedence.Routine messages being transmitted should not be interruptedunless they are extra long and a very substantial portion remainsto be transmitted.(4) ROUTINE (R): ROUTINE is the precedence to be used forall types of messages which justify transmission by rapid meansbut are not of sufficient urgency and importance to require ahigher precedence. ROUTINE messages will be processed,transmitted and delivered in the order received and after allmessages of a higher precedence.632. SPEED OF SERVICE OBJECTIVESa. The established goal of these objectives is to ensure thefastest communications support possible. Regardless of theobjectives established, within the Military Auxiliary Radio System(MARS) message traffic will be handled as rapidly as possibleconsistent with security (when required) and accuracy. Theobjectives apply to the total elapsed handling time between writerand reader (time of file to time of delivery).b. The following guidelines apply:Precedence Prosigns ObjectiveFLASH Z As fast as humanly possible with anobjective of less than 10 minutes.IMMEDIATE O 30 minutes - 3 hoursPRIORITY P 18 - 24 hoursROUTINE R 24 - 48 hours640. MESSAGE CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES641. PUNCTUATIONPunctuation shall be used. It is essential for clarity.Punctuation marks used in naval messages shall be limited to the6-18

NTP 8(D)symbols listed below and appear on standard typewriter,teletypewriter and computer keyboards. Punctuation marks shall beprocessed and transmitted exactly as drafted, provided the meansof communication permits. Otherwise, communication personnelshall substitute authorized abbreviations or spell out thepunctuation mark.Punctuation equivalents:Name Symbol Abbreviation SpokenAmpersand & AMPSND AmpersandApostrophe ' APOS ApostropheAsterisk * AST AsteriskAt Sign @ (AT) At SignBack Slant \ BACK SLANT Back SlantColon : CLN ColonComma , CMM CommaDollar Sign $ DOLS DollarsEqual sign = EQUALS EqualsExclamation ! EXCL Exclamation PointHyphen or Dash - DASH DashNumber Sign # NR NumberParenthesis/Left ( PAREN ParenParenthesis/Right ) UNPAREN UnparenPercent % PCT PercentPeriod . PD PeriodPlus Sign + PLUS PlusQuestion Mark ? QUES Question MarkQuotation Mark " QUOTE/UNQUOTE Quote/UnquoteSemi-Colon ; SCLN Semi-ColonSlant Sign / SLANT SlantTilde ~ TILDE TildeUnderline _ UNDERLINE Underline642. PHONETIC ALPHABETWhen necessary to identify any letter of the alphabet, thestandard phonetic alphabet shall be used. This alphabet is listedbelow (syllables underlined carry the accent):LETTER PHONETIC SPOKEN AS LETTER PHONETIC SPOKEN ASA ALFA AL FA N NOVEMBER NO VEM BERB BRAVO BRAH VOH O OSCAR OSS CARC CHARLIE CHAR LEE P PAPA PAH PAHD DELTA DELL TAH Q QUEBEC KEH BECKE ECHO ECK OH R ROMEO ROW ME OHF FOXTROT FOKS TROT S SIERRA SEE AIR RAHG GOLF GOLF T TANGO TANG GO6-19

NTP 8(D)H HOTEL HOH TELL U UNIFORM YOU NEE FORMI INDIA IN DEE AH V VICTOR VIK TARJ JULIETT JEW LEE ETT W WHISKEY WISS KEYK KILO KEY LOH X XRAY ECKS RAYL LIMA LEE MAH Y YANKEE YANK KEYM MIKE MIKE Z ZULU ZOO LOOa. These equivalents are desirable in expressing lettereddesignations and in spelling words in radiotelephone operations.They will not be used:(1) When the actual word might be used; for example, 26degrees West (instead of 26 degrees whiskey).(2) When the abbreviation is readily recognizable andauthorized; for example, USN, USMC, MARS, NMAT, ARRL, etc.b. Personal initials shall be spoken phonetically prefixed bythe word "INITIAL" or "INITIALS". For example, "G M Smith" shallbe spoken "INITIALS GOLF MIKE SMITH."c. Letter-figure or figure-letter combinations are spokenphonetically as governed in chapter 7.643. NUMBERSTo distinguish numerals from written and spoken letters,figures and similarly pronounced words, the following written andpronunciation will be observed:WRITTEN SPOKEN WRITTEN SPOKENNUMERAL AS NUMERAL AS1 WUN 6 SIX2 TOO 7 SEVEN3 THUH-REE 8 EIGHT4 FO-WER 9 NINER5 FI-IV Ø ZEROa. The letters I and Z should be written in such a manner asto clearly distinguish them from the numbers 1 and 2. e.g. I as aclear capital I, and Z in the European style with a cross mark.b. The decimal point is to be spoken as "DEH-SEE-MAL". Forexample, 123.4 is spoken "FIGURES WUN TOO THUH-REE DEH-SEE-MALFO-WER".6-20

NTP 8(D)644. MONTH ABBREVIATIONSThe abbreviations to be used for the months of the year are:January ..... JANFebruary .... FEBMarch ....... MARApril ....... APRMay ......... MAYJune ........ JUNJuly ....... JULAugust ..... AUGSeptember .. SEPOctober .... OCTNovember ... NOVDecember ... DECWhere appearing together, month and year will be spoken as inthe following example: "JANUARY TWO ZERO ZERO THREE", "APRIL TWOZERO ZERO FOUR", etc.645. STATE ABBREVIATIONSThe following are the authorized state abbreviations:ALABAMA AL MONTANA MTALASKA AK NEBRASKA NEARIZONA AZ NEVADA NVARKANSAS AR NEW HAMPSHIRE NHCALIFORNIA CA NEW JERSEY NJCOLORADO CO NEW MEXICO NMCONNECTICUT CT NEW YORK NYDELAWARE DE NORTH CAROLINA NCDISTRICT OF COLUMBIA DC NORTH DAKOTA NDFLORIDA FL OHIO OHGEORGIA GA OKLAHOMA OKHAWAII HI OREGON ORIDAHO ID PENNSYLVANIA PAILLINOIS IL RHODE ISLAND RIINDIANA IN SOUTH CAROLINA SCIOWA IA SOUTH DAKOTA SDKANSAS KS TENNESSEE TNKENTUCKY KY TEXAS TXLOUISIANA LA UTAH UTMAINE ME VERMONT VTMARYLAND MD VIRGINIA VAMASSACHUSETTS MA WASHINGTON WAMICHIGAN MI WEST VIRGINIA WVMINNESOTA MN WISCONSIN WIMISSISSIPPI MS WYOMING WYMISSOURIMO6-21

NTP 8(D)646. FOREIGN COUNTRIES AND OTHER ABBREVIATIONSAFLOAT ATLANTIC AAAFLOAT PACIFIC APANTIGUA ISLAND ANANTARCTICAATAZORESAOBERMUDABICUBACUCANAL ZONE (PANAMA) CZDIEGO GARCIA DGGERMANY, FEDERALREPUBLIC OF GEGUAMGUICELANDICITALYITIWO JIMAIJJAPANJAKOREA, REPUBLIC OF RKMARCUS ISLAND MCMIDWAY ISLAND MWOKINAWAOAPHILIPPINES,REPUBLIC OF RPPUERTO RICOPRSPAINSPTHAILANDTHVIRGIN ISLANDS VI650. REFILING MESSAGES651. MESSAGE REFILE BASIC PROCEDURESA message retransmitted by a means different from that whichit was received must be converted into the proper format. Normallymessages to be refiled into the networks or the NavalTelecommunication System will not require converting.652. AMATEUR RADIO TO MARS REFILEAn amateur radio message will not be accepted for refile intoMARS unless it meets the message criteria contained in paragraph540. It is necessary to change the Amateur Radio message format tothe MARS format per this chapter. In converting the message tothe proper format, it is essential that the place of origin andthe time and date of origination be indicated.6-22

NTP 8(D)Example: Received via Amateur RadioNR56R W4SSN CK 7 NORFOLK VA 21ØØZ MAR 15WELDON RYE ITCS USNOPERATIONS DIV NAVCOMMTELSTASAN DIEGO CA 92132 286 262 Ø67Ø BTYOUR MESSAGE RECEIVED X SEE YOU SUNDAYBT HAROLDThis message refiled to NAVMARCORMARSR 1521ØØZ MAR 2Ø1ØFM NNNØZLS VATO ITCS WELDON RYE USNOPERATIONS DIV NAVCOMMTELSTASAN DIEGO CA 92132286-262-Ø67ØBTUNCLAS1. NR 56R W4SSN CK 7 NORFOLK VA 21ØØZ MAR 152. YOUR MESSAGE RECEIVED X SEE YOU SUNDAY3. HAROLD SENDSBT653. MARS TO AMATEUR RADIO REFILEThe refile of MARS messages into Amateur Radio Service shallbe in accordance with the criteria contained in paragraph 540.All NMAT texts shall be expanded with the meanings from Annex L.EXAMPLE: Received via NAVMARCORMARSR 181Ø15Z MAR 2Ø10FM PVT B J HARPER PHILADELPHIA PA/NNN0ABC PATO JAMES C HARPER62 ELM STREET NWWASHINGTON DC 2ØØ3Ø2Ø2-266-6299BTUNCLASBE HOME ON SATURDAY MAR 26, MEET ME AT THE BUS TERMINAL.BILLY JOE.BTThis message Refiled to Amateur RadioNRl6R K4NAA CK 13 PHILADELPHIA PA VIA MARS 1Ø15Z MAR 18JAMES C HARPER6-23

NTP 8(D)62 ELM STREET NWWASHINGTON DC 2ØØ3Ø PHONE 2Ø2 266 6299 BTBE HOME ON SATURDAY MAR 26 X MEET ME AT THE BUS TERMINALBT BILLY JOE654. NAVMARCORMARS REFILE TO OR FROM ARMY OR AIR FORCE MARSNavy-Marine Corps MARS, Army MARS and Air Force MARS all usethe same 16-line message format (see the Message Format Schematicin paragraph 602 above). There are minor differences in how thedifferent format lines are used between services. Stationsrelaying traffic to another service MARS will send the traffic inthe format they use in their service. The receiving station willmake any format changes that are necessary to ensure properdelivery in their service’s traffic system.660. CONTROL OF RADIO NETWORKSTo have an efficient operating network, it is necessary thatthe NCS control the operations of the network. However, controlaction should be limited to that required to maintain order or toimmediately restore order. Amplification of information regardinga breach of circuit discipline must be sent via letter, ratherthan tying up the net with lengthy exchanges. CommunicationImprovement Memorandums (CIMs) per paragraph 507.b are encouraged.6-24

NTP 8(D)700. GENERAL INFORMATIONCHAPTER 7RADIOTELEPHONE PROCEDUREThe three MARS services have issued a joint StandardOperating procedure for Calling and Operating a Voice Net. It isreproduced below:U.S. Military Affiliate Radio System (MARS)Joint Air Force, Army, Navy-Marine CorpsStandard Operating Procedurefor Calling and Operating a Voice Net.1. TERMS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. The following terms andsubstitutions will be used throughout this Standard OperatingProcedure (SOP):A1B2 is a sample net designatorNCS is the net control station (this would be substituted withthe net control’s actual call sign)FRQ1 represents a frequency designatorAAA, BBB, CCC, etc represent stations on the net.2. GENERAL PROCEDURES.a. Nets are under the direct and immediate control of the netcontrol station (NCS). The NCS is responsible to maintain netdiscipline at all times.b. Alternate Net Control (ANCS): It is often expedient tohave a station assigned in advance, or for NCS to designate astation at the start of the net, to serve as ANCS. The NCScould suddenly, and without warning, be gone from the net. It ishighly recommended that net managers take into consideration thevalue of predetermined ANCS assignments.c. Stations must first be checked into a net before they mayconduct any business on the net.d. Once checked in stations are expected to maintain constantwatch on the net, be prepared to respond when called, and be7-1

NTP 8(D)prepared to receive traffic at any time.e. Superfluous wording must be eliminated from transmissions.Stations are expected to use prescribed procedures at all times.Transmissions shall be short and concise, consistent withclarity.f. Stations will use only authorized prowords and inaccordance with their proper meaning only.g. No station should expect pleasantries or unnecessaryexplanations during a directed net.h. Record traffic must first be listed with the NCS, shall bepassed to another station only at the direction of NCS, and onlywhen the net is in directed net status.i. Stations are expected to remain for the duration of thenet unless granted permission by NCS to close down sooner.3. OPENING A NETa. Every net has a net designator as determined by suchfactors as type, administrative level, and location of the net.b. The net designator not only identifies a specific net, italso serves as a special case of collective call signrepresenting all stations checked into a net, or wishing tocheck in.c. NCS will make sufficient call ups at the start of the netin an effort to capture all the stations wishing to check in.d. NCS then proceeds with handling listed traffic then anyother net business and comments between stations. Trainingshould be conducted as required, or as directed by competentauthority. Training will always be done with the net indirected net status.e. Frequent call ups are important throughout the net.f. At the designated time the Net Control Station (NCS) willcall the net as follows:(1) Conditions good:(a) NCS starts the net with a call up by transmitting:A132, A132 THIS IS NCS OVER7-2

NTP 8(D)(b) The net designator is stated twice only in thefirst call up. This call up serves multiple functions. Itannounces the net, puts the net in directed net mode, andauthorizes stations to transmit for such purposes as checking inand listing traffic.(c) Stations wishing to check in do so according to thefollowing examples. Many nets have a large number of stationswishing to check in. It is essential that every station, beforetransmitting, listen carefully to avoid doubling. Key down,state the NCS call sign, let up momentarily to again be sure ofno doubling, then complete their transmission if the frequencyis clear.NCS (pause) THIS IS AAA, NO TRAFFIC, OVERNCS (pause) THIS IS BBB, ONE ROUTINE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA,OVERNCS (pause) THIS IS EEE, ONE PRIORITY AAA, ONE ROUTINE NEWYORK, OVERNCS (pause) THIS IS CCC, REQUEST COMMS BBB, OVERNCS (pause) THIS IS GGG, ONE ROUTINE AAA, OVER(d) NCS must acknowledge all check ins. This should bedone in the order stations checked in. NCS transmits:AAA, BBB, EEE, CCC, GGG THIS IS NCS, ROGER, OUT(e) If NCS did not fully hear a station, example CCC,NCS withholds acknowledging that station, finishes the remainderof the acknowledgements, then transmits:CCC THIS IS NCS, SAY AGAIN OVER(f) If NCS heard a station but did not hear the callsign, or only part of the call sign, NCS transmits an unknownstation call up. Note that only stations who attempted check in,but were not acknowledged are authorized to transmit at thistime. NCS transmits:UNKNOWN STATION THIS IS NCS, OVER.(g) If necessary NCS may call another station on thenet to relay an unknown station’s transmission.(2) Conditions Poor7-3

NTP 8(D)(a) When conditions are poor NCS will transmit the callup using words twice, without use of the proword WORDS TWICE.e.g.A1B2, A1B2 THIS IS NCS, NCS OVER(b) Upon hearing the call up with words twice stationschecking in will do so as under Conditions Good above bytransmitting:NCS THIS IS AAA, NO TRAFFIC OVER(c) Stations will not normally use WORDS TWICE unlessthe station believes WORDS TWICE is necessary to help assure NCSreceives his/her check in, or station is directed by NCS to doso. For example, NCS has a hard time hearing a station withcall sign beginning with C. NCS transmits:(d) UNKNOWN STATION, UNKNOWN STATION THIS IS NCS, NCSWORDS TWICE, WORDS TWICE, OVER(d) CCC having not heard his check in being recognizedtransmits:NCS, NCS THIS IS CCC, CCC, NO TRAFFIC, NO TRAFFIC, OVER(e) Note that the prowords THIS IS and OVER are notspoken twice.(f) If a station has traffic to list under theseconditions rather than list all the destinations, he/she shouldsimply state the number and precedence of message(s). NCS canlater obtain the destinations, or ask another station to obtainthat traffic listing. Example, BBB has 1 priority AustinTexas, 1 routine for AAA, 1 routine for New York City. Underhard to hear conditions BBB would check in as follows:NCS THIS IS BBB, 1 PRIORITY, 2 ROUTINE, OVER(g) NCS will acknowledge check ins in the same way asoutlined under Conditions Good above. Call signs will not betransmitted twice unless NCS deems it expedient to do so.(3) Limiting Check-ins(a) It may be desirable on larger nets to limit checkins by type or geographic area. This must be approved for eachnet or series of nets (e.g. all Region ECOM nets) by therespective director or Chief MARS (authority to approve may be7-4

NTP 8(D)delegated if authorized by the respective Chief MARS).(b) These check in limiters shall not be used exceptwhere a large number of check ins is anticipated and their useserves to help reduce doubling, save air time, and minimizeconfusion. Their use, when authorized, is not mandatory,unless so prescribed by competent authority. They exist as atool to aid NCS in maintaining net control and discipline.Only authorized phrases shall be used to modify the call upprocess. Each subsequent call up may use a different limiter,such as calling for stations one state at a time. Use of alimiter does not require that NCS always use limiters on everycall up. This should be based on a logical balance of the extraair time required versus the benefit of reducing problems.(c) the limiting call up would be:A1B2, A1B2 THIS IS NCS, (insert phrase here) OVER(d) The following are authorized phrases to limitcheck-ins and would replace the "insert phrase here" in theabove call up.• STATIONS WITH RECORD TRAFFIC ONLY• STATIONS WITH PRIORITY TRAFFIC ONLY (this would include anytraffic of higher precedence. May be used in combinationwith a geographic area, example DADE COUNTY FLORIDASTATIONS WITH PRIORITY TRAFFIC ONLY)• ALL NEW YORK ARMY MARS STAFF ONLY (substitute Navy or AF asappropriate. Replace "NEW YORK" with any logical MARSadministrative or operational zone such as Region Five, orCentral Area)• ALL ALABAMA STATIONS (substitute ALABAMA with any generallyunderstood geographic area including, but not limited to,state, county, borough, or city).• ALL STAFF REGION ONE (this could be further limited byrequesting only ECOM staff, only training staff, or anylogical limitation of station type); or,• by use of a collective call sign if that is most expedient.4. RADIO CHECKS, SIGNAL STRENGTH AND READABILITYa. A station is understood to have good signal strength and7-5

NTP 8(D)Readability unless otherwise notified. Strength of signalsand Readability will not be exchanged unless one stationcannot clearly hear another station.b. A station that wishes to inform another of his signalstrength and readability will do so by means of a short andconcise report of actual reception such as, weak butreadable, loud but distorted, Weak with interference, etc.Reports such as "five by five," "four by Four," etc., willnot be used to indicate strength and quality of reception.c. The prowords listed below are for use when initiatingand answering queries concerning signal strength andreadability:(1) General:RADIO CHECKROGERNOTHING HEARDWhat is my signal strength and readability;How do you hear me?I have received your last transmissionsatisfactorily. The omission of comment onsignal strength and readability isunderstood To mean that reception is loudand clear. If reception is other than loudand clear, it must be described with theprowords for (2) and (3) below.To be used when no reply is received from acalled station.(2) Report of signal strength:LOUDGOODWEAKVERY WEAKFADINGYour signal is very strong.YOUR SIGNAL STRENGTH IS GOOD.YOUR SIGNAL STRENGTH IS WEAK.YOUR SIGNAL STRENGTH IS VERY WEAK.At times your signal strength fades to such anextent that continuous reception cannot berelied upon.(3) Report of readability:7-6

NTP 8(D)CLEARREADABLEUNREADABLEDISTORTEDThe quality of your transmission isexcellent.The quality of your transmission issatisfactory.The quality of your transmission is sobad that I cannot read you.Having trouble reading you due tointerference.WITH INTERFERENCE Having trouble reading you due tointerference.INTERMITTENTHaving trouble reading you because yoursignal is intermittent.d. EXAMPLE (assuming abbreviated call signs are in use):Z34D desires a radio check with Y13C and transmits:THREE CHARLIE - THIS IS - FOUR DELTA - RADIO CHECK - OVERAll stations of the collective call hear Z34D loud andclear except C206 and D381. The replies of each station, inorder, are:THIS IS - NINE TWO - ROGER - OVERTHIS IS - ZERO SIX - READABLE - OVERTHIS IS - EIGHT ONE - WEAK WITH INTERFERENCE - OVERTHIS IS - SIX NINE - ROGER - OVERTHIS IS - SEVEN EIGHT - ROGER - OVERTHIS IS - NINE FIVE - ROGER - OVERZ34D indicates his reception of each of the calledstations was loud and clear except for C206, who wasdistorted, and D381, who was not heard, by replying:THIS IS - FOUR DELTA - ROGER - ZERO SIX DISTORTED -EIGHT ONE - NOTHING HEARD - OVERIn the event Z34D hear all stations loud and clear, the replywould have been:THIS IS - FOUR DELTA - ROGER - OUT7-7

NTP 8(D)5. FREE AND DIRECTED NET STATUSa. All nets will always begin in directed net status. Thismeans every station must have NCS permission to transmit.Record traffic may only be passed when the net is in directednet status.b. After traffic has been handled, and while the net is stillin directed net status, any necessary or prescribed trainingshall be conducted by NCS, designated training staff, or state,area, or region director.c. After all traffic, training, and net business has beenhandled NCS may put the net into Free Net status if Free Net isauthorized. Free Net means stations may contact each otherdirectly without prior permission of NCS. A station mayexchange informal comments with another station with thefollowing limitations:(1) All comments must, in some way, relate to MARSbusiness or the mission of MARS;(2) Comments need to be brief, consistent with clarity.(3) Stations must pause between turnovers intransmission to allow for another station to break in.(4) NCS may interrupt an exchange at any time and stop theexchange by calling a directed net. No explanation of NCSaction in this regard is expected and none need be given.6. ABBREVIATED CALL SIGNSa. After the first call up, and at his/her discretion, NCSmay authorize use of Abbreviated call signs provided such use ispermitted on this net.b. Full call signs must be used upon initial check in and anytime NCS directs use of full call signs. When abbreviated callsigns are authorized full call signs remain an acceptable option.c. NCS may, at his/her discretion, change back to full callsigns at any time. Examples of changing abbreviated call signauthorizations.A1B2 THIS IS NCS, ABBREVIATED CALL SIGNS AUTHORIZED, OUTA1B2 THIS IS NCS, USE FULL CALL SIGNS, OUT7-8

NTP 8(D)7. CHANGING NET CONTROL STATIONa. Occasionally it may be necessary or desirable to transfernet control to another station. This could be for a briefperiod or for the duration of the net. Assuming CCC is NCS andwishes to transfer control to AAA:AAA THIS IS CCC, ASSUME CONTROL, OVERCCC THIS IS AAA, ROGER OUT.AAA is now NCS. AAA will immediately make a call upA1B2 THIS IS AAA, OVER(1) This notifies the net AAA has assumed control, putsthe net in directed mode, and authorizes stations to check in orotherwise contact NCS.(2) Variations could include some instruction from NCS toAAA such as:AAA THIS IS CCC, ASSUME CONTROL FOR 10 MINUTES, OVER, orAAA THIS IS CCC, ASSUME CONTROL UNTIL (state a time), OVER(3) When CCC returns and wishes to resume control CCCwill, at a call up or on a free net, transmit:AAA THIS IS CCC I ASSUME CONTROL, OVER(4) At this point AAA will acknowledge CCC and notify CCCof any changes in net status, new traffic listings, trafficpassed, and stations that checked in or closed down while AAAwas net control.(5) CCC will acknowledge this information then make a callup. (It is never acceptable for CCC to tell AAA, “I wasmonitoring the entire time and have all the information.” Thisdoes not confirm to AAA that CCC in fact does have all theinformation.)b. Loss of NCS(1) It may happen that NCS suddenly, and without warning,disappears from the net. This could be due to equipment failure,power outage, sudden change in propagation, or any number ofreasons. If an alternate NCS (ANCS) has been assigned inadvance and he or she suspects something has happened to NCS,that station will first attempt to contact NCS. If no contactis made ANCS will ASSUME CONTROL, make a call up, and proceed asoutlined above.7-9

NTP 8(D)(2) If no ANCS has been designated any station who hearsthe net well shall assume ANCS duties.8. PASSING TRAFFICa. When ready NCS will call stations to pass their trafficbased on the precedence of each message and the availability ofaddressee(s) or another station to relay that traffic. NCS willthen direct the holding station on how to proceed.Example A:AAA THIS IS NCS, CALL 333 PASS ONE PRIORITY SAA OUT333 THIS IS AAA, ONE PRIORITY OVERAssuming 333 copies AAA well, he sendsAAA THIS IS 333, OVERTHIS IS AAA MESSAGE, RELAY PRIORITY (continue with themessage header and text, pausing approximately every 20 secondsto allow for a station with higher precedence traffic to breakin.)AAA ends his/her transmission withOVER,or in the case where there are additional messages to send tothis station,MORE TO FOLLOW, OVERAssuming BBB copied the message completely and does not needrepetitions he sendsTHIS IS BBB, ROGER OUTOr, to accept another messageTHIS IS BBB, ROGER OVERExample B:If BBB does not copy well he must notify AAA of the problemusing correct radio check prowordsAAA THIS IS BBB, WEAK READABLE, OVER7-10

NTP 8(D)OrAAA THIS IS BBB, UNREADABLE, OVERb. Breaking the Net(1) A station may interrupt the current flow ofcommunications on a net if he or she has a communication ofhigher importance which must be conveyed as quickly as possible.Such communications includes:(a) record traffic of a higher precedence than thetraffic being passed;(b) non-record traffic communication for one or morestations that is urgent, time sensitive, and may impact thesafety of persons or property.(2) The station wishing to break the net should wait forthe next natural pause in the communication currently takingplace; preferably waiting for the end of that communication.(3) The content of the breaking station’s communicationshould be the determining factor for establishing urgency, notsimply that the station has, for example, a PRIORITY precedencemessage and a ROUTINE message is currently being sent.(4) Breaking the net is a rare event. Normally, waiting aminute or two is not going to make a difference. If thebreaking station knows the current communication is lengthy orseveral messages are going to be sent then interrupting may benecessary.EXAMPLE:When a station has determined it is essential to break thenet he or she shall wait for a pause in the current transmission.He or she will then transmit the precedence of his/her trafficthree times, e.g.:PRIORITY, PRIORITY, PRIORITY (pause) NCS, THIS IS AAA, OVER(The pause is to see that the other station has heard and is notcontinuing his or her transmission.)NCS will transmit:AAA, THIS IS NCS, OVER7-11

NTP 8(D)AAA will then list his or her traffic or reason forbreaking the net.If it is evident that NCS does not hear the breaking stationany station on the net may relay by calling NCS and advising himor her of the breaking station. This should normally be one ofthe stations being interrupted.If NCS hears the breaking station, but it appears the stationcurrently engaged in communications did not, NCS willacknowledge the breaking station by transmittingAAA, THIS IS NCS, WAIT OUTNCS will then take steps to regain control of the net.c. Requesting Radio Check(1) If a station first wishes to determine how wellanother station hears him/her the station asks for a radio check.AAA THIS IS BBB, RADIO CHECK OVER.(2) If AAA copies BBB well AAA will replyBBB THIS IS AAA, LOUD AND CLEAR, OVER(3) Only authorized radio check phrases will be used. Theuse of ROGER to mean loud and clear is not an adequate responsesince ROGER simply means “I copied your transmission correctly”.It does not adequately state the condition.9. CLOSING DOWNa. Stations checking into a net are normally expected to beable to remain on the net for it’s duration, except in thecase of on-going ECOM nets of long duration. Any stationwishing to check out prior to end of net will call NCS, during acall up or on a free net, to request permission.b. NCS may authorize the station to secure if NCS believesthere will be no further need for that station. EEE wishes toleave the net.NCS THIS IS EEE, REQUEST TO CLOSE DOWN, OVEREEE THIS IS NCS, CLOSE DOWN, OUTc. NCS may acknowledge the request, but delay authorization.EEE THIS IS NCS, WAIT, OUT7-12

NTP 8(D)d. In the latter case EEE’s request has been acknowledged,but is not yet approved. NCS will need to call EEE back toauthorize his closing down.e. Stations may request a time to close down when theyinitially check in.NCS THIS IS EEE, NO TRAFFIC, REQUEST TO CLOSE DOWN AT 1520Z,OVERf. When acknowledging check ins NCS may require EEE to waitfor future authorization or he may grant the permission at thattime.EEE THIS IS NCS, CLOSE DOWN AT 1520Z, OUTg. Stations who have listed traffic during a check in shallnot be given permission to close down until a disposition hasbeen reached regarding all traffic listed by that station.Traffic must be passed to another station, delivered to theaddressees, or the station agrees to take it to another net.h. At the appointed time for a net to end, and NCS issatisfied that all traffic has been handled, NCS will close thenet as follows:A1B2 THIS IS NCS, CLOSE DOWN, OUTi. It is imperative that NCS be aware whether a net isauthorized to continue on past the designated end time. If itis not, NCS must arrange with stations holding traffic todispose of that traffic on another net. This must be done wellenough in advance of net end time to adequately take care ofthis business.j. In some cases NCS may be authorized to close down a netbefore it’s designated end time. For example, B1C3 net isassigned a one hour slot, but is authorized to close down after30 minutes of operation if there is no further traffic orbusiness to handle.k. Once the net is closed down no further transmissions areauthorized.7-13

NTP 8(D)THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK7-14

NTP 8(D)800. INTRODUCTIONCHAPTER 8DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS PROCEDURESa. This document provides prescribed procedures for operationof all digital modes used within Navy-Marine Corps MARS. Forpurposes of this document “digital communications” means anynon-voice transmission using a series of one or more tones orfrequency off-sets by radio frequency transmission. It is notintended to include any form of hardwire or internetcommunications.b. This document does not cover all the technical aspects ofmode transmission and reception, particularly where it is notrelevant to the receiving of a signal. Example, Audio FrequencyShift Keying (AFSK) verses true Frequency Shift Keying (FSK).c. The Allied Communications Procedures ACP-126 and ACP-127were used as the basis for these digital procedures. However,they shall not be referenced for training or proceduraldecisions in digital operations on MARS circuits.801. DEFINITIONSBBSBulletin Board System -- Any systemoperating as an automatic or semi-automaticsystem for storage, retrieval, andforwarding of messages.CWTransmission of information using MorseCode. by means of a single carrier,interrupted continuous wave signal.Digital Mode Any method by which intelligence is conveyedelectronically using one or more tones inpredefined patterns of on/off or shiftedconfiguration.OPSIGOperational Signal, Q and Z signals.OriginatorPerson who drafted the message and submittedit for transmission, the call sign or ID inthe FROM line of a message.Originating station Station that first put the message into theMARS system for forwarding/delivery.8-1

NTP 8(D)Voice SOPU.S. Military Affiliate Radio System (MARS)Joint Air Force, Army, Navy-Marine CorpsStandard Operating Procedure for Calling andOperating a Voice Net.WinLink 2000 (WL2K) An HF E-Mail system in which both radio andinternet systems are used for the storage,retrieval, and forwarding of messages. WL2Kprocedures are covered under separatedocumentation.810. DIGITAL VOICE AND ALEThe procedures in this document will not apply to digital voicetransmissions or Automatic Link Establishment (ALE). Thelatter uses digital data to connect two or more stations on acommon workable frequency. Neither is a digital communicationsmode within the scope of this document.820. WINLINK 2000 (WL2K)WL2K is a stand alone system not involving an NCS or directstation to station communication. The instructions, procedures,and protocol for WL2K are covered under separate documentation.830. LIAISON OUTSIDE MARSWhenever a MARS station is acting as liaison with an outsideagency or service that station is responsible to be aware of,and use, the digital protocols established by that agency orservice. This includes the use of machine functions. Anyprosign, proword, or handling instruction code used by anoutside agency and which does not directly and exactly translateto an operating signal, prosign, or proword in the MARS systemshall be converted to it's plain English meaning prior to entryinto the MARS system, unless it is part of the text of amessage. The actual text of a message shall never be changedexcept by instruction from the originator.840. CONTENT PROTOCOLa. On-the-air reference to HF frequencies will be made usingfrequency designators only.b. Digital transmissions shall, as far as practicable, adhereto the procedures established in the Voice SOP. This includes8-2

NTP 8(D)net procedures, call ups, check ins, establishing communicationsbetween stations, and other procedural matters. Wherepracticable prosigns and operational signals (Q and Z) shall besubstituted for prowords or the plain language equivalent.c. Identification of frequencies shall always be by center ofinformation. Dial or window frequency will not be used as thismay vary depending on Terminal Node Controller (TNC), otherhardware, and/or software used. The end result is thedetermining factor.Example:A 170 Hz tone spacing for RTTY shall be transmitted such thatthe low tone is 85 Hz below and high tone is 85 Hz above centerof-information.(Setting the dial 2.210 KHz below center ofinformation and transmitting tones of 2.125 and 2.295; orsetting the dial at 1.5 KHz below center and transmitting1.415KHz and 1.585 KHz tones produce the same end result)850. TRAINING AND TECHNICAL SUPPORTTraining in the use of digital modes and technical support arethe responsibility of each MARS service to determine the needand levels of training and support in each of the authorized andexperimental modes.860. ACCEPTABLE MODESThe following digital modes for radio frequency communicationhave been accepted for use by all three MARS services. Otherdigital modes may be added to this list upon agreement andapproval of all three MARS chiefs. Unapproved or experimentalmodes may be approved for experimentation only as defined below.Mode experimentation requires only the approval of the MARSChief of the respective service conducting the experiments.Experimental modes shall be limited to use as outlined below andmay not be used under any communications situation outside ofthat approved for experimental operations.a. VHF The primary mode for VHF digital operations shall bepacket, 1200 baud, frequency modulated (FM); with deviation nogreater than 2.5 KHz and no part of the audio spectrum greaterthan 3 KHz.. Exceptions may be granted on approval of the MARSchiefs, or where a specific authorized system requires it. Inall cases, digital operations on VHF shall be such that the8-3

NTP 8(D)transmitted signal does not exceed the authorized spectrum oftransmission (bandwidth).b. HF(1) The Primary digital modes for HF communications shallbe: Pactor and MT63(a) Pactor I, II, and III are authorized. The latergenerations (II and III) will automatically recognize andcommunicate with an earlier generation, e.g. Pactor I.(b) Pactor shall be used in ARQ for station to stationoperations. Pactor will normally be used in FEC for call ups,check ins, transmission of general messages, or where no link toreceiving stations is necessary or warranted.(c) MT63 will normally be used for call ups, check ins,transmission of general messages, or where no link to receivingstations is necessary or warranted.(2) Alternate authorized modes on HF include:AMTORBPSK31 and derivatives (BPSK63 and BPSK125)QPSK31 and derivatives (QPSK63 and QPSK125)CloverContestiaCWDRM (as implemented in WinDRM, EasyPal, Digtrx, etc.)MFSK16OliviaPACKETRTTY (RATT) See paragraph 170 for mode settings.c. Experimental Modes:(1) Experimental modes are authorized by the individualMARS service chief and do not require approval of all three MARSservices. Experimental modes are limited to operation asdescribed in this chapter. They may not be used across MARSservices without approval of the respective MARS chiefs, andremain limited to experimental authorization.(2) Experimental modes must have documented protocols and adescription of their functioning. They shall not exceed8-4

NTP 8(D)authorized bandwidth. Their transmission of tones must bestable. The non-intelligence content of transmissions from thesemodes may include such data as is necessary for errorcorrecting, acknowledgment, or other handshaking, but may notcontain any cryptic or undocumented coding intended to relayintelligence.(3) Experimental modes shall be restricted to use ondesignated experimental nets, frequencies authorized for stationto station experimentation, or, upon approval, on regular netswhere digital operations are authorized. Experimental modesshall not be used for passing of official traffic or conductingofficial business except as relates to the experimentation.Drill or exercise messages intended for the experimental processare permitted.(4) Any member recommending an experimental mode shallsubmit the information via their chain of command to their ChiefMARS for approval. The information shall include:(a) the means by which the mode is generated (all thatapply);(b) number of tones and tone settings;(c) baud rate or words per minute, and bandwidth;(d) a summary description of the mode;(e) a summary statement of how this mode might improveMARS operations;(f) Information on copyright(s), trademark(s), licensingrequirements, or other restrictions on it's use must also beincluded; and,(g) Any other information deemed necessary by therespective Chief MARS.(5) Any mode in use as of the implementation date of theseprocedures and which is not listed as a primary or alternatemode herein may continue in use as an experimental mode. Suchmodes must comply with paragraph 860.c. Such modes must havedocumentation filed as per 860.c.(4). The mode must beauthorized as an experimental mode by Chief MARS within 90 days8-5

NTP 8(D)of the implementation of these procedures. There afteroperation of modes not authorized must cease.d. Modes Defined. Modes are generally defined within thetechnical specifications for that mode. As such, only radioteletype (RTTY) and CW will be addressed here. See also 170.Mode Settings, below.(1) RTTY. Shall be sent at a rate of 100 WPM, 75 baud,using five level Murray (Baudot) code; diddle off, Unshift OnSpace off.(2) CW. Produces a single tone by transmission of aninterrupted continuous wave carrier. The zero beat of a CWsignal shall be on the center of information of the designatedfrequency. A CW signal may be generated by any means whichcreates this resultant carrier.(a) Audio modulation of an SSB signal with a single toneproduces the same transmitted effect and is authorized. Audiomodulation of an AM, FM, or PM signal is not authorized for thismode.(b) Operators must make a conscious effort to produceclear, consistent keying. Do not transmit at a speed fasterthan your ability to send properly. Sending operators must slowtheir sending speed if requested to do so by a receivingstation. This requirement does not apply to training nets wherethe purpose is to aid recipients to increase the speed at whichthey copy CW.(c) Nominal base speed for CW on a traffic net shall be10 WPM. This speed may be adjusted as conditions warrant bydirection of the NCS, or by agreement between two stations. NCSmay, in the interest of efficient net operations, establish aspeed for CW operations on the net. NCS may direct stations toan alternate frequency where the CW speed may be set byagreement between the stations involved.(d) Automatic, semi-automatic, and manual keying methodsshall be adjusted such as to produce properly proportionate dotsand dashes, letter/figures spacing within word groups, andspacing between word groups. Elimination of arching, or poorkeying such as may be caused by dirty contacts, is essential.e. Signal Quality. In all modes stations are responsible toemit a clean, clear signal. It is essential to eliminate all8-6

NTP 8(D)spurious components within the operator's control such as 60cycle modulation from a poor power supply and chirping.861. OPERATING PRECAUTIONSa. The attainment of reliability, speed, and security depends,to a large extent, upon the operating personnel. It isessential that they be well trained, maintain circuitdiscipline, and understand their responsibilities. The carewith which receiving operators scrutinize and handle incomingmessages has an important bearing on the overall speed oftraffic handling. When garbles or mutilations are recognizedand corrected before onward transmission, it permits immediaterecognition and correction of equipment irregularities andprevents subsequent delays.b. Adherence to prescribed procedures is mandatory.Unauthorized departures from prescribed procedures invariablycreates confusion, reduces reliability and speed, and tends tonullify security precautions. If the procedures prescribedherein do not cover specific operating requirements, resortingto initiative and common sense should suffice.c. No classified message shall be transmitted in plainlanguage over a non-approved channel except when clear procedurehas been authorized. (MARS handles only unclassified messages)d. all transmissions shall be in the English language, toinclude common or authorized abbreviations, uncommonabbreviations defined within the transmission, and authorizedoperating signals, prowords, and prosigns.e. Prosigns shall be used in place of prowords in digital modetransmissions except where the proword is part of the text of amessage, or no equivalent prosign exists. Operating signals (Qand Z) shall be used to maximize efficiency and reduce air timeof transmissions in digital modes.f. The following practices are specifically forbidden:(1) Use of other than authorized prosigns;(2) Unauthorized use of plain language in place ofapplicable prosigns or operating signals.(3) Profane, indecent, or obscene language;8-7

NTP 8(D)(4) transmission of sensitive, personal, or confidentialinformation including, but not limited to, information aboutanother MARS member, any military personnel, command, or unit,or the restricted information on movements of same;(5) coded messages;(6) message content in other than the English language.862. MODE SETTINGSa. Modes TableMODEBANDWIDTH TONES TYPE MISCAMTOR 170 2 ARQCONTESTIA 1000 32 FECMT 63 1000 * 64 FEC Long interleaveOLIVIA 500 16 FECRadio Teletype 170 ** 2 - not FEC or ARQ* MT63 shall normally be operated with 1000 Hz tone spacing,long interleave. Under poor conditions tone spacing may beshifted to 500 Hz. Under good conditions and where a stationhas a long message, or series of messages (over 100 lines), oron an emergency communications net, tone spacing may be set to2000 Hz. Interleave may be changed to short as conditionswarrant. These changes shall be made only upon agreementbetween stations or at the direction of the NCS. When tonespacing and/or interleave is changed a preliminary call shall betransmitted prior to sending traffic.** 200 Hz tone spacing is acceptable in RTTY and AMTOR. RTTYtransmission rate shall be 100 WPM, 75 Baud, diddle off, Unshifton Space (USOS) off.b. All digital transmissions sent via AFSK on SSB shall useupper sideband. Designated frequencies shall always be referredto by their center of information.Examples:(1) using USB voice with a 3 KHz nominal width on 4005 KHzthe dial frequency is 4003.5 KHz. This frequency will bereferenced as 4005 KHz.(2) a digital mode using 170Hz tone spacing generated froma TNC with low tone being 2125 Hz and high tone being 2295 Hzthe dial setting for center of information will be 2210 Hz down8-8

NTP 8(D)from the 4005 KHz center of information, or 4002.79 KHz. Thefrequency will be referenced as 4005 KHz.c. Where it is desirable to maintain the same dial setting forboth voice and digital, and where the digital tones areadjustable, as in a sound card generated signal, the tones shallbe set so as to conform to the above and maintain center ofinformation.863. MESSAGE ALIGNMENTa. Specific machine functions are necessary to facilitate thehandling of messages and to align receiving page of someteletypewriter equipment. They are less critical in mostdigital modes today than the extensive teletype alignment andcall up procedures of the past. However, some alignment isstill necessary to insure proper positioning of text by thereceiving station.(1) A preliminary call shall be used as follows:at the start of a net, or first digital communication betweentwo stations; whenever there is a change in the mode being used;at the direction of NCS; or, at the request of a receivingstation in station to station communications(2) In digital modes other than teletype reference to twocarriage returns and one line feed may be reduced to one (cr/lf)combination.(3) When any non-ARQ mode is used a preliminarytransmission shall be made prior to the first digital mode netcall up, or first digital transmission between two stations forthe exchange of traffic. The preliminary call shall be:(cr/lf) (cr/lf)AAA AAA DE BBB BBB (cr/lf)AAA AAA DE BBB BBB K (cr/lf)AAA represents the net designator or the station(s) beingcalled.(4) When teletype, or any mode that is not error checking(ARQ or FEC) is used the first digital transmission on a netshall consist of the following preliminary call:8-9

NTP 8(D)two (cr/lf) then one row of 64 characters consisting of RYrepeated as necessary followed by (cr/lf) and second line asfollows:THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG1234567890 DE (callsign) (cr/lf)) ((cr/lf))This will then be followed by a standard call up, or station tostation callExample:RYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRY(cr/lf)THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG1234567890 DE BBB AR(cr/lf) (cr/lf)A1B2 A1B2 DE NCS NCS K (cr/lf)Or(cr/lf)AAA AAA DE BBB BBB K (cr/lf)b. It should not be necessary to repeat the above preliminarycall ups during the remainder of a normal net unless there is achange in the mode being used. However, any station beingcalled may request a preliminary call to adjust equipment ortest the quality of copy prior to accepting traffic.c. Every digital transmission shall end with a (cr/lf)following the final intelligence content.d. No line shall exceed 69 characters, including spaces,except when authorized for special purposes by separate serviceinstructions.864. Up to 100 lines of continuous text may be transmitted inone section. Messages which exceed 100 lines of message textare considered to be long messages. Since long messagesmonopolize circuit time if transmitted without a break, they areseparated into transmission sections (as specified in Chapter 6for proword B) as follows:a. Separate the text at the end of a sentence at a convenientpoint not beyond 100 lines.b. Prior to the text and following the securityclassification, insert the plain language:'SECTION ONE OF FOUR'8-10

NTP 8(D)c. Each additional section is preceded by an identicalmessage heading and date time group but contains a differentstation serial number.d. The process is repeated as requirede. The final transmission section is identified:'FINAL SECTION OF FOUR'870. PROSIGNS AND OPERATING SIGNALS871. PROSIGN - MEANINGS AND EXPLANATIONSOnly authorized prosigns shall be used in MARS digitalcommunications. Prosigns, not prowords, shall be used indigital mode except where the proword is part of the text of amessage, or for training and explanation purposes. See AppendixB for list of prosigns authorized for use on digital circuits.Machine functions are not included.872. OPERATING SIGNALS (OPSIGs)Only authorized OPSIGs (also referred to as Q and Z signals)shall be used in MARS digital communications. Normallyoperating signals are not used in voice communications and shallbe converted to their plain English meaning unless part of thetext of a message. Authorized OPSIGs are listed in Appendix A.a. Operating signals are concise codes designed primarily foruse by communication personnel in exchanging informationincident to the handling of messages or in establishingcommunications. Communication personnel also use them in servicemessages.b. Operating signals provide no security and therefore must beregarded as the equivalent of plain language.c. The "Z" signals are designed to cover military requirementsand should be used whenever necessary in militarycommunications. "Q" signals may be used in militarycommunications where no suitable "Z" signal exists.8-11

NTP 8(D)d. The meaning of OPSIGs may be amplified or completed by theaddition of appropriate call signs, time groups, complementarygroups, etc. Call signs used to complement an operating signalnormally follow the signal, but under certain conditions, suchas to achieve clarity or to effect separation, they may beplaced ahead of the operating signal. Plain language isprohibited except when no other method is provided to completethe meaning.e. When desired, an operating signal may be given aninterrogative sense:(1) When communicating with military stations, by insertingthe prosign INT before the OPSIG.(2) Some non military stations may reverse the order, byinserting the prosign INT after the OPSIG and data used with it.f. Operating signals should not normally be used inradiotelephone procedure. Instead, the operating informationwill be conveyed by concise phrases. When it is necessary torelay operating signals over voice circuits, they aretransmitted by their phonetic equivalents.g. Blank spaces in the meaning of OPSIGs will be completed inthe order in which they appear; however, blank spaces enclosedin parenthesis normally will be completed on an optional basisonly.Example One:QBM NNNØAAA 1Ø1ØZ means: "Here is the message sent by NNNØAAAat 1Ø1ØZ hours."Note: The meaning assigned QBM is "Here is the message sentto....at... hours", therefore, as these blank spaces are notenclosed in parenthesis, all are completed in the order in whichthey appear.Example Two:ZKO NNNØAAA means: "I have handed over guard (to...) (on...KHzor MHz) (serial number of last message received was...)".However, in this example, the user elected to complete only oneof the blank spaces enclosed in parenthesis.8-12

NTP 8(D)880. CORRECTION, VERIFICATION, CANCELLATION881. OBTAINING CORRECTIONS AND REPETITIONSa. When used for repetitions and corrections, service messagesmay be assigned the precedence considered necessary toaccomplish their purpose.b. Service messages should be as brief as possible withoutbeing ambiguous.c. Corrections involving discrepancies in station serialnumbers, mutilations or garbles caused by mechanicaldifficulties are usually obtained from the station from whichthe transmission was received.d. Corrections of errors, other than those enumerated in c.above should be obtained from the station making the originaltransmission of the message.e. Corrections or requests for corrections should containidentification, transmission identification, if any, and suchother data as necessary to prevent confusion. If a word orgroup occurring more than once in a message is used to identifya part of that message, it is to be assumed that the firstoccurrence of that word or group is implied. If otherwiseintended, amplifying data such as adjacent words or groups mustbe included.f. When the transmission identification and the date-timegroup are in error, the message should be identified by quotingthe message heading and, if necessary, a portion of the text.g. If a message contains more that one error, alldiscrepancies in the same message should be cited in the samecorrection request.h. In requesting repetitions of the heading of a message, ifportions of more than one component are desired, a repetition ofentire heading must be requested. If portions of more than oneelement of the address component are desired, a repetition ofthe entire component must be requested. When the repetitiondesired is within one element of the address component, therequest for repetition must include the prosign of the elementand the prosign of the next element. The answers to suchrequests must include the entire element and the prosign of the8-13

NTP 8(D)next element. The same applies to corrections sent withoutrequests for repetition.882. MESSAGES FORWARDED SUBJECT TO CORRECTIONa. If corrections and repetitions cannot be obtainedimmediately, message received with portions missing or portionsof doubtful accuracy shall be delivered or forwarded subject tocorrection if the precedence is IMMEDIATE or higher or theoperational situation dictates. Discretion should be exercised,however, in forwarding or delivering transmissions that are sogarbled as to be of no value.(1) In local delivery, the missing or doubtful portionswill be indicated by appropriate notation on the message.(2) In forwarding, the appropriate operating signals (ZDG,ZEH, ZEP)will be included in the transmission instructions. Inaddition, ZEP will also appear in the message text whereportions are missing.b. A station delivering or forwarding a message “Subject toCorrection” is responsible for obtaining and forwardingcorrections.883. VERIFICATIONSa. Requests for verifications are initiated by addressees onlyand may be made by service or regular message.b. The prosign J may be used to request verification of theheading, or portions of the heading of any message; the entiretext of any message or a portion of the text of a plain languagemessage. J may be used to request verifications of portions ofencrypted messages only when the crypto system employed permits.When J is used for this purpose, numerals are used to indicatethe groups desired verified.884. CANCELLATION OF MESSAGESa. A message may be cancelled only by the originator, or atthe direction of the respective Chief MARS, or authorizeddesignee, where the message contains forbidden content. In thelatter case a service message shall be generated to theoriginating station and the originator informing them of thecancellation and the reason. Info addees may be included where8-14

NTP 8(D)state directors, training staff, or others may need to addressthe overall circumstances.b. Any member receiving a message for relay or delivery whichthe member suspects contains forbidden or illegal communicationshall suspend forwarding or delivery operations. Each MARSChief shall issue detailed instructions for handling andnotification of a suspended message.885. CANCELLATION OF A TRANSMISSIONa. While it is in progress a transmission may be canceled byuse of the error prosign EEEEEEEE and the ending prosign AR.Each letter of the error sign must be separated by a space.Example:NOW IS THE (CR) (LF)E E E E E E E E ARb. The prosign E E E E E E E E and AR shall not be used tocancel a transmission after a receipt has been given. A servicemessage containing operating signals or a service message mustbe used for this purpose.c. A station canceling a transmission is responsible for anyfurther action necessary in connection with the messageinvolved.890. TRACER ACTION891. DEFINITIONTracer action is the process by which an investigation isconducted to determine the reason for inordinate delay indelivery or non delivery of a message.892. TRACER ACTIONa. Request for tracer action may be generated by an originatorof a message or by any source interested in reasons why amessage was not delivered or was inordinately delayed. In caseswhere a message is deemed to be non-delivered, a MARS stationwho is the addressee, or on behalf of an addressee, is first tobe requested to check the communications records to ensure thatdelivery action has not taken place. Such a request shouldnormally be made either by the addressee or by service message8-15

NTP 8(D)from the COMMCEN serving the originator. Subsequent tracerrequests should be passed for action to the station serving theoriginator of the message in question.b. Upon receipt of a tracer request indicating non-receipt ofa message, the originating station shall either retransmit themessage as a duplicate or cancel it as directed by theoriginator. If a retransmission is made it shall be made as aduplicate with the message instruction ZFG in format line 5. Anymessage bearing ZFG in format line 5 shall be delivered.c. Upon receipt of a tracer request indicating delivery butinordinate delay, the originating station shall search pertinentrecords to ascertain that station's handling of the originaltransmission.d. When the action indicated in 892.b. or c. has beenaccomplished, and if the original transmission was properlytransmitted from the originating station, the station to whichthe transmission was made shall be requested by service messageto conduct tracer action. The service message shall contain thefollowing:(1) The station reporting non receipt or delay.(2) Complete format lines 2 and 3 of the message beingtraced.(3.) Transmission identification, date and time message wastransmitted.(4) Any additional pertinent facts.e. If the original transmission had been properly relayed atthe second station involved, it shall originate a servicemessage as described in 892.d. to the third station. Theoriginating station is included as an information addressee.f. Successive stations shall continue the process until theplace and cause of mishandling is determined.8-16

NTP 8(D)CHAPTER 9DIGITAL MODES900. INTRODUCTIONThe purpose of this chapter is to describe the common digitalcommunication modes used in NAVMARCORMARS, including a summary ofbasic parameters, capabilities, and operational characteristics ofeach.910. BASIC DIGITAL MODES CONCEPTNAVMARCORMARS utilizes several digital modes of transmissionin seeking high speed, error free, reliable high volume traffictransfer. Regardless of the mode, network structures areorganized to utilize each mode to its fullest capability andoptimum potential. Proper use of these modes and the 24 hoursystem capability afforded by message switches provides world wide24 hour traffic transfer capability to the WINLINK 2000 (WL2K)System. The WL2K system is discussed in Annex E.920. RADIOTELETYPE (RTTY)921. RTTY BACKGROUNDFor decades, amateur radio, the military, and MARS servicesemployed radio-teletype digital systems to pass record traffic.Prior to the 1970's, RTTY transmission and reception was doneutilizing tuning units (TUs) and converters, mechanicalteleprinters, paper tape perforators and reperferators, local"loop" power supplies, and associated peripheral equipment. Inthe 1970's and 1980's, as society was propelled into the computerage, RTTY systems became smaller, quieter, and more efficient asteleprinters were replaced with monitors and computer pageprinters, and as TU's and modulators were replaced with computersand terminal node controllers (TNC's).922. RTTY CONCEPTSA binary 5-digit sequence table assigns a unique binary codeto each letter of the alphabet and certain punctuation marks (andteleprinter commands). Text is generated using this binary code,and messages are sent by transmitting the resultant digital stringof data.9-1

NTP 8(D)923. RTTY ERROR CHECKINGThere is no automatic error correction capability in thismode. Various "garble tables" exist to assist receiving stationsattempting to resolve errors. Common practice "on-the-air" is torequest "fills" by voice after a radioteletype message is received(if errors or hits exist).924. RTTY MODE CHARACTERISTICSNAVMARCORMARS RTTY transmissions utilize a 100% duty cycle.Since there is no error correction inherent in RTTY transmissions(paragraph 923), signal strength, signal-to-noise ratio,propagation conditions, and other circuit variables have asignificant impact on how successful RTTY communications linkswill be. If a RTTY signal fades or is covered by interference,the receiving RTTY terminal will lose copy.925. RTTY THROUGHPUT930. AMTORAll NAVMARCORMARS RTTY is sent at 100 words per minute.931. BACKGROUNDa. AMTOR has been utilized for many years for long haultraffic transfer. Besides providing communications underconditions where other modes will not support the desiredcommunications paths, AMTOR provides a degree of automated errorchecking of each character received.b. AMTOR has been used for many years in commercial ship-toshorecommunications. ("SITOR" and "ARQ" are associated modes.)Although there have been many different versions of the standardestablished for AMTOR (e.g. CCIR 476-1, 476-3, CCIR 625), most ofthem are compatible with potential future standards which addupgrades of the mode or additional capabilities (e.g. full ASCIIcharacter representation).932. AMTOR CONCEPTSa. In an AMTOR transmission, the transmitting station sends agroup of three characters in a string (a transmission burst) andthen "listens" for a response from the receiving station. Thedata bursts are composed of a series of binary tones generated bya modem connected to the transmitter. The modem can send two9-2

NTP 8(D)possible tones - a high tone (called "0") and a low tone (called"1"). The tones are separated by 170 or 200 Hz in frequency (e.g.2100 Hz and 2300 Hz, etc.). Similar to radioteletype, AMTORutilizes a binary table where each alpha-numeric character has aunique combination of seven 1's and 0's assigned to define whatthat character is.b. Besides defining the alphabet and a table of punctuationcharacters, certain binary characters are used for control signalssent back and forth from the transmitting and receiving stations.c. Only one station can send traffic at a time.d. AMTOR also offers the capability for one station to callanother through the use of a selective call sign (SELCAL) witheach station being assigned a unique SELCAL.933. AMTOR ERROR CHECKINGa. The AMTOR error checking algorithm operates by checking toverify that the seven binary bits for each alpha-numeric characterand control signal are comprised of four 1's and three 0's. Oncethis error checking is completed for the bits sent, the received 7units are compared to a table to determine what letter,punctuation or control code has been sent.b. Since the 7 unit combination may not have been heardcorrectly by the receiving station but the criteria of four 1'smet, there are times when errors are received.c. It should also be noted that since four of the seven tonessent for each character must be a 1, the number of characters thatcan be defined and utilized by this mode is limited.d. Under noisy conditions AMTOR users should always checkmessage accuracy since the error checking method utilized by AMTORis not 100 percent accurate.934. AMTOR MODE CHARACTERISTICSa. The basic AMTOR transmit/receive cycle:(1) The sending station sends three characters (twenty-onebits of 0's and 1's) then turns the transmitter off and "listens".(2) The receiving station applies error checking to thetwenty-one bits (or three letters) received, and then responds9-3

NTP 8(D)back to the sending station that it is ready for the next threecharacters.(3) If any of the characters do not meet the four 1'stest, the receiving station sends back a control code telling thesending station to send the three characters again.b. The critical timing for this cycle to occur is 450milliseconds (210 milliseconds for the sending station to send the3 characters and 240 milliseconds for the receiving station tosend back a control character saying it has received the threecharacters correctly). If the sending station does not get aresponse back within the 450 milliseconds, it again sends thethree characters.c. The duty cycle of AMTOR is 47%.935. AMTOR THROUGHPUTa. In AMTOR the speed of the signals being sent is 100 baud,but practical throughput is generally much less. Due to overhead(such as the receiving station sending back a character saying ithas received the last three characters successfully), the actualthroughput under ideal conditions is only 50 baud. It is lowerwhen channel conditions deteriorate. The short bursts ofinformation back and forth result in AMTOR succeeding under manyadverse conditions (including interference) where othertransmission modes fail.b. Due to the critical timing restrictions (i.e. the 450milli-second transmit-receive cycle) and the fixed speed of radiowaves, this mode at one time could not be used for distancesexceeding approximately 26,000 kilometers (15,000 miles). Somemodern terminal node controllers or modems allow the sendingstation to vary the time it waits to receive an answer back. Thisoption significantly increases the potential range.c. The addition of more control codes has allowed this modeto be able to transfer the complete ASCII data set.940. FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION (FEC)941. FEC BACKGROUNDForward Error Correction or FEC is actually a "sub-mode"derived from AMTOR and is often used to start an AMTOR traffictransfer.9-4

NTP 8(D)942. FEC CONCEPTSFEC is used quite often to broadcast messages to manystations on a channel since it does not require the receivingstation to acknowledge transmissions.943. FEC ERROR CHECKINGThe FEC mode provides a degree of error correction simply bysending the same data twice. The same character is sent again 5characters after the first time it is sent. The same binary errordetection methods as used with AMTOR are applied to FECtransmissions - that is, if the data received does not pass the"seven unit (bit) test" (four "1's" and three "0's"), thealgorithm waits for the second time the character is sent andapplies the same test the second time. If it fails the test thesecond time, a space is printed indicating an error for thatcharacter. If the character passes the test the first time, thesecond time is ignored.944. FEC CHARACTERISTICSa. FEC works on a duty cycle of 100% with one stationconstantly transmitting (similar to RTTY, FEC does not employ atransmitting signal from the receiving station).b. The FEC mode is further enhanced by the transmission ofphasing signals. Phasing signals are sent at the beginning of thetransmission as well as at the end of each line to allow all usersto adjust receiver frequency.c. Use of selective call signs (SELCAL's) are an advantageousbenefit of FEC which allows selective printing of the message bythose stations monitoring the frequency. These stations areidentified at the beginning of the broadcast by sending theirSELCAL. Once the intended station receives this identificationfrom the sending station, it will automatically start receivingand printing text. Error correction procedures are the same as inthe normal FEC mode.950. PACKET RADIO951. PACKET RADIO BACKGROUNDPacket radio is a digital method of communications adaptedfrom a standard computer protocol (X.25) by which computerscommunicate with each other. The version adopted for9-5

NTP 8(D)NAVMARCORMARS use is AX.25. Packet radio was originally developedfor VHF use, but has since been modified for HF.952. PACKET RADIO CONCEPTSa. Using packet on high frequencies requires extremely goodcommunication conditions.b. Packet radio carries significant "overhead" for the amountof traffic sent, but this overhead provides considerableinformation, providing the ability to easily establish a network.c. Packet radio provides 100 percent error free communication(see paragraph 953) as well as the ability for more than one groupof stations to utilize a frequency at the same time. The systemsenses the existence of other signals on the frequency and willdelay transmitting until the frequency is clear.d. Packet radio (and its associated hardware) has permittedthe development of sophisticated message systems (switches, calledpacket BBS's in Amateur Radio) that have made automatic unattendedforwarding of traffic possible. Terminal Node Controllers (TNC's)facilitate all the "handshaking" between computers allowing userswith little knowledge of computer systems to communicate utilizingsophisticated communication protocols.953. PACKET RADIO ERROR CHECKINGThe same calculation used by the sending station to calculatethe frame check sum (see paragraph 954) is also used to calculatea frame check sum value by the receiving station. If the framecheck sum value calculated is the same as the one sent, the packetis considered to have been transmitted error free. (If it is notthe same, the receiving station's TNC automatically requests thesending station to resend the last packet burst.)954. PACKET RADIO MODE CHARACTERISTICSa. The main features that packet radio offers are totallyerror free communications and the ability to handle the full ASCIIcharacter set.b. With proper geographic placement of stations on a suitable(clear) frequency, a very robust network can be established usingpacket.9-6

NTP 8(D)c. Data compression techniques are available to reduce thesize of a large file being transferred. The same techniques, inreverse, can be applied to decompress the traffic (file) back intoits original format after it is received.d. Packet radio works by sending bursts of information (muchlonger than AMTOR bursts). These bursts contain ASCII charactersof data (preceded and followed by control characters and otheroverhead information). The overhead information includes a meansfor determining the data was received without error. Each packetburst contains:(1) Synchronization data;(2) A "flag" of eight bits to signal start of data(3) The address of the sending stationpacket(4) Eight bits of control information for handling the(5) The data(6) The Frame Check Sum value (calculated using amathematical formula applied to the data being transmitted) and(7) An ending flag.955. PACKET RADIO THROUGHPUTa. HF packet radio is sent at 300 baud. In actuality,throughput (data transfer) is much less due to frame overhead (seeparagraph 954 above).b. Poor HF conditions can significantly degrade packetperformance.c. Packet transmission lengths depend on how much data isbeing sent but are generally limited to 80 characters. Theserelatively long bursts provide opportunity for HF noise to reducethe throughput. If there are no interference problems HF packetthroughput, even with its high information overhead, could be 15to 20 characters per second (cps).d. Two additional problems contribute to slow throughput. Ifan error is detected, the entire burst of data (and all its9-7

NTP 8(D)accompanying "overhead") has to be sent again. In addition, thelonger bursts increase the likelihood an error will be received.960. PACTOR961. PACTOR BACKGROUNDPACTOR is a protocol that merges the best characteristics ofpacket and AMTOR. Newer modes, called PACTOR II and PACTOR III,have been developed but are compatible with the older mode. Onlythe older version is discussed here.962. PACTOR CONCEPTSPACTOR ensures data is transmitted accurately. Similar topacket, PACTOR works with a full ASCII set. The PACTOR mode alsooffers the best characteristics of AMTOR by using fixed timing oftransmissions and short bursts (desirable qualities for noisycircuits).963. PACTOR ERROR CHECKINGa. Unlike AMTOR's "four 1's" test (paragraph 933), the errorchecking algorithm used in packet transmissions (paragraph 953) isapplied to the whole PACTOR data burst being sent. Similar to thepacket mode, the same error checking algorithm is used by thereceiving station and applied to the data to determine whether ornot there were errors in the transmission. The data is sent againif an error is detected. Four control signals are used.b. Coupled with the compression feature described inparagraph 964, PACTOR has a limited capability to correct errorsin the data received through a method called memory ARQ. Severaltechniques are applied to transmissions in which errors aredetected to attempt to reliably correct the errors.964. PACTOR MODE CHARACTERISTICSa. PACTOR is similar to AMTOR in that data is sent, and anacknowledgment is returned, by the receiving station using a fixedtiming structure and full synchronization. The packets ofinformation are sent, then acknowledged by short control signalssent from the receiving station.b. A PACTOR burst is composed of:9-8

NTP 8(D)(1) 8 bits of data in a header (allowing fastsynchronization)(2) The data to be transmitted(3) 8 bits of data to tell the receiving station statusinformation (such as station QRT, transmission mode, etc.), and(4) The error frame checksum value (calculated from thedata included in the total transmission).c. PACTOR offers the capability to perform automatic datacompression on the traffic being transferred. This compressionuses a technique that can provide as much as 50 percent reductionin the number of bits of information that has to be transferredfor each ASCII character (thereby gaining even more throughput forchannel time usage). Both the sender and receiver are unaware ofthis compression taking effect because the PACTOR TNCautomatically provides these features.965. PACTOR MODE THROUGHPUTa. This robust mode can be up to four times faster thanAMTOR. Additional capabilities offered that greatly improve thethroughput are:(1) Automatic speed change (200 baud to 100 baud and/or100 baud to 200 baud), as conditions warrant, and(2) Automatic compression of data at transmission anddecompression after the data is received.b. The speed change capability is achieved by changing theamount of data that is transferred (192 bits at 200 baud; 80 bitsat 100 baud). The length of the transmissions does not change butthe amount of usable information changes when the speed ischanged.c. Speed change is determined by the receiving station'sPACTOR unit automatically. Consequently, there is much more datatransmitted with every PACTOR burst than is realized with AMTOR.970. CLOVER II971. CLOVER II BACKGROUNDClover II is a relatively new mode that promises high volumetraffic transfer achieved under many different HF conditions.9-9

NTP 8(D)Despite its relatively high cost, it claims the followingsignificant advantages over other digital modes:a. Clover II automatically and accurately corrects errors inthe data received (so the re-transmission of data is veryinfrequent).b. Clover II transfers any type of 8-bit data.c. Clover II is speed adaptive (i.e. automatically selectstransmission speed to optimize throughput) for any given set ofconditions.972. CLOVER II CONCEPTSa. A Clover II signal is comprised of four specific toneswhich can be modulated in many different ways to achieve optimumthroughput. The protocol automatically selects the modulationmethod and baud rate (based on feedback signals from the receivingstation) that results in the optimum throughput of data withminimum errors.b. The pulse rate is 31.25 per second. The intelligence isderived from the difference between the phase or amplitude ofsuccessive pulses. These processes are totally automated (thecomputer interfaced with the Clover II modem makes the changes).973. CLOVER II ERROR CORRECTIONA very valuable feature of Clover II that ensures high datathroughput is the error correction algorithm. Clover IItransmissions send blocks of data in fixed lengths of either 17,51, 85, or 255 byte blocks. Clover II provides far more extensiveerror correction capability than other modes. Obviously, ifconditions are bad not all errors can be corrected. Clover II hasthe capability to correct as many as 31 data bytes in every 188bytes transmitted. For those bytes which cannot be repaired, onlythe blocks containing the errors need to be retransmitted.974. CLOVER II MODE CHARACTERISTICSa. There are ten possible modulation modes (six using phaseshift modulation, two using amplitude shift modulation, and twousing frequency shift modulation) suited for various HF conditions(from "very poor" to "excellent"). The Clover II modemautomatically adapts itself to optimize throughput. Four tonepulses (spaced by 125 Hz) are used with eight milliseconds between9-10

NTP 8(D)each pulse. The four tones are treated as four independentchannels (with a frequency offset of 125 hertz between channels).b. The specific modulation method chosen by the algorithm isthe one used for all four channels.c. Clover II technology offers the following modulation modesand theoretical data rates:(1) 16-phase, 4-amplitude modulation for a block data rateof 750 bits per second.(2) 8-phase, 2-amplitude modulation for a block data rateof 500 bits per second.(3) 8-level phase shift modulation for a block data rateof 375 bits per second.(4) 4-level phase shift modulation for a block data rateof 250 bits per second.(5) Binary phase shift modulation for a block data rate of125 bits per second.(6) 2-channel diversity binary phase shift modulation;block data rate of 62.5 bits per second.(7) Frequency shift modulation for a block data rate of62.5 bits per second.(8) 4-channel diversity binary phase shift modulation;block data rate of 31.25 bits per second.(9) 2-channel diversity frequency shift modulation; blockdata rate of 31.25 bits per second.d. Overall spectrum efficiency using this method provides asignal which is only 500 Hz wide at a bandwidth of -50 db.e. One critical problem with Clover II is that the frequencymust be accurately tuned. The system will not tolerate more thanplus or minus 30 Hz deviation between the receive and transmitstation frequencies. (This is less of a problem for messageswitch operators since their radios are on 24 hours a day.) Onscreentuning indicators are provided to aid in adjusting forprecise frequency accuracy.9-11

NTP 8(D)975. CLOVER II THROUGHPUTa. The theoretical higher data rates are not achieved exceptunder good band conditions. Lower data rates result when band andpropagation conditions deteriorate. Optimum rates are reduced bysome overhead (control signals), but increased throughput isachieved through error detection and correction (the data does nothave to be transmitted when an error is corrected).b. The receiving Clover II station directs the sendingstation to modify transmission parameters to optimize throughput.At the receiving site, a very sophisticated signal analysis isdone after every transmission with the method of modulationchanged if needed. (The receiving station tells the sendingstation to switch modes.)c. Along with the exchange of information is the capabilityfor the receiving station to control the power output of thetransmitting station (AFSK microphone gain output control from theClover II modem).980. SOUND CARD MODESRecently, there have been many new modes developed around thecomputer sound card. A brief description of some of these newmodes is provided below:a. PSK31 (and derivatives) - This mode uses phase-shiftkeying of a single audio tone. This results in a very narrow bandwidth on the order of a continuous wave (CW) signal. The modeuses a varicode which has shorter character lengths for the mostcommonly used letters. It is optimized for lower case characters.Variations include QPSK31, PSK63 and PSK125, with the last twohaving higher throughputs and slightly wider signals.b. MT63 - This mode provides a very robust Walsh forwarderror correction (FEC) scheme transmitting 64 separate tonesshifted over time. Possible modes of operation are:500 Hz, short interleave (6.4 seconds interleave)500 Hz, long interleave (12.8 seconds interleave)1000 Hz, short interleave (3.2 seconds interleave)1000 Hz, long interleave (6.4 seconds interleave)2000 Hz, short interleave (1.6 second interleave)2000 Hz, long interleave (3.2 seconds interleave)9-12

NTP 8(D)Throughput varies from approximately 5 characters per second at500 Hz bandwidth to 20 characters per second for 2000 Hzbandwidth.c. MFSK - Multi-Frequency Shift Keying - The current mode isbased on the Piccolo and Coquelet transmission modes used by theBritish Foreign Service during World War II. This mode useseither eight or sixteen separate tones with a forward errorcorrection scheme providing a throughput of about 4 characters persecond. For best results, a frequency error of less than 5 Hz isrequired.d. Domino - This is a very new mode based on MFSK which usesIncremental Frequency Keying (IFK). Domino attempts to providethe benefits of MFSK with a much wider frequency tolerance. It isspecifically designed for keyboard-to-keyboard operations withthree throughputs of 3, 4 or 6 charcters per second. There is noFEC.e. Q15X25 - This is an attempt to provide a more robust AX.25mode similar to packet. It uses 15 tones separated by 125 Hz eachmodulated at 83 Hz. The bandwidth is approximately 2500 Hz. Themode uses FEC and time and frequency interleaving. Raw datathroughput, exclusive of FEC and overhead is about 25 charactersper second. Initial testing of this mode indicates that itrequires fairly good propagation conditions.f. Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) - This mode, which isstill under development for the personal computer sound card, isbased on Federal Standard 1052 and Military Standard 188-141B andprovides a means of automatically linking to another station andsending data or allowing voice communications on the linkestablished. This mode should allow interconnecting of MARSstations with other government stations without purchase of theexpensive radios and modems currently in use at governmentagencies.g. WINlink Message Over Radio (WINMOR) - this is a new soundcard mode that allows users to send and receive message trafficusing the WINLINK message system. It allows full ARQ withmultiple bandwidths.981. OPERATION WITH SOUND CARD MODESThe following sound card mode standards will be used withinNAVMARCORMARS:a. All sound card modes - Radios will be operated in upper9-13

NTP 8(D)sideband mode (USB).b. MT63 - The lower edge of the 500 Hz, 1000 Hz or 2000 Hzdata envelope will be placed at 500 Hz above the USB suppressedcarrier.c. PSK31 - The center of intelligence will initially becentered at 1000 Hz above the suppressed USB carrier.Establishing additional conversations above or below thisinitial frequency is authorized as long as the 3 KHz bandwidthis not violated.d. Q15X25 - The center of intelligence will be set at 1375Hz above the suppressed USB carrier.e. Other sound card modes - Operate the radio in USB anduse the default center frequency of the software you are using.If stations are using different programs, they need to confirmthey are using the same data frequency.9-14

NTP 8(D)ANNEX ANET ORGANIZATIONA100. NETWORKSNetworks ("nets") are categorized with respect to the usagefor which the network is primarily established, as described inparagraphs A101 through A107.A101. ADMINISTRATIVE NETA net primarily established for administrative purposeslinking any echelon of authority with immediate subordinates andsuch other stations as may be specifically designated.A102. TRAFFIC NETA net primarily established to handle message traffic(including third-party messages, and NAVMARCORMARS administrativetraffic).A103. TRAINING NETA net primarily established to promote technical andprocedural training in matters pertaining to militarycommunications and NAVMARCORMARS policy and procedure.A104. COMMAND NETA net primarily established for coordination purposes amongChief NAVMARCORMARS, MARS Radio Station (NAV), MARS directors, andsuch other staff and network coordinators as may be specificallyauthorized.A105. TACTICAL NETA net primarily established to meet requirements for tacticaloperations among emergency communications (ECOM) stationsspecifically authorized per Annex D.A106. SPECIALTY NETA net primarily established for a purpose other than thoselisted above. Afloat and overseas operations, digital, packet andfacsimile operations are examples of MARS activity within thiscategory.A-1

NTP 8(D)A107. EMERGENCY NETA net primarily established to provide command and controland traffic functions during an actual or simulated emergency.A200. AREA AND REGION DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITY: NETWORK MANAGEMENTEach MARS area and region director is assigned theresponsibility for net organization including establishing anddisestablishing nets and coordinating net frequency assignmentswithin his or her area or region per Annex B. The director maydelegate this responsibility to his/her Assistant for NetOperations.A300. STATE DIRECTOR RESPONSIBILITY: NETWORK MANAGEMENTThe state director is assigned the responsibility torecommend to the region director the establishment anddisestablishment of radio nets within his/her state to fulfillrequirements necessary to carry out the MARS mission and function.The state director may delegate this responsibility to his/herAssistant for Net Operations.A400. NETWORK ESTABLISHMENTA410. BASIC CONCEPTS IN ESTABLISHING NETSNets should be established as necessary to meet therequirements to fulfill the MARS mission and function. Netfrequency assignments shall be assigned only by the MARS directorin whose area, region or state the net is being established andthen only upon completion of action per Annex B.A420. CRITERIA FOR ESTABLISHING NETSa. Area and region administrative nets should be establishedperiodically. The director will act as the net manager. Membersof area or region administrative nets include the director, thestaff assistants, and state (and region) directors within thearea. (Membership of this type net may be expanded at thediscretion of the area or region director to include, as anexample, staff assistants to the state directors.)b. State administrative nets are optional but encouraged. Ifutilized, the state director will act as the net manager. Membersof state administrative nets include the state director, the statestaff assistants, state net managers, state net control stations,A-2

NTP 8(D)and state traffic representatives. (Membership of this type netmay be expanded at the discretion of the state director toinclude, as an example, all members within the state.)c. Traffic nets should be established, whenever possible, inconsonance with the WinLink 2000 (WL2K) System to permit thetimely handling of incoming and outgoing message traffic.d. Traffic nets shall not be established for inter-areacommunications without the approval of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.Inter-area message traffic shall be via the WL2K System.e. Specialty, command and tactical nets shall only beestablished under the cognizance of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.(Tactical nets may be established without the approval of Chief,NAVMARCORMARS under the conditions set forth in Annex D.)A500. NET DESIGNATORSA510. BASIC CONCEPT FOR ASSIGNING DESIGNATORSa. A unique net designator will be assigned to each netconsisting of an alphanumeric sequence as follows:(NUMBER OR LETTER) (LETTER) (NUMBER) (LETTER)b. Paragraph A520 defines the alpha-numeric characters inspecific network designators.A520. METHOD TO ASSIGN NET DESIGNATORSa. The first character of the net designator (a numeral orletter) will denote the MARS area or region in which the net islocated. (Networks under the cognizance of Chief, NAVMARCORMARSshall be designated by the letter ‘U’.) Regions are referred toby the numbers 0 through 9. Areas are denoted by the followingletters:C - Central AreaN - Northeast AreaP - Pacific AreaS - South Areab. The second character of the net designator (a letter) willindicate the state in which the net is located. This letter willbe assigned by the cognizant region director.A-3

NTP 8(D)(1) To denote area nets, use the letter ‘A’.(2) To denote region nets, use the letter "X".(3) To denote national level nets and/or nets under thecognizance of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, use the letter "Z".c. The third character of the net designator (a numeral) willdenote the first, second, third, etc., net within the region, orstate. The third character in designators for nets under thecognizance of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS will denote the first, second,third, etc., net within each specialty network.d. The fourth character of the net designator (a letter) willdenote the type of net as follows:Administrative"A"Traffic"B"Training"C"ECOM Net"E"Radio-telephone"V"Radio-Teletypewriter "W"Slow-Scan TV"X"Single Channel Data (SCD) "Y"(SEE NOTE 1)Other"Z"NOTE 1: Single Channel Data (SCD) includes baudot, ASCII, Packet,AMTOR, (ARQ or FEC), PACTOR, Clover, sound card modes or otherdigital modes as directed.A521. EXAMPLES OF NET DESIGNATORSa. UZ1Z: The first nation wide SCD Netb. PA1A: The first Pacific Area Administrative Netc. 5X1B: The first traffic net in the FIFTH Navy-MarineCorps MARS Regiond. 8U3C: The third training net in the state of Utah, EighthNavy-Marine Corps MARS Regiond. 4D1E: The first ECOM net in the Georgia State, FOURTHNavy-Marine Corps MARS Region.A-4

NTP 8(D)B100. INTRODUCTIONANNEX BPRINCIPLES OF FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENTThis Annex contains guidance for the utilization of the radiofrequency spectrum by NAVMARCORMARS including frequencyauthorizations, frequency allocations, frequency sharing,frequency assignments, technical standards, and interferenceprocedures.B110. BASIC CONCEPTSFrequencies used by MARS are shared with other navalcommunications activities and other government departments andagencies. In most cases these frequencies are shared among thevarious MARS areas, regions and states. They are assigned on astrict not-to-interfere basis (NIB) with active armed forces,government, and operational users. Therefore, it is mandatorythat power output limits, emission authorizations, time sharingassignments, general signal quality requirements, and prescribedfrequency tolerances be observed.B120. NON-MILITARY PROCEDURES ON MARS FREQUENCIESIn order to retain present frequency assignments and enhancethe acquisition of additional frequencies, MARS operations arerestricted to proper Navy procedures. Non-military procedures ofany type (particularly common amateur radio practices and policieswhich do not align with military communications precepts asdescribed in this publication) are strictly prohibited on Navyfrequencies.B200. FREQUENCY SHARINGThe purpose of a frequency allocation plan is to provide themaximum possible use of each assigned MARS frequency.B210. FREQUENCY SHARING PLANAn effective frequency sharing plan will make use of thefollowing methods:a. Geographical Sharing: Use of the same frequency in morethan one geographical area is one of the more effective means offrequency sharing. This concept applies particularly to the lowerB-1

NTP 8(D)frequencies in the HF spectrum (which tend to propagate overshorter distances). The higher HF frequencies may routinelypropagate over thousands of miles, limiting geographical sharing.Geographical sharing is subject to the variable nature of radiowave propagation conditions, especially in regards to theionosphere. These variations may cause unavoidable interferencefrom time to time among users of the same or adjacent frequencies.b. Time Sharing: This method requires that stations operateon a schedule such that two stations or two nets do not use thesame frequency at the same time. Time sharing is effective inavoiding interference but is somewhat limited in militaryapplications.c. Channel Sharing: In the high frequency portion of thespectrum, more than one narrow-band digital circuit may beaccommodated simultaneously by subdividing an authorized 3kilohertz (KHz) channel. Most digital modes used in MARS occupy0.5 KHz (500 Hz) bandwidth (or less), which permits more than onedigital circuit to operate within a single channel. Effectivenessof channel sharing depends greatly on the following factors:(1) Adequate receiver selectivity: Receivers with nofilters available narrower than "standard" SSB filters (1.8-2.7KHz width) will experience interference from closely spaceddigital transmissions. Channel sharing is most effective whenreceiver filter bandwidth is about 500 Hz.(2) Spectral purity of transmission: Careful adjustmentand maintenance of transmitting equipment is mandatory to avoidspurious emission outside the assigned bandwidth.d. Combinations: Some frequencies may be subject tocombinations of sharing methods. In making such assignments,propagation characteristics and time zone differences betweenareas/regions/states are major factors to be considered. Becauseof the dense utilization of the radio spectrum and the resultantclose spacing of frequency assignments, some adjacent channelinterference can be expected. Because some MARS assignments arevery closely spaced, sharing may be necessary to resolve adjacentchannel interference problems.e. All MARS area, region and state directors shall ensurestrict compliance with the time assignments authorized by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS. In no case, except during emergencies, willdeviations be made from time sharing schedules authorized or theuse of frequencies without prior approval of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.B-2

NTP 8(D)B300. FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT PROCEDURES AND POLICYB310. AUTHORIZATION OF FREQUENCIES TO MARSa. Radio frequencies are assigned by the Navy-Marine CorpsSpectrum Center (NMSC) in Alexandria, Virginia to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS as appropriate for MARS use after coordinationthrough normal frequency clearance channels. (This process iscalled "authorization".)b. Chief, NAVMARCORMARS makes authorized frequenciesavailable to the appropriate area director(s) for furtherassignment to MARS activities within their individual areas.(This process is called "allocation". See paragraph B320.)c. NMSC provides Chief, NAVMARCORMARS with listings ofauthorized frequencies (including emission, geographical, andpower restrictions, if any). These listings are kept current bythe National Telecommunications Information Administration (NTIA)and are subject to frequent changes. This information is providedperiodically to the area directors and the specialty networkcoordinators by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.B320. ALLOCATION OF FREQUENCIES WITHIN MARSa. Area directors and specialty network coordinators maypropose addition of new frequencies, or modification and/ordeletion of existing frequencies to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. Chief,NAVMARCORMARS will review and forward proposals to NMSC as deemedappropriate. When/if the proposal/modification is approved byNMSC, the assignment of the new frequency will appear in the nextlisting.b. Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, area directors and specialty networkcoordinators shall allocate and assign frequencies as equitablyand efficiently as possible to optimize use within the MARSorganization. Conflicts will be resolved at the appropriate MARSechelon.c. Area directors shall provide a current Area Net Directoryto the members of their respective areas (with copies to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS and the other area directors). Among other topics,each Area Net Directory will list (purpose, designator, frequency,mode, and time):(1) all nets for all states and regions contained withinthe area; andB-3

NTP 8(D)(2) all area nets.B400. DEFINITIONS AND EXAMPLESB410. BASIC DEFINITIONSa. ALLOCATION - The assignment to an area or specialtynetwork of NMSC frequencies which NMSC has already authorized foruse by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.b. ASSIGNED FREQUENCY - The center of the frequency bandassigned to a station.c. AUTHORIZATION - Formal approval by NMSC for NAVMARCORMARSto utilize a frequency. (Some specific authorizations may includelimits on power levels, geographic limits, or other restrictions.)d. CENTER OF INTELLIGENCE - For a given signal or assignedfrequency, the center of the transmitted frequency spectrum.e. CHARACTERISTIC FREQUENCY - A frequency which can be easilyidentified and measured in a given emission.f. CLEARANCE - The action taken by NMSC to obtainauthorization for the use of a frequency. The clearance processis by coordination with all the users of that portion of thespectrum.g. FREQUENCY TOLERANCE - The maximum permissible departure ofthe center frequency from the assigned frequency (or, by thecharacteristic frequency from the reference frequency). Frequencytolerance is expressed in parts per million or in hertz.h. NECESSARY BANDWIDTH - The minimum value of the occupiedbandwidth sufficient to ensure the transmission of information atthe rate and with the quality required for the system employed,under specified conditions.i. OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH - The bandwidth, such that, below itslower and above its upper frequency limits, the mean powersradiated are each equal to 0.5% of the total mean power radiatedby a given emission.j. OUTPUT POWER - Power limits are based on mean power outputof the station's transmitter. For SSB emission, mean power isdefined as one half of peak envelope power (PEP) output. For allother emissions, mean power is considered to be the output power.B-4

NTP 8(D)k. REFERENCE FREQUENCY - A frequency having a fixed andspecified position with respect to the assigned frequency. Thedisplacement of this frequency with respect to the assignedfrequency has the same absolute value and sign that thedisplacement of the characteristic frequency has with respect tothe center of the frequency band occupied by the emission.B420. EMISSION DESIGNATIONS USED BY NAVMARCORMARSa. 1K24F1B Single Channel Datab. 3K00J3E Single-Sideband Radiotelephonyc. 11K0F3E Frequency Modulated radiotelephony, includingdata transmission on FM. FM deviation notgreater than 2.5 KHz; no part of audio spectrumgreater than 3 KHz.d. In each of the preceding cases, the assigned frequency isat the center of the emission indicated. If a given transmitter isswitched between modes, such as SSB and data, its frequency mustbe adjusted so that both emissions remain in the assignedfrequency bandwidth.B421. EXAMPLE3K00J3E Emission (USB)Frequency4044.54044 - - - - - - - - - - - -4043.5 3 KHz Voice4043 Channel4042.5 - - - - - - - - - - - - Center of Emission4042 Bandwidth/Assigned Frequency4041.54041 - - - - - - - - - - - - Suppressed Carrier4040.5Assigned frequency - 4042.5 KHzMode- 3K00J3E Upper SidebandBandwidth- 3 KHzReference frequency - 4041 KHzCharacteristic frequency - 4041 KHz (Suppressed Carrier)The emission consists of one 3 KHz voice channel, in upperside-band, with suppressed carrier.B-5

NTP 8(D)B500. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTSB510. POWER LIMITSa. Output Power: Power limits are based upon output meanpower of the station's transmitter.(1) For SSB emission, mean power is defined as one halfpeak envelope power (PEP) output.power.(2) For all other emissions, mean power is equal to outputb. Minimum Power To Be Used: The maximum power authorizedmay not be required for reliable communications. Minimum powerconsistent with reliable communications shall always be employed.B520. FREQUENCY TOLERANCEThese tolerances apply to NAVMARCORMARS and must be observedby all MARS stations. Communications security activities and theFederal Communications Commission (FCC) periodically monitor andobserve MARS frequencies to ensure maintenance of frequencyaccuracy and spectral purity of transmissions. Observedviolations are reported.B521. FREQUENCY TOLERANCE BELOW 30 MHZa. SSB freq. tolerance below 30 MHz = + 20 Hzb. Data freq. tolerance below 30 MHz = + 20 HzB522. FREQUENCY TOLERANCE ABOVE 30 MHZFrequency tolerance above 30 MHz = + 750 HzB600. FREQUENCY VIOLATION REPORTSThe FCC and various other communications security activitiesforward reports of violations to the Commander, Naval Network andSpace Operations Command. Reports involving MARS stations arereferred to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, who forwards them to theappropriate area director to direct appropriate corrective action.B-6

NTP 8(D)B700. FREQUENCY INTERFERENCEB710. UNSATISFACTORY FREQUENCYIf actual use reveals that the frequencies authorized areunsatisfactory or inadequate because of interference, Chief,NAVMARCORMARS will advise the Commander, Naval Network and SpaceOperations Command with full details.B720. INTERFERENCE TO OPERATIONAL NAVY COMMUNICATIONSMARS frequencies must be utilized in such a manner as toavoid interference to other naval communications, which takeprecedence. If such interference develops and the naval stationaffected requests that the MARS station cease operation on thefrequency in use, such action shall be taken immediately until thefrequency is clear.B730. REPORTING OF INTERFERENCEFacts pertaining to interference on MARS frequencies shall bereported via the chain of command using the following standardformat:Station Causing Interference:A. Call sign or other identification.B. Measured frequency. (center of intelligence).C. Type of emission and type of traffic being transmitted.D. Measured bandwidth of interfering signal. (Indicatelowest and highest frequencies. Give type of measuringequipment.)E. Signal strength. (If field meter not available, use scale1 to 5.)F. Severity of interference. Indicate percentage of copy orintelligence lost due to interference.Transmitter Station Being Interfered withG. Call sign or name of station.H. Assigned frequency.I. Measured frequency.J. Type of emission or signals being transmitted.K. Measured bandwidth.L. Signal strength.B-7

NTP 8(D)Receiving Station Experiencing InterferenceM. Call sign or name of station.N. Location. Give coordinates in latitude and longitude ifpossible. Indicate nearest major city, and state orcountry.O. Date and time of interference, and duration in minutes.(Example: 251030Z (22), 261143Z (5), etc.)P. Other particulars.Q. Requested action.NOTE: An X will be used after any of the above letters if noinformation on that particular item is reported.Frequencies referenced will always refer to the centerof intelligence and/or assigned frequency, not thesuppressed carrier or characteristic frequency. Allinterference reports should be sent to NNNØASA VA andall area directors who may be involved with theinterference.B800. SPURIOUS EMISSIONSEmissions which occupy significantly more than the necessarybandwidth, or otherwise fall outside the frequency assignment havehigh potential to create interference not only to MARS operations,but to other services as well. All MARS stations shall operateand maintain equipment so that spurious signals are not emitted.The following paragraphs in this section summarize various sourcesor types of spurious emissions.a. CARRIER SUPPRESSION - All MARS stations shall ensure thattransmitter carrier suppression is at state-of-the-art levels.This is mandatory because, for some operations, radiation of thecarrier may appear outside the MARS authorized frequency.b. OPPOSITE SIDEBAND SUPPRESSION - Because opposite sidebandenergy emitted by a single sideband (SSB) transmitter will causeadjacent channel interference, opposite sideband suppression ofSSB transmitters must be maintained at very high levels.c. SPURIOUS EMISSION DISTORTION - SSB transmitters typicallydevelop the transmitted signal at low power then amplify it to thedesired output level. Any distortion of the signal by amplifierstages will result in spurious emissions and interference to othercommunications.B-8

NTP 8(D)d. CAUSES OF DISTORTION - Distortion can occur because oftransmitter malfunction, antenna mismatch, or RF feedback. Themost common cause is overdriving the equipment.e. EXCESSIVE AUDIO INPUT - Improperly adjusted "powermicrophones", FSK audio tone generators, or other audio sourcescan overdrive the audio and SSB generating stages of atransmitter. Such audio sources should be adjusted carefully.Poor grounding of mike connections and mismatched mike impedanceare also common causes of audio distortion.f. EXCESSIVE SPEECH PROCESSING/AUDIO GAIN - Overly aggressiveuse of speech processing and excessively high audio gain settingscontribute to interference, but not to intelligibility. MARSstations shall follow good operating practice in this regard.g. LINEAR AMPLIFIER MISADJUSTMENT - Because no standardexists for interconnection of an outboard linear amplifier to atransmitter, overdrive of the linear amplifier is often difficultto avoid. A properly connected linear amplifier will sense theapproach of overdrive and "throttle back" the driving transmitterthrough the Automatic Level Control (ALC) connection. Because ALCoutput characteristics of the linear amplifier may not becompatible with requirements of the exciter, all MARS stationsusing an outboard amplifier shall take steps to ensure that drivelevels are controlled and that no condition of operation willcause spurious emissions.B-9

NTP 8(D)THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKB-10

NTP 8(D)ANNEX COPERATING SIGNALS, PROSIGNS AND PROWORDSC100. OPERATING SIGNALS ("Q" AND "Z")a. Operating signals are concise codes designed primarily foruse by communication personnel in exchanging information incidentto the handling of messages or in establishing communications.Communication personnel also use them in service messages.b. Operating signals provide no security and therefore mustbe regarded as the equivalent of plain language.c. The "Z" signals are designed to cover militaryrequirements and should be used whenever necessary in militarycommunications. "Q" signals may be used in militarycommunications where no suitable "Z" signal exists. Only "Q"signals will be used in non-military communications.d. Meaning of "Q" and "Z" operating signals may be amplifiedor completed by the addition of appropriate call signs, timegroups, complementary groups, etc. Call signs used to complementan operating signal normally follow the signal, but under certainconditions, such as to achieve clarity or to effect separation,they may be placed ahead of the operating signal. Plain languageis prohibited except when no other method is provided to completethe meaning.e. When desired, an operating signal may be given aninterrogative sense:(1) When communicating with military stations, byinserting the prosign INT before the "Q" or "Z" signal.(2) When communicating with non-military stations, byinserting the prosign IMI after the "Q" signal and data used withit.f. Operating signals should not normally be used inradiotelephone procedure. Instead, the operating information willbe conveyed by concise phrases. When it is necessary to relayoperating signals over voice circuits, they are transmitted bytheir phonetic equivalents.C-1

NTP 8(D)g. Use of the prosign ZWC is prohibited on radio circuitswhen it indicates operator-to-operator "chatter," whichconstitutes an unauthorized transmission.h. Blank spaces in the meaning of "Q" and "Z" signals will becompleted in the order in which they appear; however, blank spacesenclosed in parenthesis normally will be completed on an optionalbasis only.Example One: QBM NNNØAAA 1Ø1ØZ means: "Here is the messagesent by NNNØAAA at 1Ø1ØZ hours."Note: The meaning assigned QBM is "Here is the message sentto....at... hours", therefore, as these blank spaces arenot enclosed in parenthesis, all are completed in the orderin which they appear.Example Two: ZKO NNNØAAA means: "I have handed over guard(to...) (on...KHz or MHz) (serial number of lastmessage received was...)". However, in thisexample, the user elected to complete only one ofthe blank spaces enclosed in parenthesis."Q" AND "Z" SIGNALSINT QAP Shall I listen for you (or for...) on ...KHz (...MHz)?Note: if the frequency is given in megahertz, theabbreviation MHz to be is to be used.(See also signal QSX).QAP Listen for me (or for ...) on ...KHz (...MHz).Note: if the frequency is given in megahertz, theabbreviation MHz is to be used.(See also signal QSX.)INT QBM Has ...sent any message for me?QBM Here is the message sent by ... at ...QCSMy reception on ...frequency has broken down.INT QCX What is your full call sign?QCX Use your full call sign until further notice.INT QDB Have you sent message ... to ...?QDB I have sent message ... to ...C-2

NTP 8(D)INT QIC May I establish communication with ... radio station on...KHz (or ...MHz) now (or at ...hours)?QIC Establish communication with ... radio station on ... KHz(or ...MHz) now (or at ...hours) or I willestablish communications with ... radio station on ...KHz(or ...MHz).INT QIF What frequency is ... using ?QIF ... is using frequency ... KHz (or ...MHz).INT QJG Shall I revert to automatic relay?QJG Revert to automatic relay.INT QJH Shall I run ... 1) my test tape? 2) a test sentence?QJH Run ... 1) your test tape; 2) a test sequence.INT QJI Will you transmit a continuous ... 1) mark? 2) space?QJI I am transmitting a continuous ... 1) mark 2) space.INT QJK Are you receiving ... 1) a continuous mark? 2) acontinuous space? 3) a mark bias? 4) a space bias?QJK I am receiving ... 1) a continuous mark; 2) a continuousspace; 3) a mark bias; 4) a space bias.QMHShift to transmit and receive on ...KHz (or ...MHz); ifcommunication is not established within 5 minutes, revertto present frequency.INT QRA What is the name of your station?QRA The name of my station is ...INT QRB How far approximately are you from my station?QRB The approximate distance between our stations is ...nautical miles (or ...kilometers).INT QRG Will you tell me my exact frequency (or that of...)?QRG Your exact frequency (or that of ...) is ...KHz (or...MHz).INT QRH Does my frequency vary?QRH Your frequency varies.INT QRI How is the tone of my transmission?QRI The tone of your transmission is ... 1) good; 2)variable; 3) bad.C-3

NTP 8(D)INT QRK What is the intelligibility of my signals (or those of...)?QRK The intelligibility of your signals (or those of ...) is1)bad; 2) poor; 3) fair; 4) good; 5) excellent.INT QRL Are you busy?QRL I am busy (or I am busy with ...). Please do notinterfere.INT QRM Are you being interfered with?QRM I am being interfered with ... 1) nil; 2) slightly; 3)moderately; 4) severely; 5) extremely.INT QRN Are you troubled by static?QRN I am troubled by static 1) nil; 2) slightly;3) moderately; 4) severely; 5) extremely.INT QRO Shall I increase transmitter power?QRO Increase transmitter power.INT QRP Shall I decrease transmitter power?QRP Decrease transmitter power?INT QRQ Shall I send faster?QRQ Send faster (...words per minute).INT QRR Are you ready for automatic operation?QRR I am ready for automatic operation. Send at ...words perminute.INT QRS Shall I send more slowly?QRS Send more slowly (...words per minute).INT QRT Shall I stop sending?QRT Stop sending.INT QRU Have you anything for me?QRU I have nothing for you.INT QRV Are you ready?QRV I am ready.INT QRW Shall I inform ...that I am calling him on ... KHz (orMHz).QRW Please inform ...that I am calling him on ...KHz (or MHz).C-4

NTP 8(D)INT QRX When will you call me again?QRX I will call you again at ... hours on ... KHz.INT QRZ Who is calling me?QRZ You are being called by ... on ...KHz (or MHz).INT QSA What is the strength of my signals (or those of ...)?QSA The strength of your signals (or those of ...) is ... 1)scarcely perceptible; 2) weak; 3) fairly good; 4) good;5) very good.INT QSB Are my signals fading?QSB Your signals are fading.INT QSG Shall I send ...telegrams at a time?QSG Send ...telegrams at a time.INT QSK Can you hear me between my signals and if so can I breakin on your transmission?QSK I can hear you between my signals; break in on mytransmission.INT QSL Can you acknowledge receipt?QSL I am acknowledging receipt.INT QSN Did you hear me (or ...(call sign)) on ...KHz (or MHz)?QSN I did hear you (or ...(call sign)) on ...KHz (or MHz).INT QSO Can you communicate with ... direct (or by relaythrough...)?QSO I can communicate with ... direct (or by relay through...).INT QSP Will you relay to ... free of charge?QSP I will relay to ... free of charge.INT QSR Shall I repeat the call on the calling frequency?QSR Repeat your call on the calling frequency; did not hearyou (or have interference).INT QSU Shall I send or reply on this frequency (or on...KHz (orMHz)) with emissions of class ...)?QSU Send or reply on this frequency (or on ...KHz (or MHz))(with emissions of class ...).C-5

NTP 8(D)INT QSV Shall I send a series of V's on this frequency (or...KHz(or MHz))?QSV Send a series of V's on frequency (or on ...KHz (or MHz)).INT QSW Will you send on this frequency (or on...KHz (or MHz))(with emissions of class...)?QSW I am going to send on this frequency (or on ...KHz (orMHz)) (with emissions of class ...).INT QSX Will you listen to ... (call sign(s)) on ...KHz (or MHz)?QSX I am listening to ... (call sign(s)) on ...KHz (or MHz).INT QSY Shall I change to transmission on another frequency?QSY Change to transmission on frequency ... KHz (or MHz).INT QSZ Shall I send each word or group twice (or ... times)?QSZ Send each word or group twice (or ... times).INT QTA Shall I cancel telegram number ...?QTA Cancel telegram number ...INT QTC How many telegrams do you have to send?QTC I have ... telegrams for you (or for...).INT QTH What is your position in latitude and longitude (oraccording to any other indication)?QTH My position is ... latitude, ... longitude (or accordingto any other indication).INT QTR What is the correct time?QTR The correct time is ... hours.INT QTS Will you send your call sign for tuning purposes or sothat your frequency can be measured now (or at...hours)on...KHz (or MHz)?QTS I will send my call sign for tuning purposes or so thatfrequency may be measured (or at ... hours) on ... KHz(or MHz).INT QTX Will you keep your station open for further communicationwith me until further notice (or until...hours)?QTX I will keep my station open for further communication withyou until further notice (or until ... hours).C-6

NTP 8(D)INT QUC What is the number (or other indication) of the lastmessage you received from me or from...(call sign))?QUC The number (or other indication of the last message Ireceived from you (or from ... (call sign) is ...ZAAZADYou are not observing proper circuit discipline.Your operating signal (made at...) received as ... 1) notunderstood; 2) not held.INT ZAF Will you patch me to ...(via you or ...)?ZAF I am about to patch you through to ... (via ...).ZAH Unable to relay message ... in present form because 1)not in prescribed format; 2) format lines are incorrect;3) No on-line facility available; 4) call signs notencrypted; 5) text not encrypted. We file. Transmitcorrectly prepared message to all addressees (or to...).ZAJI have (or ... has) been unable to break you.ZAK Transmission on ... KHz (or ... MHz) suspended until ...(or was suspended at ...) on account of electrical hazards(or...).ZALI am closing down (until..) due to...ZAN Transmit only messages of and above precedence ...ZAQZARZAXZAYThe last word (or group) 1) received from you was...;2) transmitted to you was ...).This is my ... request (or reply). 1) first; 2) second;3) third; etc.You are ... 1) causing interference. Listen beforesending; 2) causing interference by inattention to orderto wait; 3) sending at the same time as ... (call sign);4) causing delay by slowness in answering; 5) causingdelay by slowness in answering my service or proceduremessages; 6) answering out of turn).Transmit traffic to me (or to ... on ... KHz (or MHz))without waiting for receipts. I (or ...) will receipt fortraffic later (on...KHz (or MHz)).C-7

NTP 8(D)INT ZBA What is cause of delay (or of bad transmission)?ZBA Delay (or bad transmission) due to ...ZBCYou are transmitting a continuous ... 1) mark; 2) space.INT ZBD Will you repeat what you (or...) sent (at...)?ZBD Following is what I (or ...) sent (at ...).ZBE Retransmit message ... to .. for ... 1) action; 2)information.ZBGZBHZBIYou are transmitting in upper case.Make preliminary call before transmitting traffic.Listen for radiotelephony.INT ZBK Are you receiving my traffic clear?ZBK I am receiving your traffic ... 1) clear; 2) garbled.ZBLZBMZBNI am unable to receive you while I am transmitting. Donot use break-in procedure.Place ... on watch on this frequency: 1) a qualified speedkey operator; 2) a competent operator.Your ... is reversed. 1) tape; 2) mark and space.INT ZBO Of what precedence(s) and for whom is (are) yourmessage(s)?ZBO I have (or ... has) ... (numeral followed by precedenceprosign for each message(s) for ...).ZBPYour ... 1) characters are indistinct; 2) spacing is bad.INT ZBQ When and on what frequency was message ... received?ZBQ Message ... was received at ... on ... KHz (or MHz).ZBU Report when you are in radio communication with ...ZBVAnswer me (or...) on...KHz (or MHz).INT ZBW Will you shift (or ask ... to shift) to transmit on ...KHz (or MHz)?ZBW I am (or ... is) shifting to transmit on ... KHz (or MHz).C-8

NTP 8(D)INT ZBX Will you shift (or ask ... to shift) to receive on...KHz(or MHz)?ZBX I am (or ... is) shifting to receive on ... KHz (or MHz).ZDA I have a formal message for you (precedence is ...).ZDBZDDZDEZDFZDGExpedite reply(ies) to my ... 1) previous operatingsignal; 2) request(s) for repetition and correction;3) service message ...).Bring message ... to the circuit.Message ... undelivered ... 1) will continue efforts toeffect disposal; 2) advise disposition; 3) will notcontinue further efforts: request cancel and file; 4) givemore complete address.Message ... was 1) received by addressee(s) at ...Z;2) received by addressee(s) at communications center at...Z; 3) delivered to addressee(s) by broadcast at ...Z;4) forwarded to addressee(s) by commercial means at ...Z;5) mailed to addressee(s) at ...Z.Accuracy of following message(s) or message ...) isdoubtful. Correction or confirmation will be forthcoming.ZDH Request corrected copy of message ... be forwarded to ...INT ZDK Will you repeat message ... (or portion ...) (or will yourerun number ...)?ZDK Following repetition (of ...) is made per your request.ZDLConfirmation ... 1) was omitted; 2) differs from text).ZDM I am holding your message ...ZDNReport disposal of message ... your station with anyreason for delay.ZDO I could not send message ... to ...ZDQZDRMessage ... was relayed to ... at ... by ... (on ...KHz(or MHz)).This is a multiple-address or book message tape containing... routing indicators in the routing line which is to berouted per the established doctrine.C-9

NTP 8(D)ZDSMessage (or message ...) which you have (or ... has) justforwarded was incorrectly transmitted. Correct version ofmessage (or part or portion ...) is ...INT ZEC Have you received message ...?ZEC Message ... 1) not received; 2) unidentified: give betteridentifying data.ZEDZEEZEHZEIZEJZEKThe following confirmatory information as received is atvariance with the text.Request message ... be transmitted.Accuracy of ... portion of following message (or message...) is doubtful. Correction or confirmation will beforwarded when received. 1) heading; 2) text; 3) group ...to ...)Accuracy is doubtful of heading of message received asfollows ... Check to station of origin if necessary andrepeat.Replies to this message (or message ...) are to be sentnow (or at ...).No answer is required.INT ZEL Is message ... a correction (to message...) which waspreviously transmitted with doubtful or missing groups(words)?ZELZENZEQThis message is a correction (to message ...) (transmittedby ...). Note - may only be used in conjunction with ZDG.This message has been delivered by a separate transmissionor by other means 1) messenger or courier; 2) mail to theaddee(s) immediately following this operating signal.Message ... (or this message) has been ... 1) missent tothis station; received at ...Z; 2) missent to this stationand unable to protect delivery due to... Request youretransmit to the appropriate called station(s); 3) misroutedto this station and has been re-routed to ... at....Z. Recommend corrective action; 4) Misrouted to thisstation and unable to protect delivery (for ...) due to...; request your station protect delivery; 5) Routed tothis station in format line 2, but without deliveryC-10

NTP 8(D)responsibility in format lines 7 or 8. Advise; 6) Delayeddue to misrouting, and is being retransmitted herewith.ZERZESZETZEUThis is a multiple-address or book message tape containing... routing indicators in the routing line for which thestation called in the pilot is responsible.Your message ... has been received ... 1) incomplete;2) garbled. Request retransmission.Message ... has been protected and no further action by... is required.Drill message.INT ZEV Request you acknowledge message ...ZEV Message (...) is acknowledged.ZEWZEXZEZZFAZFBZFDZFEZFFYour attention is invited for ... 1) action;2) information to message ... which is in your files.This is a book message and may be delivered as asingle-address message to addees for whom you areresponsible.When delivery is effected of this book message to addee bycommercial means, or when copy is forwarded to confirmmessage previously delivered by telephone, it is to besent as a single address message. (May only be used inconjunction with ZEX.)Following message has been read (received or intercepted).Pass this message to ... 1) on arrival; 2) on return tobase.This message is a suspected duplicate.Pass message ... (which is in your files) to addee(s) forwhom you are responsible using the indicated supplementaryheading.Inform me when this message (or message ...) has beenreceived by ... (addee designation) or by ... 1) actionaddee(s); 2) information addee(s); 3) all addees;4) action addee message center; 5) information addeemessage center; 6) all addees' message center).C-11

NTP 8(D)ZFGZFHThis message is an exact duplicate of a message previouslytransmitted, and is to be delivered to all appropriateaddressed served by the receiving communications facility.This message (or message ...) is being (or has been)passed to you (or ...) for ... 1) action; 2) information;3) comment (at the request of ...).INT ZFI Is there any reply to message ...?ZFI There is no reply to message ...INT ZFK Does message ... (or station serial number ...) concern me(or ...)?ZFK Message ... (or station serial number ...) 1) does notconcern you (or ...); 2) no longer concerns you (or ...).INT ZFL Was there any traffic addressed to me on ... broadcastschedule between serial numbers ... and ...?ZFL Following traffic was addressed to you on ... broadcastschedule between serial numbers ... and ...ZFRZFSZFTZFUZFVZFWZFXCancel transmission ... (made under channel or stationserial number ...).Make message ... same channel or station serial number asthis procedure message.Message ... received without channel number (or stationserial number) following message bearing channel number(or station serial number) ... Message released.Channel numbers ... and ... preceded message ... Thelower number was recorded and higher number blanked.Message ... containing channel number ... separated byportions of the message, released subject to correction.Take necessary action to provide corrected copy.BLANK channel number(s) ...; forward message ... aschannel number ...Channel number (or station serial number) ... is open.INT ZGA What is my call sign for use on this circuit?ZGA Your call sign for use on this circuit only is ...C-12

NTP 8(D)ZGBZGEZGISend (answer) ... 1) in alphabetical sequence of callsigns; each station to make its call signs once (or ...times); 2) in the following sequence of call signs).Send your call sign(s) once (or ... times) on thisfrequency or on ... KHz (or MHz).I am or have been (or ... is or has been) calling you (on... KHz (or MHz)).INT ZGJ When will you call me again on present frequency (or on...KHz (or MHz))?ZGJ I will call you again as soon as possible (or at ...) onpresent frequency (or on ... KHz (or MHz)).INT ZGK When shall I call you on present frequency (or on ...KHz(or MHz))?ZGK Call me again at ... on present frequency (or on ... KHz(or MHz).ZGL ... will answer calls for me (or for ...).INT ZGM Did you (or...) hear... (at ...)?ZGM I have (or ...) has been unable to communicate with ...(since ...).INT ZGN When was I (or...) last heard?ZGN Nothing heard from you (or ...) (since ...).ZGPAnswer calls for me on present frequency (or on ... KHz(or MHz)).INT ZHA Shall I decrease frequency very slightly (or ... KHz) toclear interference?ZHA Decrease frequency very slightly (or ...KHz) to clearinterference.INT ZHB Shall I increase frequency very slightly (or ... KHz) toclear interference?ZHB Increase frequency very slightly (or ...KHz) to clearinterference.INT ZHN How do you receive my automatic transmission?ZHN Your automatic transmissions are ... 1) good; 2) fair;3) unreadable.C-13

NTP 8(D)INT ZHO What is your speed of transmission in ... 1) revolutionsper minute; 2) words per minute; 3) bauds?ZHO My speed of automatic transmission in ... 1) revolutionsper minutes; 2) words per minute; 3) bauds.INT ZHP What is preventing automatic reception?ZHP Automatic reception is prevented by ...ZHQPlease listen for me on ...KHz (or MHz) and transmit to meon ...KHz (or MHz).INT ZHR Is my speed of automatic transmission correct?ZHR Your speed of automatic transmission is ... 1) fast;2) slow; 3) erratic; 4) correct).ZIAThis message (or message ...) is being (or has been)passed out of proper sequence of station serial number ...INT ZIB Two messages ... and ... (or group counts and time oforigin ... and ...), both received as serial number ...What are correct serial numbers?ZIB Change station serial number of message ... to read number... OR assign to message ... station serial number ...INT ZIC What is (are) station serial number(s) or channelnumber(s) of last message(s) you transmitted to me (orto...)?ZIC Station serial number(s) or channel number(s) of lastmessage(s) received from you (or from ...) is (are) ...INT ZID What is (are) station serial number(s) or channelnumber(s) of last message(s) received from me (orfrom...)?ZID Station serial number(s) or channel number(s) of lastmessage(s) received from you (or from ...) is (are) ...ZIE Station serial number(s) or channel number(s) (from ...)has (have) not been received. Repeat message(s) or cancelserial number(s) or channel number(s).ZIFI (or ...) did not use serial number(s).INT ZIG Is (are) number(s) ... (to ...) blank?ZIG Number(s) ... (to ...) is (are) blank.ZIHRepeat headings of message numbers ... to ... transmittedby you (or ...) to check serial numbers.C-14

NTP 8(D)INT ZII What was ... of your (or ...'s) number ...?1) Date-time-group; 2) filing time.ZII My (or ...'s) number ... had following ... 1) date-timegroup;2) filing time.ZIJZJOI am now changing my channel number/letter. Last numbersent in this series is that of this message.Repeat back each group of the text of this message as itis transmitted.INT ZKA Who is controlling station (net control station on thisfrequency (or on ...KHz (or MHz))?ZKA I am (or ... is) controlling station (net control station)on this frequency (or on ... KHz (or MHz)).INT ZKB Is it necessary to obtain the permission of thecontrolling station) before transmitting messages.ZKB It is necessary to obtain the permission of thecontrolling station (net control station) beforetransmitting messages.ZKCSubstitute code sign (call sign) of control station ofgroup (net) in place of this operating signal.INT ZKD Shall I take control of net (for ...) (until ...)?ZKD Take control of net (for ...) (until ...)ZKEZKFZKGI (or ...) report(s) into circuit (net).Station leaves net temporarily (or for ... minutes) (tocommunicate with ...) (will be on ...KHz (or MHz)).Observe (or direct ...to observe) schedule with ... on...KHz (or MHz) (at...).INT ZKH Did you (or...) observe schedule with ... (at ...)?ZKH I (or ...) observed schedule with ... (at ...).INT ZKJ May I close down (until ...)?ZKJ ... 1) close down (until...); 2) I am closing down (until...).ZKL Resume normal radio communication now (or at ...).ZKMTake guard (for ...) (on ...KHz (or MHz)).C-15

NTP 8(D)ZKNZKOI have taken over guard on ...KHz (or MHz).I have handed over guard (to ...) (on ...KHz (or MHz))(serial number of last message received was ...).INT ZKR On what frequencies are you (or ...) maintaining watch?ZKR I am (or ... is) maintaining watch on ...KHz (or MHz).INT ZKS What stations are keeping watch on ... KHz (or MHz) (or innet)?ZKS Following stations are keeping watch on ... KHz (or MHz)(or are in net).ZOBZOCTake (I will take) no further action regarding forwardingmessage ...Station(s) called relay this message to addees for whomyou are responsible.ZOD Act as radio link (relaying station) between me and ...(or between ... and ...).INT ZOE Can you accept message for...? 1) on line; 2) off line.ZOE Give me your message. I will dispose of it ... 1) online; 2) off line.ZOFZOGZOHRelay (pass) this message (or message ...) to ... now (orat ...).Transmit (pass) this message (or message ...) to ... (for...) 1) action; 2) information.Send message for ... on ... KHz (or MHz) by ... 1) receiptmethod; 2) broadcast method; 3) intercept method.ZOR 1. Route traffic for ... via ... area broadcast. 2.Beginning at ... traffic for you (or ...) will be routedvia ... area broadcast.INT ZOS Request area routing for messages ...?ZOS Area routing for messages ... is ...ZOTTransmit or handle this message at the lower precedence tothe station or address designator(s) which follow(s).INT ZOU How should traffic for ... be routed?ZOU Route traffic for ... through ... (on ...KHz (or MHz)).C-16

NTP 8(D)ZOVZPAZPCZPEStation designation preceding this operating signal is thecorrect routing for this message rerouted by ...Your speech is distorted.Your signals are ... 1) fading badly; 2) fading slightly;3) good for ... words per minute; 4) getting stronger;5) getting weaker.Maximum power is now being radiated.INT ZPF What is the readability of the signals of the group (net)(or of ...)?ZPF The readability of the signals of the group (net) (or of...) is ... (1 to 5).INT ZPG What is (are) signal strength(s) of group (net) (or of...)?ZPG Signal strength(s) of group (net) is (are) (or of...)is... (1 to 5).ZPOZPWThe text of this message is to be relayed in precisely thesame format as that in which it is received. Nocharacters or machine functions are to be added, insertedor deleted and the relative positions of the groups are tobe retained.This message canceled at time indicated. File withoutfurther transmission.INT ZRA How does my frequency check?ZRA Your frequency is ... 1) correct; 2) slightly (or ...hertz (or KHz)) high; 3) slightly (or ... hertz (or KHz))low; 4) stable on steady mark; 5) stable on steady space;6) unstable; 7) erratic.ZRBCheck your (or ...'s) frequency on this circuit (or on...KHz (or MHz)).INT ZRC Shall I tune my transmitter to ... 1) proper frequency;2) zero beat with your (or ...) transmitter)?ZRC Tune your transmitter to ... 1) proper frequency; 2) zerobeat with my (or ...) transmitter.INT ZRE On what frequency do you hear me best?ZRE I hear you best on ...KHz (or MHz).C-17

NTP 8(D)INT ZRF Will you send tuning signal on your present frequency (oron ... KHz (or MHz)) for one minute or until AS is given?ZRF Am about to send tuning signal on my present frequency (oron ...KHz (or MHz)).INT ZRG When will a change of frequency (to ... KHz (or MHz)) benecessary?ZRG A change in frequency (to ...KHz (or MHz)) will benecessary at approximately ...INT ZRJ Will you check your ...?ZRJ I will check my ...INT ZRN Do you intend to transmit on ... 1) the upper sideband;2) the lower sideband; 3) both sidebands independently?ZRN I intend to transmit on ... 1) the upper sideband; 2) thelower sideband; 3) both sidebands independently?ZRQZRRZRSZRTChange to other sideband.Message(s) ... number(s) ... will no longer be broadcastbut are effective and of interest (to units indicated).Your carrier is ... 1) Over-suppressed;2) under-suppressed.Radiate full unmodulated power for ... minutes.INT ZRU Are my tone frequencies correct?ZRU Your tones for ... 1) marking and spacing are high;2) marking and spacing are low; 3) marking and spacing arecorrect.ZSOZTASend tapes (or messages) ... 1) once; 2) twice.... 1) radio; 2) visual; 3) landline; 4) teletypewriter(teleprinter); 5) telephone; 6) automatic; 7) facsimile;8) shore telephone; 9) shore teleprinter; 10) radioteletypewriter; 11) satellite.ZTB ... 1) transmitter-distributor; 2) auto-head; 3)perforator; 4) reperforator; 5) printer; 6) undulator; 7)keyboard; 8) frequency shift keyer; 9) multiplexingcarrier base; 10) on line crypto device.C-18

NTP 8(D)INT ZTC ...(1. Does my ... appear to be faulty?; 2. Is your ...faulty?ZTC ... (1. Your ... appears to be faulty; 2. my ... isfaulty).INT ZTD Shall I use ...?ZTD Use ...INT ZTE Are you (or is ...) able to use ...?ZTE I am (or ... is) able to use ...INT ZTF Are repairs completed?ZTF Repairs completed.ZTJ Cease using ...INT ZTK Are you (or is ...) connected to ...?ZTK I am (or ...is) connected to ...INT ZTL Are you (or is ...) about to disconnect?ZTL I am (or ... is) about to disconnect.ZTM I am (or ... is) unable to use ...ZUB At ...ZUC From ... to ...ZUD Until further orders (or until ...)ZUEZUGZUHAffirmative (Yes).Negative (No).Unable to comply.ZUI Your attention is invited to ...ZUJZWFZWGZWHStand by.Incorrect.You are correct.Try again.C-19

NTP 8(D)ZXWZXXZXYZYBZYJThis message has been delivered to all action addees whosedesignations follow this operating signal.This message has been delivered to all information addeeswhose designations follow this operating signal.Transmit this message to the addee(s) indicated by thenumeral(s) following ... All addees are to be countedconsecutively as they appear (numbers to be separated bythe Separative Sign).This is an administrative message.This is a SHARES message.C200. PROSIGNS AND PROWORDSC201. DEFINITIONSa. Prosigns are procedural signs consisting of one or moreletters or characters or combinations. They are used tofacilitate rapid communication by conveying certain frequentlyused orders, instructions, requests, reports and informationrelated to communications in condensed standard forms.b. Prowords are word equivalents of prosigns for use inradiotelephone procedure.C202. USE OF PROSIGNS AND PROWORDSa. When operating, all communicators should use prosigns andprowords to the greatest extent possible.b. Operating personnel shall not under any circumstancessubstitute prosigns, prowords, or combinations for the textualcomponent of a message received for transmission without theconsent and approval of the originator.c. If a word or group used to identify a part of a messageoccurs more than once in the message it is to be assumed that thefirst occurrence of that word or group is implied. If otherwiseintended, amplifying data such as adjacent words or groups must beincluded. Parts of messages are identified as follows:(1) AB BT denotes all before the text.C-20

NTP 8(D)(2) AA PLUXO BT denotes the message ending, where PLUXO isthe last group in the message.ending.(3) AA BT denotes the complete text and the messageC203. PROSIGN AND PROWORD LISTThe following authorized list of prosigns and prowords willbe used as prescribed:PROSIGN MEANING PROWORDAA Unknown station. UNKNOWN STATIONAA All after. ALL AFTERAB All before ALL BEFOREARASAS AREnd of transmission,no receipt required.I must pause for a fewseconds.I must pause longerthan a few seconds,will call you back.OUTWAITWAIT OUTB More to follow. MORE TO FOLLOWBTBreak (start or end ofmsg text).BREAKC Correct. CORRECTDE From. THIS ISC-21

NTP 8(D)(none)That which follows isthe time, or date-timegroup of this message.TIMEEEEEEEEE Error. CORRECTIONEEEEEEEE ARThis message is inerror disregard it.DISREGARD THISTRANSMISSION, OUTF Do not answer. DO NOT ANSWERFM Originator of message. FROMG(none)GR (Numerals)Read this transmissionback to me.This is my response toyour instructions toread back.Group count. (replace'Numerals' with thecount number).READ BACKI READ BACKGROUPS (Numerals)GRNCHM HM HMZUG HM HM HMThe groups in thismessage have not beencounted.Emergency silencesign.Resume normal transmissions,(Silence canbe lifted only by thestation imposing it orby higher authority).GROUP NO COUNTSILENCE, SILENCE,SILENCESILENCE LIFTEDIMIRepeat transmission,or identified portionof transmission.SAY AGAINC-22

NTP 8(D)IMI(none)QSZI am repeatingtransmission orportion indicated.I shall spell the nextword phonetically.Communication isdifficult. Transmiteach phrase (or eachcode group) twice.This PROWORD may beused as an order,request, or asinformation.I SAY AGAINI SPELLWORDS TWICEINFOThe addressdesignationsimmediately followingare addressed forinformation.INFOINTJ(none)K(none)Interrogative - usedto change a statementPROWORD to a questionPROWORD.Verify with originatorand repeat.Message or portionindicated has beenverified.Go ahead; or this isthe end of mytransmission to you; aresponse is necessary.Message requiringrecording follows.INTERROGATIVEVERIFYI VERIFYOVERMESSAGE FOLLOWSC-23

NTP 8(D)(none)Numerals or Numbersgroup follows. (seealso Roman Figures).FIGURES(none) Incorrect. WrongO Immediate precedence. IMMEDIATEP Priority precedence. PRIORITYRI have received yourlast transmissionsatisfactorily.ROGERR Routine precedence. ROUTINETTransmit this messageto all addresseesimmediately following.RELAYTO Action addressee(s). TOWILCOI have received yourmessage, understandit, and will comply.To be used only by theaddressee. SinceROGER is included inthe meaning of WILCO,the two prowords arenever used together.WILCOWA Word after. WORD AFTERWB Word before. WORD BEFOREXMTStations or addeesexempt from this msg(in collective callsign group).EXEMPTZ Flash precedence. FLASHC-24

NTP 8(D)C204. DESCRIPTION AND USE OF PROSIGNSa. AA - UNKNOWN STATION. The prosign AA is used in lieu of acall sign in establishing communication with a station whose callsign is not known or is not recognized.Example: NAV hears its own call sign but misses thecall sign of the calling station. NAV transmits:AA DE NAV Kb. AA - ALL AFTER: AB - ALL BEFORE. The prosigns AA and ABare used after the prosigns IMI, INT, C, J, and certain operatingsignals to identify a portion of a message.c. AR - OUT. The prosign AR means, THIS IS THE END OF MYTRANSMISSION TO YOU AND NO RESPONSE IS REQUIRED OR EXPECTED. WhenAR is used, it does not preclude requests if necessary forrepetitions or verifications.Example 1:Example 2:NAV DE NNNØRAL R ARR 142155Z MAR 2ØØ4BTHELLO JERRYBTARd. AS - WAIT. When the called station is not prepared toaccept traffic, the prosign AS may be employed.(1) AS sent during a transmission and without anending sign indicates a short pause:NNNØRRZ DE NAVR 1821ØØZ MAR 2ØØ4GR8BTUNCLASPASS TO GEO - ASC-25

NTP 8(D)When the calling station is ready to resume, it commences with arepetition of the last group already sent. GEO K MURKY etc.(2) AS followed by the prosign AR means YOU ARE TOWAIT, or I AM OBLIGED TO WAIT as applicable.(3) AS followed by a numeral and AR means the expecteddelay in minutes is represented by the numeral following AS.(4) A station having received AS shall wait for theprosign K before transmitting, unless in the meantime it has beengiven a message of high precedence to transmit, or it appears thestation has been overlooked.e. B - MORE TO FOLLOW. In the final instructions, theprosign B means MORE TO FOLLOW.Example 1: NAV indicates that it has more to send to NNNØTUGby transmitting:NNNØTUG DE NAVR 21134ØZ MAR 2ØØ4GR 29BTTEXTBTBKExample 2: NNNØSJK has just received a message from NAV.When receipting, NNNØSJK indicates that he has traffic to send toNAV as follows:NAV DE NNNØSJK R B KExample 3: A precedence prosign, except R, may follow B toindicate the precedence of the message on hand:NAV DE NNNØSJK R B P KB followed by a call sign in the final instructions meansMORE TO FOLLOW TO STATION INDICATED.Example: NNNØRAG, NNNØRBP, NNNØRDY, and NNNØRFZ are in thesame net. NNNØRAG transmits a message to NNNØRBP and NNNØRDY forwhich he requires a receipt and at the same time indicates toNNNØRDY that more is to follow for him:C-26

NTP 8(D)NNNØRDP NNNØRDY DE NNNØRAGR 14Ø315Z MAR 2ØØ4GR 34BTTEXTBTB NNNØRDYKf. BT - BREAK. The prosign BT is used to indicate theseparation between the text and other parts of a message. Itimmediately precedes and follows the text.Example: NAV is transmitting a message to NNNØSTT (for whichreceipt is not necessary or desired).NNNØSTT DE NAVP 221311Z MAR 2ØØ4BTTEXTBTARg. C - CORRECT. The prosign C used alone means YOU ARECORRECT.Example: NAV is transmitting a message to NNNØREL whoquestions the accuracy of the fifth group:NAV DE NNNØREL INT 5 BOLOE KIf the questioned group is correct, NAV transmits:DE NAV C KNNNØREL now transmits a repeat back message to NAV. AfterNNNØREL repeats the message back correctly, NAV transmits:DE NAV C ARC followed by identification data means THIS IS A CORRECTVERSION OF THE MESSAGE, OR PORTIONS INDICATED.C-27

NTP 8(D)Example: Correcting a portion of the message in the finalinstructions:WILL BE SHOPPED TODAYBTC WA BE - SHIPPEDKBefore receipting for a message from NAV, NNNØRAG questionsthe reception of the fifth group:NAV DE NNNØRAG INT 5 TELAO KNAV checks and finds the group is incorrect. NAV transmits:NNNØRAG DE NAV C 5 TELGO Kh. DE - THIS IS. The prosign DE is used only in the call andmeans THIS TRANSMISSION IS FROM THE STATION WHOSE DESIGNATIONFOLLOWS. It is also used in a preliminary call (to establishcommunications):NAV DE NNNØRBB Ki. EEEEEEEE - CORRECTION. To correct errors, a succession ofeight or more E's is transmitted and means AN ERROR INTRANSMISSION HAS JUST BEEN MADE. In correcting errors in theheading the error sign will be made, the operator will retransmitthe last prosign or operating signal that was correctlytransmitted, and the transmission will continue. To correct anerror within the text the error sign is made, the last word orgroup correctly transmitted is retransmitted, and transmission iscontinued. (NOTE: The phrase "eight or more E's" is intended tofacilitate operations. It shall not be construed as permittingtransmission of an excessive number of E's.)Example 1: NNNØRAA, transmitting a message, makes andcorrects an error in the heading:NNNØRAB DE NNNØRAAR 13Ø83ØZ MAR 2ØØ4FM NAV VATO NNNØRAANNNØRAG EEEEEEEETO NNNØRAA SCANNNØRBG SCAINFO NNNØRAB ETXC-28

NTP 8(D)BT etc.Example 2: NNNØRZO, transmitting a message to NNNØRZQ, makesand corrects an error in the text:NNNØRZQ DE NNNØRZOR 2Ø1827Z MAR 2ØØ4BTUNCLASSHIPMENT OF GA EEEEEEEE OF GEAR REPORT ETC.Example 3: NNNØRZZ transmitting to NNNØRZO, makes andcorrects an error in the text of a procedure message:NNNØRZO DE NNNØRZZ IMI AB 2 EEEEEEEE AB 32 KTo cancel transmission while in progress, a succession ofeight E's followed by the prosign AR means THIS TRANSMISSION IS INERROR, DISREGARD IT. This method of canceling a transmissioncannot be used after the transmission has been receipted for. Aprocedure message containing operating signals or a servicemessage must be used for this purpose.Example: NNNØRAB, while transmitting a message to NNNØRZO,discovers that the message should not be sent and cancels thetransmission:NNNØRZO DE NNNØRABR 171525Z MAR 2ØØ4FM NNNØRAB VATO NNNØRBL SC EEEEEEEE ARThe equivalent proword for EEEEEEEE is CORRECTION. The equivalentproword for EEEEEEEE AR is DISREGARD THIS TRANSMISSION.j. F - DO NOT ANSWER. F means "STATIONS CALLED ARE TO MAKENO TRANSMISSION IN RESPONSE TO, NOR IN CONNECTION WITH, THISMESSAGE." Transmissions containing the prosign "F" are to be madetwice, each transmission being separated by the prosign "IMI" orproword "I SAY AGAIN".Example:NNNØRYE DE NNNØJUHFR 221627Z MAR 2ØØ4FM NAV VAC-29

NTP 8(D)TO NNNØRYE SCBT(TEXT)BTIMINNNØRYE DE NNNØJUHFR 221627Z MAR 2ØØ4FM NAV VATO NNNØRYE SCBT(TEXT)BTARk. FM - FROM. The prosign FM means THE ORIGINATOR OF THISMESSAGE IS INDICATED BY THE DESIGNATION IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING.l. G - READ BACK. The prosign G means REPEAT BACK THE ENTIREMESSAGE. It is placed in the transmission instructions. It is usedby the transmitting station to ensure that the receiving stationhas received the message as transmitted, particularly if themessage is of great importance or of a type which is difficult totransmit and received.Example: NNNØRAB desires NNNØRZQ to repeat back a message;NNNØRAB transmits:NNNØRZQ DE NNNØRABGO 221813Z MAR 2ØØ4BTKNNNØRZQ complies as follows:NNNØRAB DE NNNØRZQNNNØRZQ DE NNNØRABGO 221813Z MAR 2ØØ4BTTEXTBTKIf found to be correct as transmitted, NNNØRAB transmits:C-30

NTP 8(D)NNNØRZQ DE NNNØRAB C ARAny corrections made during first transmissions, or containedin the message ending, will be inserted by the receiving stationprior to repeating back.m. GR (NUMERALS) - GROUPS (NUMERALS). The prosign GR followedby numerals is the group count and means THIS MESSAGE CONTAINS THENUMBER OF GROUPS INDICATED. This element may be omitted inmessages where the text consists of plain language. A numericalgroup count always will be included on encrypted messages.Example: NNNØRGG transmits a message containing eight groupsto NNNØRBL:NNNØRBL DE NNNØRGGGR 8R 272113Z MAR 2ØØ4BT(TEXT)BTKn. GRNC - GROUP NO COUNT. The prosign GRNC means THE GROUPSIN THE TEXT OF THIS MESSAGE HAVE NOT BEEN COUNTED. This prosignis included in the prefix if it is necessary to indicate that thegroups have not been counted.o. HM HM HM - SILENCE SILENCE SILENCE. HM transmitted threetimes or the proword SILENCE transmitted three times means CEASETRANSMISSION ON THIS OR INDICATED CIRCUIT IMMEDIATELY. SILENCEWILL BE MAINTAINED UNTIL DIRECTED TO RESUME.(1) Stations do not answer or receipt for a transmissionimposing emergency silence.(2) Emergency silence may be imposed or lifted by astation only when authorized by competent authority.(3) Emergency silence is lifted by addressing the stationsconcerned, and transmitting the operating signal ZUG meaningNEGATIVE followed by HM HM HM.p. IMI - SAY AGAIN - I SAY AGAIN. The prosign IMI meansREPEAT or I REPEAT MESSAGE OR PORTIONS OF A MESSAGE AS INDICATED.C-31

NTP 8(D)(1) IMI without identification data means REPEAT ALL OFYOUR LAST TRANSMISSION.Example: NNNØRBL requests a repetition of the entiretransmission just completed by NNNØRZZ:NNNØRZZ DE NNNØRBL IMI K(2) IMI followed by identification data means REPEAT THEINDICATED PORTION OF YOUR TRANSMISSION.Example:NNNØRGG DE NNNØRZO IMI AB MOVEMENT KExample: NNNØRZO desires a repeat of that portion of theheading between TO and INFO:NNNØRGG DE NNNØRZO IMI TO TO INFO K(3) In the text of a plain language message IMI means: IAM GOING TO REPEAT THE DIFFICULT PORTION JUST TRANSMITTED. It isnot used in the text of a plain language message to provideemphasis. Emphasis provided by printing the word, using theabbreviation RPT and printing the word again (e.g. IMPORTANT RPTIMPORTANT).(4) Where messages are transmitted twice, the twotransmissions are separated by IMI.(5) IMI shall not be used to correct an error intransmission.(6) IMI cannot be used to obtain a repetition of a messageor a portion thereof for which a receipt has been given. Aprocedure message containing operating signals or a servicemessage must be used for this purpose.q. INFO - INFO. The prosign INFO means THE ADDRESSDESIGNATIONS IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING ARE ADDRESSED FOR INFORMATION.r. INT. The prosign INT preceding operating signals orprosigns indicates that the transmission is in the form of aquestion.Example: NNNØRGG asks NNNØZZZ, Is the word after Ships,boats?C-32

NTP 8(D)NNNØZZZ DE NNNØRGG INT WA SHIPS - BOATS KINT preceding a portion of a message means: IS MY RECEPTION OFTHIS CORRECT?Example: NNNØRGG asks NNNØZZZ: Is the date-time-group31Ø126Z?NNNØZZZ DE NNNØRGG INT 31Ø126Z K(1) INT cannot be used to question any part of a messagefor which a receipt has been given. A procedure messagecontaining an operating signal, or a service message will be usedfor this purpose.(2) INT may be used to question the accuracy of groupcount or station serial number.s. J - VERIFY. The prosign J, meaning VERIFY WITH ORIGINATORAND REPEAT, is used by the addressee when he does not understandthe purpose of a message, or a portion thereof.t. K - OVER The prosign K means GO AHEAD or THIS IS THE ENDOF MY TRANSMISSION TO YOU AND A RESPONSE IS NECESSARY.u. PRECEDENCE PROSIGNS (Z, O, P, R). Precedence is indicatedby prosigns or prowords as follows:ProsignZOPRProwordFLASHIMMEDIATEPRIORITYROUTINEv. R - ROGER. The prosign R is used to indicate that atransmission was been received. Identification of the message ortransmission may be included if necessary.w. T - RELAY (TO). The prosign T, when used, shall appear inthe transmission instructions. Individual instructions to aspecific station may be indicated by use of call signs or addressdesignation preceding and following T, as appropriate.(1) T alone means, STATION CALLED TRANSMIT THIS MESSAGE TOALL ADDRESSEES IN THE ADDRESS COMPONENT.C-33

NTP 8(D)Example: NNNØPNI directs NNNØGKA to transmit to alladdressees:NNNØGKA DE NNNØPNITR 311615Z JUN 2ØØ4FM NNNØGKA SCATO NNNØEIP SCANNNØHAN SCABT etc.(2) T followed by an address designation means, STATIONCALLED TRANSMIT THIS MESSAGE TO THE ADDRESSEE WHOSE ADDRESSDESIGNATION FOLLOWS.Example: NNNØRGG directs NNNØRBL to transmit message toNNNØRZZ:NNNØRBL DE NNNØRGGT NNNØRZZR 161813Z JUN 2ØØ4FM NNNØRGG NJTO NNNØRZZ DEBT (etc.)(3) T preceded by a call sign and followed by an addressdesignation means, STATION WHOSE CALL SIGN PRECEDES T, TRANSMITTHE MESSAGE TO THE ADDRESSEE WHOSE ADDRESS DESIGNATION FOLLOWS T.Example: NNNØRBA calls both NNNØZZZ and NNNØRBL and requestsNNNØZZZ to transmit the message to NNNØRZL; NNNØRBL to transmitthe message to NNNØRZK:NNNØZZZ NNNØRBL DE NNNØRBANNNØZZZ T NNNØRZLNNNØRBL T NNNØRZKR 181927Z JUN 2ØØ4FM NNNØRBA SCTO NNNØRZK NCNNNØZZZ GANNNØRBL ALINFO NNNØRZL TNx. TO - TO. The prosign TO means, ADDRESSEES INDICATED BYTHE DESIGNATIONS IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING ARE ADDRESSED FOR ACTION.y. WA - WORD AFTER; WB - WORD BEFORE. The prosigns WA and WBare used after the prosigns IMI, INT, C, J and certain operatingC-34

NTP 8(D)signals to identify a portion of a plain language message." Inplain language messages, portions of the text are identified aswords rather than as group numbers. The prosigns WA and WB may beused as appropriate.Example 1:NNNØRZK DE NNNØRBLIMI WA CARRY KResponse:NNNØRBL DE NNNØRZKWA CARRY - OUT KExample 2:NNNØRZK DE NNNØRBLIMI WB CARRY KResponse:NNNØRBL DE NNNØRZKWB CARRY - PLEASE Kz. WILCO. I have received your message, understand it, andwill comply. To be used only by the addressee. Since ROGER isincluded in the meaning of WILCO, the two prowords are neverused together.aa. XMT - EXEMPT. The prosign XMT means, THE STATIONS ORADDRESSEES IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING ARE EXEMPTED FROM THE COLLECTIVECALL OR ADDRESS.Example 1: In the call:NNNØALS XMT NNNØRZL DE NNNØRBLR 151617Z MAR 2ØØ4 etc.Example 2: In the address:R 121617Z JUN 2ØØ4FM NNNØRZKTO NNNØRAANNNØALDXMT NNNØASF STXBT (etc.)C-35

NTP 8(D)THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKC-36

NTP 8(D)ANNEX DEMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS (ECOM) PLANNINGD100. INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEWD110. PURPOSEThis annex provides guidelines for adjunct emergencycommunications planning and action to be taken should it becomenecessary to utilize NAVMARCORMARS resources during an emergencyor disaster.D120. DEFINITIONAn emergency or disaster requiring emergency communicationssupport is defined as a sudden, generally unexpected, occurrenceor set of circumstances requiring an immediate system for sendingand receiving information to save lives, prevent injury topersons, or damage to property; and to implement recoveryprocedures to overcome the consequences of such an occurrence.For purposes of this annex such an occurrence is generally widespread, effecting at least a community (or sections of acommunity) causing overload of local relief and emergencyservices, and requiring extensive communications beyond the normalcommunications modes and functions used for day to day living.D130. SCOPEThis annex applies to all NAVMARCORMARS radio stations. MARSmembers should be prepared to assist, within their capabilities,with adjunct emergency communications when requested by arepresentative of the Department of the Navy, an elected orappointed official of civilian government, or an employee orappointed volunteer of a disaster relief agency.D140. POLICYa. It is the policy that MARS communications resources may beemployed with other service MARS and appropriate civil authoritiesradio-only services in the following order of priority (firstlisted is the top priority):(1) Navy and Marine Corps Communications needs regardlessof relationship to incident(s).D-1

NTP 8(D)(2) Navy and Marine Corps activities within or supportingthe affected area.(3) Agencies of the Federal government through the SHARESprogram.NOTE: Memoranda of understanding, signed agreements, andother similar documents between MARS and government orcivil authorities may interject between prioritiesanywhere below this point.(4) Other Department of Defense and US Coast Guardactivities within or supporting the affected area.(5) Agencies of civil government.(6) Disaster relief agencies.(7) Other agencies, organizations, or groups as approvedby the MARS area director (or, in the absence of the director, adesignated representative).b. MARS resources must be requested by an authorized agent ofthe organization to be supported.c. MARS members are not authorized to self activate to thescene of an accident, incident, disaster, or emergency.d. Individual MARS members shall apprise members of the MARSchain of command by the fastest means possible when an emergencyor disaster occurs (or is imminent) in order to provide theearliest possible warning and advance information to appropriateauthorities.D150. ORGANIZATIONOrganization will be per this publication and otherdirectives and instructions promulgated by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS,MARS area directors, or other competent authority.D200. RESPONSIBILITIESD210. AREA DIRECTORSArea directors shall:D-2

NTP 8(D)a. Select a qualified volunteer member for appointment asAssistant to the Director for Emergency Communications (Staffdesignator "TWO") per paragraph 223.b. Establish an emergency communications training netdesignating the area assistant for ECOM as Net Control Station(NCS) for training and administrative matters between area, regionand state ECOM coordinators.c. Coordinate with the Operations Officer (or EmergencyManagement Officer assigned to the staff) of the senior office ofNavy and Marine Corps commands/activities and US Coast Guardoperations in the area, region or state; civilian emergencymanagement officials; other MARS area and region directors; andother MARS services officials as deemed appropriate and necessary.d. Promulgate a MARS Area ECOM plan implementing theprovisions of this Annex based upon the requirements of thespecific MARS area. Area ECOM plans shall be submitted to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS for approval.e. Provide guidance, coordination, and advise and makerecommendations via the Assistant to the Chief for ECOM to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS in matters concerning ECOM.f. Activate and deactivate emergency networks as directed tomeet requirements of effective emergency communications.g. Provide situation reports (SITREPS) and other such reportsas required to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS and other appropriateauthorities. See paragraph D730.b.h. Ensure that periodic ECOM exercises are conducted toevaluate and improve MARS area, region and state capabilities.Each MARS state should conduct ECOM exercises not less thanquarterly. MARS areas and regions should conduct at least onearea/region wide exercise annually.i. Submit post-exercise reports to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS andthe Assistant to Chief MARS for ECOM not more than 15 days afteran exercise. (Include information on lessons learned andrecommendations as a result of area, region and state ECOMexercises.) See paragraph D740.j. Advise Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, Assistant to Chief MARS forECOM, and other authorities as required, of any planned area,region or state ECOM exercise. Include the purpose, location(s),D-3

NTP 8(D)dates and times, and frequency (frequencies) to be employed. Inthe case of area and region exercises, a copy of the exercise planmust be forwarded to the Assistant to Chief MARS for ECOM not lessthan 15 days prior to the scheduled exercise. See paragraph D820.k. Establish a means of control and issue of equipment thatis highly useful during emergencies and which can be madeavailable (e.g. gas powered generators, portable and mobileequipment, etc.).l. Maintain an up-to-date list of station capabilities of allMARS stations within the area.m. Advise Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, and other appropriatecognizant military authority and volunteer appointees wheneverhe/she will be absent from his normal area of duty for a period inexcess of 24 hours.n. Perform such other duties and responsibilities as directedby competent authority.D220. REGION DIRECTORSRegion directors, within their region, will assist the areadirectors in carrying out the responsibilities of the areadirector as outlined in paragraph D210 above, including:a. Select a qualified volunteer member for appointment asAssistant to the Director for Emergency Communications (Staffdesignator "TWO") per paragraph D223.b. If region conditions dictate, promulgate a region ECOMPlan (or appendix to the Area ECOM plan) for instructions uniqueto the region.c. Participate in the area ECOM training nets as establishedper paragraph D210.b above and state ECOM training nets, ifestablished.d. Activate and deactivate emergency networks as necessary tomeet requirements for effective emergency communications.e. Provide situation reports (SITREPS) and other such reportsas required to area director, Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, and otherappropriate authorities.D-4

NTP 8(D)f. Assist state directors in preparing state ECOM planscomplying with the area ECOM plan.g. Assist the area director in performing the duties ofarticle D210.h. Perform such other duties and responsibilities as directedby competent authority.D230. STATE DIRECTORSa. Select a qualified volunteer member within the state forappointment as Assistant to the State director for EmergencyCommunications (Staff designator TWO) per Chapter 2 of thispublication.b. Promulgate a state ECOM Plan based upon the area ECOMplan. Include any state requirements to achieve an effective andcompatible ECOM system. State ECOM plans must be forwarded viathe region director and signed by both the state director and thearea director prior to implementation. The state ECOM plan shallnot conflict with the area ECOM plan, MARS wide ECOM plan(s), thispublication, or directives from Chief MARS, the area director, orother higher authority.c. It is strongly recommended (with the approval of the areadirector) that a state ECOM training net be established(designating the state ECOM Assistant as NECOS), for training andadministrative matters between the director and state MARSstations. Such nets may be held on VHF or HF frequencies whenapproved and assigned by the area director. For purposes ofcomplying with the requirements of this section state ECOM netsmay be combined (as one net) with area nets if approved by thearea director.d. Provide necessary coordination with the area and regiondirector, special assistants, MARS members, disaster controlofficials of military and civilian agencies, and other emergencyorganizations within the state.e. Advise and make recommendations to the area and regiondirectors in matters concerning ECOM.f. Conduct quarterly emergency communications exercises toprovide training and to evaluate and improve state capaibility.The state director shall advise the area and region directors ofthe dates, times, locations, purpose(s), and frequency(s) ofD-5

NTP 8(D)exercises. A copy of the exercise plan shall be submitted to thearea and region directors not less than 15 days prior to thescheduled exercise. (The area director will notify Chief,NAVMARCORMARS as outlined above).g. Submit to the area and region directors within seven daysof completion of the scheduled exercise an After Action Reportcontaining lessons learned and recommendations for improving stateplans, state procedures, and area and region support to stateplans. See paragraph D740.h. Maintain an up-to-date list of equipment and stationcapabilities of all MARS stations within the state, and so advisethe area and region director.i. Ensure that all required ECOM messages are submittedduring an emergency.D240. EACH MILITARY AUSPICES STATIONEach military auspices station of the NAVMARCORMARSorganization sponsored by a military command or activity shall:a. Coordinate with the cognizant operations officer oremergency manager of the sponsoring command or activity.b. Ensure that the MARS organization is included in theactivity's emergency response and recovery plans for ECOM.c. Provide for the necessary coordination between the MARSorganization and the activity/command in matters concerning ECOM.d. Advise and make recommendations to the area and regiondirectors (with information copies to the area deputy director,region assistant director, area and region ECOM assistants, statedirector and state ECOM assistant in matters concerning ECOM.e. Prepare an ECOM plan per this publication, area and stateECOM plans and ECOM requirements of the command/activity and othersuch commands/activities to whom this station may provide ECOM.f. If available, train active duty, reserve, and volunteermembers of the Military Auspices Station to respond and provideECOM support to the command(s) and activities per approvedactivity plans.D-6

NTP 8(D)g. Train active, reserve, and volunteer members of theMilitary Auspices Station to support state, region and area ECOMgoals, plans, and procedures.D250. EACH NAVMARCORMARS MEMBERa. Endeavor to equip his/her station (fixed, mobile, orportable) to operate without the use of commercially suppliedpower.b. Endeavor to participate in state and area ECOM trainingprograms and exercises when available.c. Ensure that the state director is made aware of anychanges in the status of state member stations and equipment andabilities to operate (fixed, mobile, portable) on MARSfrequencies, modes, and on emergency power.d. Advise the state director with SITREPS and other suchreports as required regarding involvement in matters concerningECOM, and on any affiliation or participation in other emergencyresponse programs (including, but not limited to work relatedcommitments, commitments to military reserve, law enforcementreserve program, volunteer firefighter, American Red Cross, ARES,RACES, SHARES, FEMA, etc.)D300. EXECUTIONThe provisions of this annex will be executed when directedby Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, or other competent authority. Any MARSmember may effect local implementation when requested by militaryor civilian authorities pending an official request andacknowledgment. An Immediate precedence message (or other rapidmeans of communication) stating implementation circumstances shallbe initiated to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, his/her assistant foremergency communications and the cognizant area and regiondirectors as action addees, with info addees to area, region andstate ECOM assistant(s), state director, and such other addees asdesignated by any director in the chain of command. (Refer to thecognizant Area Operations Guide as applicable.) If required, thisnotification should include request for additional support. Seeparagraph D710 for message format.D-7

NTP 8(D)D400. ALERTINGIn order to provide a phased response to emergencysituations, the alerting conditions and actions described inparagraphs D410 through D440 will apply.D410. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION THREE (COMCON III)a. Description: An emergency or disaster situation isexpected to develop within forty-eight hours.b. Action required:(1) Alert NAVMARCORMARS stations to monitor primaryfrequencies to the extent feasible.(2) Take preliminary precautions: test emergency power,locate essential items such as flashlights, ECOM Plan, etc.above.(3) Continue "normal routines" commensurate with two itemsD420. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION TWO (COMCON II)a. Description: An emergency or disaster situation isexpected to develop within twenty-four hours.b. Action required:notice.(1) Effect all measures necessary to activate on short(2) Curtail routine as necessary for readiness.D430. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION ONE (COMCON I)a. Description: An emergency or disaster situation isimminent.b. Action required:(1) Suspend all normal operations as warranted.(2) Activate emergency networks and the EmergencyCommunications Plan (ECP) as necessary.(3) Take appropriate precautions.D-8

NTP 8(D)D440. COMMUNICATIONS CONDITION ZERO (COMCON Ø)a. Description: An emergency or disaster situation exists.b. Action required: identical to COMCON ONE.D500. MINIMIZEa. MIMIMIZE is a U. S. Navy policy of restricting allcommunications except that of an urgent nature due to politicalsensitivity, communication circuit overloads, or other higherprecedence traffic needing the existing circuits.b. MINIMIZE will not be effected within MARS when imposed onother military communication facilities unless specificallydirected.c. MINIMIZE may only be imposed on MARS networks by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS or higher authority.d. The decision to effect MINIMIZE shall be based, in part,on the advice or information received from the area and regiondirectors, their staff and other considerations per thispublication.D600. EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS OPERATIONS AND PROCEDURESD610. GENERAL OPERATIONSThe need for specific emergency communication requirementscannot be predicted for any one situation. Therefore,NAVMARCORMARS communications should be such that only a few minorchanges and an extension of normal operating hours will berequired when shifting to an emergency status.D620. COMMON FREQUENCIESCertain frequencies (7382.5 KHz Primary, 14385 KHz and 4042.5KHz Secondary) have been designated as national MARS commonfrequencies. In the event of an emergency, all NAVMARCORMARSstations are requested to guard these frequencies for command andcontrol at the national level. Unless otherwise advised by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS or NNNØASZ, these frequencies are available forarea, region and state ECOM operations. Discrete areafrequencies, as listed in the Area Operations Guides, should beD-9

NTP 8(D)monitored by all members within an area to the maximum extentpossible.D630. TACTICAL NETTactical nets may be established during actual or exerciseemergencies only to provide point-to-point communications betweenstations when other MARS communications facilities do not meet therequirements (or are non-existent). When a tactical net isrequired, a net frequency for inter-area communications shall berequested from Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, and from the cognizant MARSarea director for intra-area frequencies. Frequencies remote fromthe amateur radio band will normally be the only frequenciesassigned. The station requesting a frequency for a tactical netis responsible to report completion of its use to the officialfrom whom the frequency was obtained.D640. INTER-AREA COMMUNICATIONSInter-area communications shall be coordinated between areadirectors.D650. INTRA-AREA COMMUNICATIONSIntra-area communications shall normally be conducted on theestablished area, region and state networks. In the event thesenets do not meet the requirements, the area director (or a regionor state director) may establish an emergency net, assigningavailable frequencies without the coordination required by AnnexB. Caution shall be exercised to preclude interference withanother net that may be using the frequency. Emergency operationsshall take precedence. The VHF repeater system (MARSREPSYS) shallbe used to the utmost whenever available. During actual andexercise emergencies, NAVMARCORMARS military unit and auxiliarystations shall have direct radio communications with the areadirector's radio station to ensure rapid and reliablecommunications.D660. SPECIAL EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS TEAMSDuring an emergency, mobility and adequately mannedcommunications facilities are paramount for an effective emergencycommunications system. To provide these requirements, AuxiliaryRadio Teams (ARTs) and Station Augmentation Teams (SATs) shouldbe formed, trained, and regularly exercised.D-10

NTP 8(D)D661. AUXILIARY RADIO TEAM (ART)Each MARS state should establish, man, train, and exercise atleast one ART.a. Each ART shall be designated by the region number, a dashand a sequence number, e.g. ART 7-1, ART 5-2, etc. Operationalcall signs shall be assigned as directed by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.b. ART's should be organized and equipped as follows:(1) Be comprised of at least 6 members, if possible,headed by an ART Captain.(2) Equipment consisting of portable and mobile VHF FMtransceivers with frequency coverage to operate in simplex andduplex through local VHF Repeater systems. Whenever possible,each team member should have portable/mobile VHF FM equipment forindividual communications.(3) Each ART should be equipped with a source (preferablytwo) of emergency power, suitable for the climate and theenvironment in which the team will likely operate. (Car batteriesare not sufficient to constitute reasonable emergency power.)Emergency power should consist of deep cycle batteries (good as aback up) and gas/diesel powered generators.(4) Each ART should have at least one HF transceivercapable of general coverage transmit and receive capability (or asa minimum, capable of operating on the assigned ECOM frequencieswithin the region). It should include (as a minimum) SSBoperation.(5) ART captains are required to ensure that sufficientsupplies are immediately available for each team member beforedeployment. These might include (but are not limited to): firstaid and other self support materials (flash lights, sparebatteries, food, potable water, sanitary provisions), fuel, somedegree of basic spare parts (fan belts, spark plug, etc.), andbasic tools. Team Captains should have a check off list of theART's needs. The state director and state ECOM assistant shall beprovided up-to-date copies of these lists as well as the name,call sign, and probable availability of each member in the ART.Each member should have a check off list of items he or she isresponsible to bring and items he or she may choose to bring inaddition. Responsibility for providing supplies should be workedout well in advance with at least one back up person for essentialitems.D-11

NTP 8(D)c. Privately owned vehicles used to transport the ART arerequired to have insurance (unless the owner has a certificate ofself insurance). All local and state insurance requirements inthe state must be met.d. Because ART's operate in "field conditions" whererecognition by law enforcement and emergency management personnelis essential, the following optional MARS uniform is authorized:(1) ART members are authorized to purchase (at their ownexpense) a dark blue jumpsuit to be worn only during exercises,organized team training, or actual emergencies.(2) When worn as an ART uniform, team members must affixthe NAVMARCORMARS logo (available from area directors) on theupper right side of the jumpsuit, on or above the pocket if thereis one.(3) When worn as an ART uniform, member should have a nametag with name and MARS call sign affixed to the upper left sideof the jumpsuit (opposite the MARS logo). Clipping your MARS IDCard to the upper left side of your shirt or jumpsuit will fulfillthis requirement.(4) To enhance visibility and safety during hours ofdarkness, not more than two (each 1/2 inch) gold reflectivestripes may be added to the jumpsuit along the outboard side ofsleeves and legs.e. A dark blue MARS ball cap with logo is available to allMARS members for purchase at amateur radio conventions.f. Because ART's may be required to operate in isolated andrugged terrain, members should wear leather lace-up boots withthick socks to isolate their feet from environmental conditions.g. ART training should be conducted frequently wheneverpossible, with quarterly participation in state exercises andannual participation in area- or region-wide exercises. Alltraining periods do not require field response. Some may be assimple as getting the team together to decide on individualmembership responsibilities and mobilization techniques. At leastone training drill per year should involve full mobilization ofequipment and personnel to test equipment and ensure it is workingproperly, especially batteries and generators. Antennas should bethoroughly inspected and tested as well.D-12

NTP 8(D)D662. STATION AUGMENTATION TEAM (SAT)During an emergency, the tempo and quantity of messagetraffic increases. Higher precedences are generally experienced.Additionally, operations are normally extended to 24 hourcontinuous operations. Therefore, key multi-operator stationsprovide an important support function for ECOM operations.a. In view of the many single operator stations within MARS,SAT's shall be established to meet the above requirements. SAT'sshould be established to assist in the operation of key selectedMARS radio stations and Military Auspices Stations. Requests forSAT's should include the number of communicators required topermit effective operations on a 24 hour basis.b. MARS members do not normally hold security clearances.Therefore, if a Department of Defense, US Coast Guard, or othersecurity clearance is required, it will be the responsibility ofthe requesting organization to obtain the necessary clearance(s).c. Because SAT members must traverse states whererecognizability by law enforcement and emergency managementpersonnel may be required, it is recommended that SAT members wearthe MARS ballcap and affix a black plastic name tag with name andcall sign to the upper left side of your shirt. Clipping yourMARS ID card to the upper left side of your shirt will fulfillthis requirement.d. All MARS members are required to produce their MARSidentification cards when requested by law enforcement or disastercontrol officials. Therefore, it is essential that SAT membersensure that they have their ID cards before deploying.D700. REPORTSReports to the various levels of NAVMARCORMARS management areessential to properly evaluate the overall emergency situation andto enable maximum effectiveness in providing emergencycommunication support. Reports shall be factual, concise, briefand to the point, but not to the extent that they are cryptic andincomprehensible. When necessary to report information that isbased on an estimate or an opinion, it shall be so indicated inorder to prevent rumors and inaccurate evaluations. Except inreports permitting estimates based on opinion, MARS members shallrefrain from expressing opinions, rumors, and hearsay over MARSnetworks.D-13

NTP 8(D)D710. IMPLEMENTATION REPORTSUpon implementing any portion of this Annex (except EEIsubmission of per article D900) by a MARS member station, a reportshall be made by an immediate precedence message to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS (NNNØASA), the Assistant to CHNAVMARCORMARS forEmergency Communication (NNNØASZ), the cognizant area, region andstate directors, using the following message format:DE (station call sign) (station serial number)O DTG Z (Mo.) (Yr.)FM NNNØTO NNNØASA VANNNØASZ GANNNØAS (Area Director)NNNØAS_ (Region Director)NNNØG (State Director)BTUNCLASSUBJ: EMERG COMM IMPLEMENTATION1. Circumstances requiring implementation.2. MARS services requested (yes/no). If yes, requested byname and title of the requestor.3. Additional communication support required (yes/no). Ifyes, to what extent and scope. (Note: If additional supportindicated within:)A. State - action to be taken by State director.B. Area/Region - action to be taken by Area/RegionDirector.C. Outside Area - action to be taken by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS.BTNNNNNote: Additional information addressees may be added as desired.Example Message:DE NNNØXOP 2Ø4O Ø112ØZ SEP 2ØØ9FM NNNØXOP GATO NNNØASA VANNNØASZ GANNNØASG MINNNØAS4 GANNNØGAM GANNNØGBS SC (SEE NOTE)D-14

NTP 8(D)NNNØGAL FL (SEE NOTE)NNNØGAA AL (SEE NOTE)BTUNCLASSUBJ: EMERG COMM IMPLEMENTATION1. STORMS IN NORTHERN GEORGIA HAVE DISRUPTED COMMUNICATIONS.GEORGIA EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (GEMA) HAS REQUESTED OURCOMMUNICATIONS ASSISTANCE.2. YES, MR JOHN DOE, DIRECTOR GEMA, 4Ø4-555-12343. YESA. REQUEST NNNØGAM ACTIVATE CALL UP TREE. ESTABLISH ANECOM NET (4D1E) ON NCI PRIMARY, NFH SECONDARY.B. NONEC. NONEBTNNNNNOTE: Although not a requirement, it is a good idea to notifyadjacent states. They may be of assistance in providing relays.D720. ART OPERATIONAL READINESS REPORTSIf an ART has been formulated, the following message formatis suggested as a means of informing the state director andhis/her assistant for ECOM of the team’s operational readiness(OPREDREP).O (dtg)FM NNNØ--- (ART call sign)TO (State Director)(State Assistant for ECOM)BTUNCLAS MARS EXERCISE (or ACTUAL EVENT/STATE)SUBJ: OPREDREP (name of emergency)1. (List of call signs of stations available for ART)2. (Number and types of stations available: HF,mobile, portable, VHF, etc.)3. (ECOM frequencies available and modes of operation)4. (Time team will be available for deployment)5. (Additional requirements, comments)MARS EXERCISE (or ACTUAL EVENT)BTNNNNNOTE: This message should be sent over a state net - NOT an areaor region net. The state director or assistant for ECOM shouldnotify the region and area chain of command on their ART status.D-15

NTP 8(D)Example message:O 012120Z AUG 2009FM NNNØTPR PATO NNNØGCP PANNNØGCP TWO PABTUNCLAS MARS EXERCISESUBJ: OPREDREP WHITE BLANKET1. NNN0EYF/NNN0FAH/NNN0IKX/NNN0JFC/NNN0SAT/NNN0TPR2. TWO HF PORTABLE, THREE HF MOBILE, TWO VHF3. NFL AND NDP/SSB, AMTOR FEC, MT63, VHF PACKET4. 011500Z AUG 20095. NONEMARS EXERCISEBTNNNND730. REPORTS REQUIRED DURING THE EMERGENCYa. During an emergency, the role of MARS is to provideemergency communication services. MARS members should not becomeinvolved directly in emergency activities except for providingcommunication services unless otherwise requested by properauthorities.b. During an emergency, situation reports (SITREPS)pertaining to MARS communications shall be sent at intervalsspecified by the area director (intervals shall not exceed sixhours) or sooner, if warranted. SITREPS shall be sent to thecognizant area, region and state director by the station(s) at thescene(s) of the disaster(s). The region director will in turnconsolidate reports and make a report to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS(NNNØASA) and the Assistant to CHNAVMARCORMARS for EmergencyCommunications (NNNØASZ) every six hours. These SITREPS shouldalso be sent to the area, region and state assistants for ECOM forinformation. SITREPS may be used to change the COMCON level.SITREPS will be sent using the following format:P (DTG) Z (Mo.) (Yr.)FM NNNØ___ (Station call sign and state)TO NNNØAS _ (Area Director call sign and state)NNNØAS ONE (Area Assistant to the Director and state)NNNØAS_ (Region Director call sign and state)INFO NNNØG (State Director call sign and state)NNNØAS_ TWO (Area ECOM assistant call sign and state)D-16

NTP 8(D)NNNØAS_ TWO (Region ECOM assistant call sign and state)NNNØG__ TWO (State ECOM assistant call sign and state)BTUNCLASSUBJ: SITREP (One, Two, Three, etc.)1. (Brief resume of situation in disaster state)2. (Designator(s) of Net(s) and number of stationsparticipating in the emergency)3. (Advisory information, recommendations, needs, etc., bebrief.)4. (Prognosis for next six hours)5. (Other pertinent information - problems, equipmentperformance, etc.)BTNNNNc. The subject of the first or initial SITREP will be SITREPONE; the next SITREP TWO, etc. They will be numberedconsecutively until the emergency is over. The last SITREP willbe FINAL SITREP. This will facilitate correlation of the reportsby higher echelons.d. Standard categories of information 1 through 5 in the textof a SITREP will not be omitted. Lack of information or anegative report will be made by using the following terms:(1) NO CHANGE - used to indicate that the item is the sameas previously reported.(2) NEGATIVE - used to indicate this category notapplicable, not being used, or nothing to report.(3) NOT AVAILABLE - information requested by this categoryis not available at this time.e. Example message:DE NNNØXOP 207P Ø118ØØZ JAN 2Ø1ØFM NNNØXOP GATO NNNØASG MINNNØASG ONE ILNNNØAS4 GANNNØGAM GAINFO NNNØASG TWO SCNNNØAS4 TWO ALNNNØGAM TWO GAD-17

NTP 8(D)BTUNCLASSUBJ: SITREP ONE1. STORMS IN NORTHERN GEORGIA CONTINUE TO INTERRUPTCOMMUNICATIONS.2. 4D1E/FOURTEEN3. GEORGIA EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (GEMA) ADVISES THATCREWS ARE WORKING TO RESTORE COMMUNICATIONS. ESTIMATE TIME TOREPAIR (ETR) TWELVE TO TWO ZERO HOURS4. NO CHANGE5. NEGATIVEBTNNNND740. REPORTS REQUIRED AT TERMINATION OF AN EMERGENCYWithin seven days after the termination of any emergency, theinvolved state director(s) or their authorized representatives,should compile information received and make an After ActionReport to the area director via the region director, who shallwithin 15 days consolidate all reports and forward them to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS and the Assistant to CHNAVMARCORMARS for EmergencyCommunications. The subject line should state “AFTER ACTIONREPORT” and a name describing the emergency (or exercise). Thefollowing format shall be used (see paragraphs D210.i. andD230.g.):1. Place(s) involved2. Date and time (Hours of operations)3. Stations participating4. Frequencies and modes employed5. Traffic handled6. Description of the emergency services rendered7. Comments and recommendations for improvement of servicesand capabilities8. News coverage (attach press releases and pictures, ifavailable)9. Human interestD800. EXERCISESTo evaluate ECOM training, exercises are conducted at thestate, region, area and national levels.D-18

NTP 8(D)D810. EXERCISE MESSAGE FORMATExercises should follow the format and procedures as if itwere an actual emergency, except that the format of the emergencymessages shall be:BTUNCLAS EXERCISE (name of exercise may be added)(text)EXERCISEBTD820. EXERCISE NOTIFICATIONNo later than 15 days prior to conducting an exercise, thestate shall notify the area and region directors and the area andregion assistants for emergency communications of the exercise.Exercises are valuable tools to aid in evaluating the state'sreadiness and uncovering items that require added training. Seeparagraph D230.f.a. When a state advises of a forthcoming exercise, thefollowing information, as a minimum, shall be included:(1) Date/time the exercise is scheduled to start.Date/time the exercise is scheduled to end.(2) Primary and secondary frequencies to be used.(3) Objectives.(4) Type of message traffic anticipated.b. Of prime importance are the objectives. Some typicalexamples are:(1) Exercise and evaluate the call-up tree.(2) Evaluate members' participation.(3) Exercise members in the drafting and transmission ofvoice and digital messages.(4) Exercise NCS in the operation of ECOM nets.(5) Exercise members in ECOM traffic listing andtransmission of multi-addressee messages.D-19

NTP 8(D)(6) Preparation and transmission of special ECOM messages(implementation, SITREPS, ART/SAT messages and final reports).(7) Exercise members in the drafting, releasing andsending of EEI messages.D830. JOINT EXERCISESJoint exercises (with Army and Air Force MARS) areencouraged. NAVMARCORMARS operations shall be per this annex andAnnex J for interoperability. To ensure that these exercises arecoordinated and provide maximum value to all participants, thefollowing shall apply:a. Joint exercise within a state. NAVMARCORMARS approvalshall be the state director. The state director is encouraged tohave the plan reviewed by the state -TWO and -FIFTEEN.b. Joint exercises between states within a region. Submittalof the plan shall be to the region -TWO who shall coordinate withthe state -FIFTEEN, area -TWO and -FIFTEEN and forward to theregion and area directors for approval.c. Joint exercises between regions within an area. Submittalof the plan shall be to the area -TWO who shall coordinate withthe area -FIFTEEN and forward to the area and region directors forapproval.d. Joint exercises between states in different areas. Theplan shall be coordinated with the area and region directors andsubmitted to NNNØASZ for review. Final approval shall be byChief, NAVMARCORMARS.D900. ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS OF INFORMATION (EEI) MESSAGESNAVMARCORMARS has been tasked by the Department of Defense(DOD) to provide information in the event of a disaster. This isto be accomplished with a pro-forma message called ESSENTIALELEMENTS OF INFORMATION (EEI). Speed is critical. The EEImessage should be forwarded by any means at the operator'sdisposal including, but not limited to, VHF, local or state nets,WL2K, land line, e-mail, etc. The MARS member should report anyevent he or she believes may be of interest at the national level.It is always better to report on too many events rather than missone. The preferred method of submission is by e-mail to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS and AAN3EEI VA (AAN3EEI@winlink.org). They shouldD-20

NTP 8(D)also be submitted to Chief, NAVMARCORMARS and all other MARSaddees via Winlink 2000 traffic system. It is not necessary toset or increase COMCON level to send an EEI message.D901. EEI MESSAGE FORMATa. EEI messages are sent using a pro-forma message format.All paragraphs and subparagraphs must be included in themessage. If the information is not available see the note afterthe message format description.b. EEI messages are time sensitive. If e-mail is availableACTUAL EEI messages should be e-mailed to AAN3EEI VA. E-mailaddresses will be promulgated by Chief, NAVMARCORMARSbroadcasts. If the EEI message has been sent by e-mail, place“ZEN/” before AAN3EEI VA before inserting into the Winlink 2000traffic system.c. The NAVMARCORMARS web site may be used to construct andsend ACTUAL EEI messages to AAN3EEI VA. Once you have submittedthe message, you will receive a “submission copy” in whichAAN3EEI VA will be ZENed. Save the copy as a .TXT file andinput the file into the Winlink 2000 traffic system as soon aspossible.d. EEI messages (actual and exercise) are always sent asOperational Immediate (O) precedence.e. The message format and a sample message are providedbelow:DE (STATION CALL SIGN) (SERIAL NUMBER)O (DATE-TIME-GROUP)FM (ORIGINATING STATION) (STATE)TO AAN3EEI VAINFO NNNØASA VA(YOUR AREA DIRECTOR) (STATE)(YOUR ASSISTANT AREA DIRECTOR) (STATE)NNNØASZ GA(YOUR AREA ECOM ASSISTANT) (STATE)(YOUR REGION ECOM ASSISTANT) (STATE)(YOUR STATE DIRECTOR) (STATE)(YOUR STATE ECOM ASSISTANT) (STATE)BTUNCLAS ACTUAL INCIDENT(USE 'MARS EXERCISE' IN PLACE OF 'ACTUAL INCIDENT' FOREXERCISES)D-21

NTP 8(D)SUBJ: EEI REPORT(FOR UPDATES, CHANGE LINE TO READ:‘SUBJ: EEI REPORT UPDATE NR 1’AND INCREASE THE NUMBER AS APPROPRIATE.)1. REF (USE EVENT IDENTIFIER OF PARAGRAPH D902)/(STATE)A. INCIDENT: (INCIDENT AND LOCATION) (WHAT, WHERE AND WHEN:SPECIFIC LOCATION OF INCIDENT AND TIME OF OCCURRENCE)B. MEDICAL: (STATUS OF EMERGENCY MEDICAL FACILITIES)(HOSPITALS/CLINICS OPERATIONAL, DESTROYED, PARTIALLYDESTROYED. WHAT IS AVAILABLE IN THE AREA, ETC.)C. TRANSPORTATION: (LOCAL TRANSPORTATION STATUS)(ACCESSIBILITY OF INCIDENT AREA: ROADS, BRIDGES, AIRPORTS,RAILWAYS, ETC.)D. DAMAGE/INJURED: (WHAT WAS DAMAGED) (BUILDINGS, CARS,FACILITIES, NUMBER OF KNOWN INJURED, ETC.)E. UTILITIES: (AREA UTILITY STATUS) (AREAS WITHOUT WATER,ELECTRICITY, ETC.)F. COMMUNICATIONS: (LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS STATUS) (STATUS OFLOCAL TELEPHONE, RADIO, TV, ETC. AND IF UNAFFECTED, LIMITED ORUNAVAILABLE)G. SOURCE: (SOURCE OF INFORMATION AND WHEN RECEIVED)(PERSONAL OBSERVATION, TV, RADIO, SCANNER, ETC. IF PERSONAL,INCLUDE MARS CALL SIGN. IF DISASTER OFFICIAL, INCLUDE NAME ANDAGENCY. IF TV/RADIO STATION, GIVE CALL SIGN AND LOCATION)H. REMARKS: (REMARKS AND OTHER PERTINENT INFORMATION) (IFNONE, SO STATE)ACTUAL INCIDENT(USE 'MARS EXERCISE' FOR EXERCISES IN PLACE OF 'ACTUALINCIDENT')BTNNNNNote: Information contained within parentheses is added by themember when constructing the EEI message. For items 1B, 1C, 1D,1E and 1F above, use 'OPERATIONAL' if this topic is known not tohave been affected by the incident or 'UNKNOWN' if not known.Use 'N/A' for items not being reported in the EEI report. Forexample, if the EEI report was focused on item 1F,communications status, then 'N/A' would be entered for items 1B,1C, 1D and 1E.DE NNNØXOP ØØ1O 2612ØØZ JAN 2Ø1ØFM NNNØXOP GATO AAN3EEI VAINFO NNNØASA VANNNØASG MID-22

NTP 8(D)NNNØASG ONE ILNNNØAS4 GANNNØASZ GANNNØASG TWO SCNNNØGAM GANNNØGAM TWO GABTUNCLAS ACTUAL INCIDENTSUBJ: EEI REPORT1. REF HOWLING WIND/GAA. INCIDENT: HURRICANE XRAY MADE LANDFALL AT SAVANNAH GA,21 MILES NORTH OF THE CENTER OF THE CITY AT 261150Z JAN2Ø1Ø.B. MEDICAL: TWO HOSPITALS HAVE WIND DAMAGE. ALL OTHERMEDICAL FACILITIES ARE OPERATING ON EMERGENCY POWER.C. TRANSPORTATION: ROUTES I-14 AND I-34 ARE CLOSED 5 MILESNORTH OF CITY DUE TO BRIDGES BEING OUT. GEORGIA ROUTE 220 ISOPEN INTO THE CITY. SAVANNAH AIRPORT IS OPERATIONAL BUTRUNWAY 180 IS INOPERATIVE.D. DAMAGE/INJURED: SEVERAL HOUSING DEVELOPMENTS IN THENORTHERN SECTION OF TOWN REPORT HEAVY DAMAGE. FLOODING HASCAUSED SEVERAL EVACUATIONS. LOCAL SCHOOLS AND OTHERFACILITIES HAVE BEEN DAMAGED. REPORTS OF MANY INJURED ONLOCAL RADIO.E. UTILITIES: WATER SYSTEM DESTROYED. ELECTRICAL POWER ISOUT IN MOST AREAS. PHONES INOPERATIVE.F. COMMUNICATIONS: LOCAL TV AND RADIO STATIONS OPERATINGAT REDUCED POWER ON EMERGENCY GENERATORS.G. SOURCE: PERSONAL OBSERVATION NNNØXOP, LOCAL RADIO WKRPSAVANNAH GA 261155Z JAN 2Ø1Ø.H. REMARKS: NONE.ACTUAL INCIDENTBTNNNND902. EEI IDENTIFIERSThe following identifiers are to be used in NAVMARCORMARS EEImessages:EVENTAIRBORNE POISON GASAIR CRASHBIOLOGICAL EVENTBOMBING INCIDENTBRIDGE DAMAGE/LOSS (MAJOR)IDENTIFIERPOISON AIRFALLEN STARBAD BUGLOUD BANGLOST SUPPORTD-23

NTP 8(D)CHEMICAL SPILLCIVIL UNREST/RIOTDAMAGING HAILEARTHQUAKEFLOODFOREST/GROUND FIREGAS LEAK/EXPLOSION (MAJOR)HEAVY WINDS (OTHER THAN HURRICANE ORTORNADO)HURRICANEICY ROADSINTERSTATE BLOCKED/DAMAGED (MAJOR)MAJOR COMMUNICATION LINK DOWNNUCLEAROIL SPILL (WATER)POWER OUTAGE (MAJOR)SEARCH/RESCUESEISMIC SEA WAVESHIP WRECK/INCIDENTTERRORIST THREATTRAIN WRECK/DERAILMENTTORNADOVOLCANOWATER DAM BROKEN/DAMAGED (MAJOR)WINTER SNOW STORMSPOISONED GROUNDBAD MAGICFALLING ICEROLLING THUNDERTALL WATERSCORCHED EARTHHOT AIRMIGHTY WINDSHOWLING WINDBLACK ICEBLOCKED LANELOST COMMNUCLEAR GRAYSTONEDARK WATERDARK DAYSECURE HAVENTSUNAMIDEEP SEAHIDDEN SHADOWBROKEN TRACKVIOLENT TWISTERBRAZEN BRIMSTONEFAST WATERWHITE BLANKETD903. EVENT SUPPORT IDENTIFIERSThe following event support identifiers will primarily beused for specific agency support roles:EVENTFEMA SUPPORTJCS SUPPORTNCS SUPPORTNDMS SUPPORTNG AND RESERVESHARES SUPPORTIDENTIFIERFEDERAL RESPONSEJOINT LIONSTOP COVERMEDICAL LINKCIVIL COVERCOMMON FORTUNED-24

NTP 8(D)E100. WINLINK 2000 SYSTEM (WL2K)ANNEX EWINLINK 2000 SYSTEMThe WINLINK 2000 System (WL2K) is currently being used as themain traffic system for all three MARS services. The website,www.winlink.org, maintains the latest software versions andoperating instructions. Many of our members have excellentknowledge of the system and should be able to help anyone out.E200. ADDRESSING TRAFFIC IN WL2KThe routing scheme outlined below allows traffic to be sentto any state, all states in a region or area, and all states inNAVMARCORMARS.NNN0AL - ALNAVMARCORMARS (all states in all areas listed below)- NNN1N - Northeast Area (all states in Regions 1, 2 and 3)- NNN1R - Region 1 (all states in Region 1)NNN1AV - NNE, NNN1AX - SNE, NNN1CY - ICELAND- NNN2R - Region 2 (all states in Region 2)NNN2BG - NJ, NNN2BJ - NNY, NNN2BK - SNY- NNN3R - Region 3 (all states in Region 3)NNN3AW - MDE, NNN3CB - VA, NNN3CD - WV, NNN3CP - PA- NNN5C - Central Area (all states in Regions 4 and 5)- NNN4R - Region 4 (all states in Region 4)NNN4AA - ALM, NNN4AL - FL, NNN4AM - GA, NNN4AT - KY,NNN4BL - NC, NNN4BS - SC, NNN4BU - TN, NNN4CG - CU,NNN4CR - PR- NNN5R - Region 5 (all states in Region 5)NNN5AP - IL, NNN5AQ - IN, NNN5AY - MI, NNN5AZ - MNNNN5BN - OH, NNN5CE - WI- NNN6S - South Area (all states in Regions 6 and 7)- NNN6R - Region 6 (all states in Region 6)NNN6AD - AR, NNN6AU - LA, NNN6BI - NMW, NNN6BO - OKNNN6BW - ETX, NNN6BY - STX, NNN6CZ - CZ- NNN7R - Region 7 (all states in Region 7)NNN7AR - IA, NNN7BB - MO, NNN7BD - NEK- NNN9P - Pacific Area (all states in Regions 8, 9 and 10)- NNN8R - Region 8 (all states in Region 8)NNN8AG - CWY, NNN8BC - MT, NNN8BT - SND, NNN8BZ - UTE-1

NTP 8(D)- NNN9R - Region 9 (all states in Region 9)NNN9AC - AZ, NNN9AE - NCA, NNN9AF - SCA, NNN9AN - HINNN9BE - NV, NNN9CJ - JA, NNN9CM - GU, NNN9CO - OA- NNN0R - Region 10 (all states in Region 10)NNN0AB - AK, NNN0AO - ID, NNN0BP - OR, NNN0CC - WAE300. OTHER MESSAGE SYSTEMSOther message systems are in use locally or regionally tosupplement emergency communications during high usage orunavailability of the WL2K system. These systems are an asset forthose who use them but must not detract from the WL2K system inkeeping the chain of command informed.E-2

NTP 8(D)F100. INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEWF110. PURPOSEANNEX FVHF REPEATER SYSTEM (MARSREPSYS)This annex provides direction for the establishment,maintenance, and operation of the Military Auxiliary Radio System(MARS) VHF Repeater System (MARSREPSYS).F120. SCOPEThis annex applies to all MARS VHF repeater stationsregardless of whether the station consists of government orprivately owned equipment.F130. CONCEPTThe MARS VHF Repeater System extends the line of sightcommunications range of fixed, portable, and mobile VHFcommunications facilities, thereby providing a more efficientutilization of the limited frequency allocations and reducingcongestion in the prime lower frequencies. Additionally, theMARSREPSYS significantly improves the potential of MARS to providetelecommunications support for the Department of the Navy disastercontrol operations, as well as local civil disaster control, byproviding a highly mobile and effective quick reactioncommunications capability for local state communications.F140. ORGANIZATIONThe MARSREPSYS shall be under the overall supervision of theChief, NAVMARCORMARS and the MARS area directors and their specialassistants. Within each MARS state, the state director or adesignated representative shall provide the necessary control andsupervision for the installation and operations of the state VHFrepeater stations. A technically qualified individual, who isavailable and is within a reasonable distance from the repeaterstation to enable timely correction of malfunctions, shall beassigned as station engineer. He shall be responsible for thesupervision of the station equipment installation and maintenanceand shall maintain operational control of the station to assurethat the station continually conforms to the specifications andoperating guidelines herein.F-1

NTP 8(D)F200. RESPONSIBILITYF210. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARSChief, NAVMARCORMARS shall provide overall supervision forthe installation and operation of VHF repeater stations within theMARSREPSYS, regardless of whether the station consists of privateequipment loaned to the program or government equipment suppliedto a member for this purpose.F220. MARS AREA DIRECTOREach area director shall:a. Select and appoint an Assistant to the Director (VHF FMRepeater System) to act as principal assistant and advisor perChapter 2.b. Initiate actions on agreements for site locations, whenrequired.c. Review proposed VHF repeater station locations andinstallation plans and recommend changes thereto for conformity tothe specifications of this annex. The director shall be the onlyapproving authority within his/her MARS area.d. Assign VHF repeater station designator upon approval forcommencement of station operation.e. Initiate action for obtaining frequencies, as required,and provide allocation for their use.f. Effect appropriate coordination among state directors anddirectors of adjacent regions and areas, as necessary, for theinstallation and operation of VHF repeater stations.g. Keep Chief, NAVMARCORMARS advised on the installation andoperation of VHF repeater stations within his area. Upon request,provide him/her with a copy of VHF repeater station schematicdrawings, design details, and related information (including thelatitude and longitude of station location, pattern of stationcoverage, and the date of the station's approval for operation).h. Effect agreements with owners of private equipment, asrequired, to assure continued system operations.F-2

NTP 8(D)F230. STATE DIRECTORThe state director shall:a. Provide control and supervision for the installation andoperation of VHF repeater stations within his/her state, asdirected by the area director.b. Select and appoint a member as state VHF Repeater SystemCoordinator per Chapter 2, who shall act as principal assistantand advisor on VHF repeater system matters.c. Determine the need for and provide the director withrecommendations and necessary station drawings, design details,expected area of coverage, site location, and the name ofappointed station engineer of proposed repeater stations prior toactivation for approval.d. Appoint a station engineer to each repeater station withinhis state.e. Keep the director advised on the installation andoperation of VHF repeater stations and recommend changes forexpansion or improvements thereto.F240. STATION ENGINEERThe station engineer shall:a. Provide local control, supervision, and coordination forthe installation and operation of the VHF repeater station towhich assigned, as directed by the state director.b. Perform periodic preventive maintenance and repair ofstation equipment to ensure continuous operation and conformity tothe specifications and operating guidelines of this annex.c. Maintain station records indicating times the station isdown for repairs or maintenance and a summary of the workperformed. Records should include performance measurements madeduring periodic alignment or calibration of station equipment.d. Recommend changes for expansion and/or improvements of therepeater.e. Make monthly frequency and activity usage reports toapplicable authority as required.F-3

NTP 8(D)f. Advise the state director periodically on the operationand condition of the VHF repeater station as determined frompreventive maintenance checks and day to day operations.F300. VHF REPEATER STATION LOCATIONa. In acquiring a site for a MARS VHF repeater station, noone is authorized to enter into an agreement, written or oral,that would commit the U.S. Government unless they have been soauthorized by proper authority. All agreements between Navalauthorities and parties concerned must be coordinated throughChief, MARS.b. VHF repeater stations shall be located on U.S. Navy,Marine Corps, or other U.S. Government property, wheneverpossible, to provide an effective system capable oftelecommunication support for Navy disaster control operations.c. Location consideration shall be based on the following:(1) Elevation compared to the surrounding terrain.(2) Availability of electrical power.(3) Accessibility to MARS members.(4) Security against unauthorized persons.(5) Security precautions must be effected to precludeunauthorized access, especially by minors.(6) Adequate airspace clearance availability (preferablywithout the requirement for tower lights).F400. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSa. VHF repeater stations as referred to in this annex mayconsist of either or both common VHF repeater equipment andlinking system equipment and their associated control andinterface equipment. Station installation must conform to allapplicable local codes, ordinances, regulations, and tospecifications herein. Any deviation from the specificationsherein must have prior approval from Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. One ofthe major concerns shall be that of safety of life and property.b. When access to a repeater station is not available withina reasonable length of time, a means to remotely control theF-4

NTP 8(D)equipment is required. The remote control shall includeprovisions for selective control of the repeater systemoperations. As a minimum, provisions for turning the equipment ONor OFF shall be provided. All remote control functions shall beunder the control of the station engineer and at least onealternate control station. Remote control may be provided bywire, radio, automatic timers or devices and/or combinations ofall of these methods.c. Repeater station equipment shall consist of governmentowned equipment, except when such equipment is not immediatelyavailable. Privately owned equipment which meets all thespecifications herein may be substituted until such time asgovernment owned equipment is available upon written agreementwith the owner.d. Repeater station radio equipment shall be housed in metalenclosures adequately ventilated and properly fused. In the eventthe station radio equipment is accessible to unauthorized personswhen unattended, the metal enclosures shall be locked.e. A means for automatic selection of alternate emergencypower sources shall be provided whenever possible to ensurecontinued operation in the event of primary commercial powerfailure.f. Provisions shall be made to preclude spurious emissionsfrom activating the VHF repeater. Construction and appropriateengineering practices shall be employed to preclude receiverdesensitization, adjacent channel interference or overload, andcontinuous or unintentional transmissions. These practices mayinclude, but are not limited to, isolation, shielding, filters,control and signaling techniques.g. When a repeater station is linked with other repeaters,provisions shall be made to preclude activation of the linkedstation(s) without a specific "call up" when required.h. VHF repeater station antennas shall normally be verticallypolarized and omni-directional. Link antennas shall normally bedirectional beam antennas. See article F900 for additionalequipment and antenna specifications.i. No restrictions shall be made that would limittransmission access to the VHF repeater station by any MARSmember, Navy or Marine Corps activity having compatible VHFcapability, except as provided for in this annex. When provisionsF-5

NTP 8(D)of the subparagraphs above concerning control and signalingtechniques are employed, the details shall be widely disseminated.j. The repeater station receiver sensitivity, transmitterpower output, and/or antenna gains and patterns shall be adjustedto ensure the balanced operation of the station. The repeaterstation should be accessible by a properly aligned and operatedmobile or remote fixed station whenever it can be received by theremote station at a level required for normal communications.F500. STATION DESIGNATORA station designator shall be assigned to each operationalrepeater station which shall be derived as follows:a. The first numeral of the designator will denote the MARSregion in which the station is located.b. The second letter, as assigned by the MARS director,similar to that of a net designator, will indicate the state inwhich the station is located.c. The third numeral denotes the number and order ofactivation of the repeater stations within the MARS region.d. The fourth letter, when used, will indicate the repeaterstations linked together in a group. When groups of repeaters arelinked together, the letter of the earlier group shall beassigned.Example: 5 repeater stations operational in three stateswithin the Fourth MARS region:4G14H24I34H44G5Repeater stations 2 and 4 are later linked:4H2A4H4AF-6

NTP 8(D)Repeater stations 1 and 5 are later linked:4G1B4G5BRepeater stations in groups A and B are later linked:4G1A4H2A4H4A4G5Ae. The fifth letter "X", when used, will indicateinter-region VHF repeater stations linkage:Example: A repeater station in MARS Region Two,designated as 2F1, linked to a repeater station in MARS RegionThree designated as 3M1B:2F1AX3M1BXF600. LINKSa. The VHF repeater system is intended to provide aneffective and reliable communications medium for localgeographical areas. It is not intended to provide intra-area ortranscontinental inter-area communications. The networksestablished in other sections of this publication provide for thelong distance communications requirements of MARS. The VHFrepeater is considered one of the assets by which the statedirector can effectively meet the requirements of the emergencycommunication charter.b. At the request of the state director and upon the approvalof the area director, two or more repeaters within the state maybe linked to extend the effective range of a common VHF frequencynetwork. Linked repeaters shall normally be confined, insofar aspossible, to the geographical limits of each MARS state topreclude over-burdening the repeater facilities and to ensure thenetwork is responsive to the needs of the state directors andtheir staff. When required for specific emergency networks only,links may be extended into adjacent states upon agreement of eachstate director. Inter-state links shall not be extended beyondone repeater in each state except when required to relay over oraround geographical barriers.F-7

NTP 8(D)c. Each state with a common linked repeater network willprovide a station or stations with multimode HF frequencycapabilities to act as the emergency relay station into or out ofthe VHF network. Links extended into adjacent states should beonly for the purposes of providing an alternate relay stationwhich is capable of access to region emergency networks.d. Links between adjacent repeaters should only be activatedwhen required to extend local communications to the adjacentrepeater. The activation of the link shall be accomplished fromany repeater within the link. When links are extended throughthree or more repeaters, it is considered advantageous to be ableto selectively activate the repeaters so that local networks willnot be disrupted while the link is extended through their state.e. Activation of the repeater links will require positiveactivation of a control circuit other than carrier operatedrelays. Once the circuit is activated, carrier operated relays(COR's) may be used to maintain the circuit for a specified time.If a repeater link consists of three (3) or more repeaters,automatic fail safe timers will be incorporated to ensure that asingle failure does not force lock the link in the enabled mode.Timers will be adjusted to disconnect the link at not less thanthirty (30) minute intervals. Reset of the link timers may beaccomplished at intervals necessary when continuous operations aredesired.f. Signaling for link control circuits will be consistentwith the requirements of this annex.F700. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM OPERATIONSF710. GENERAL OPERATIONSa. Whenever the repeater station or link network is to berendered inoperable more than 24 hours because of a forthcomingmaintenance period or is inoperable because of malfunction, thestation engineer shall notify the state director or the appointedassistant, area and region director, and MARS members oractivities having access, providing the reason and the estimateddowntime.b. Transmission through the repeater station shall be limitedto that time necessary to convey the message. Users should bealert for other stations attempting to break the repeater withhigher precedence traffic. A weak beat note will be heard fromF-8

NTP 8(D)the heterodyne of two signals attempting to access the repeaterstation at the same time.c. Repeater stations shall normally be available forutilization on a continuous basis, 24 hours a day. MARS membersare encouraged to monitor the repeater station whenever possiblefor emergencies. The period between 2300 to 0600 local timeshould be reserved for emergencies and/or urgent communications soas to not disturb unnecessarily members who monitor on acontinuous basis.d. Before any transmission is made for access to the repeaterstation, the VHF repeater output frequency shall be monitored topreclude interference to transmissions that may be in progress.F720. EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS OPERATIONSWhen the repeater is used for an emergency network, the firststation initiating the repeater operations shall act as netcontrol station until relieved by higher authority.F730. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM SIGNALING AND CONTROLSignaling for control and special operation of VHF repeatersystems will be based on the Bell Telephone Laboratories, Inc.,Touch Tone frequency standards. Table 1 details the frequenciesand the digit decoded. It is intended that all signaling beaccomplished from this standard using single, dual, or repeatedtransmissions of these frequencies.TABLE 1Bell Telephone Laboratories, Inc., Touch ToneFrequenciesDigit Frequency (Hz)1 1209, 6972 1336, 6973 1477, 6974 1209, 7705 1336, 7706 1477, 7707 1209, 8528 1336, 8529 1477, 8520 1336, 941* 1209, 941# 1477, 941F-9

NTP 8(D)a. Frequency tolerance for signaling purposes shall be + 1 Hzbelow 1,000 Hz and + 2 Hz above 1,000 Hz.b. The use of the frequencies in Table 1 does not precludethe use of the "Whistle Up" method of repeater control.Demodulators for "Whistle Up" control will be centered on one ofthe frequencies in Table 1.c. The requirements for tone control activation of localrepeaters will be incorporated only when it is necessary tocontrol the activation due to interference from adjacent repeatersor other VHF transmitters. When incorporated, the requirementswill be widely disseminated. Subaudible analog tone or digitalsquelch (CTCSS or DCS) may be utilized to eliminate interferencebetween systems if requested by the state director and authorizedby the area and region directors.d. Audible signaling sources modulation shall not be lessthan 40% or more than 70% of maximum system deviation. Allaudible tones shall be sent with flat audio characteristics ratherthan being pre-emphasized.e. Signaling and control signal sources shall have less than10% total harmonic distortion plus noise.f. Signaling and control transmission time shall be less than30 seconds in 60 seconds per function.g. A specific signal or control function will be required toactivate link circuits and each repeater in the link chain.h. Signal and control demodulators will be designed so thatnormal voice and Audio Frequency Shift Keying (AFSK), VHF packetand MT63 tones will not activate the control function. In thisregard, the following tones are suggested for AFSK operations:(1) Wide Shift - 2125 - 2975 - mark low(2) Narrow Shift - 2125 - 2295 - mark low(3) VHF Packet - 1200 - 2200F740. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM CHANGES AND EXPANSIONRepeater station design and fabrication should allow foradditional circuits and equipment, and in such a way thatmodifications be held to a minimum with a minimum of downtime.F-10

NTP 8(D)The concept of modular circuit construction with plug-in circuitboards provides the easiest method of modification.F750. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM AUTOPATCH OPERATIONSThe capabilities of interface connections between mobile andportable VHF equipment and the commercial telephone system areconsidered advantageous in an emergency. Autopatch users arecautioned that the same restrictions governing message criteria onHF MARS circuits apply to VHF repeater circuits. Theestablishment and use of autopatch systems for official MARSrelated purposes is encouraged. Coordination and approval by thearea director is required.F800. VHF REPEATER STATION FREQUENCY REQUIREMENTSTo enable MARS to meet the requirements to fulfill itsmission in providing auxiliary communications during periods ofemergency, especially Navy disaster control operations, it isessential that the VHF repeater system provide a means for maximummobility. In order that this may be accomplished, the use ofcommon frequencies and modes in all VHF repeater stations isnecessary whenever possible. VHF repeater frequencies shall beassigned by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS. The link and controlfrequencies shall be assigned by the MARS area director. Whensuch frequencies are assigned, they shall not be used for otherMARS activities. However, if requested by the state director andauthorized by the area and region directors, stations may utilizethe repeater OUTPUT frequency for direct station to stationdigital or voice communications on a secondary basis. The mode ofoperation of all VHF repeater system frequencies shall normally benarrowband FM (11K00F3E) and operated with 2.5 KHz deviation.F810. VHF REPEATER MIGRATION TO NARROW BAND OPERATIONSExisting repeater systems operating on wide (25 KHz) channelswill be migrated to narrowband operation per a schedule developedby Chief, NAVMARCORMARS and the area and region director and theirstaffs.F900. VHF REPEATER EQUIPMENT AND ANTENNASF910. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONSa. VHF repeaters and link stations operating with narrowband11K00F3E modulation shall maintain transmit frequency stability of300 Hz, 2 parts per million (PPM). Repeaters operating with wideF-11

NTP 8(D)16K00F3E modulation prior to narrowbanding must maintain transmitfrequency stability of 750 Hz, 5 PPM. Member stations mustmaintain a frequency stability of 750 Hz, 5 PPM on all fixed,mobile, or portable transmitters operating through a repeater.b. Transmitter power output shall be the minimum necessary toeffectively cover the area in which the repeater may be accessed.c. Audio distortion through the repeater shall be less than10% for 100% modulation and in no case discernible by ear.d. Transmitters shall have a minimum duty cycle capability of30 minutes on, 5 minutes off or Continuous Commercial Service(CCS) ratings.e. Transmitters shall remain keyed for at least one (1)second and not more than ten (10) seconds after the input channelhas ceased operation.f. Receiver bandwidth shall be not more than 150% of thepeak-to-peak 100% modulation bandwidth measured at the 6 db downpoints.g. Receiver carrier operated relay delay time shall be lessthan 0.1 second opening and 0.6 second closing with 100 microvoltsignal at nominal squelch control setting.h. Specifications not otherwise stated shall be thosenormally accepted in commercial communications practices.i. Subaudible CTCSS or DCS code systems shall operate with adeviation of at least 200 Hz but not exceeding 500 Hz. The sametone or digital code utilized on the repeater or link receivershall be sent by the repeater or link transmitter whenever it iskeyed. If an automatic station identifier is used, the squelchcode shall be transmitted during the ID interval.F920. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM ANTENNA REQUIREMENTSa. Antennas and mounts shall meet applicable state andfederal codes, laws, and regulations regarding structures andantennas.b. Antenna and support wind loading factor shall be 100 MPH.c. Antenna feed line shall be of coaxial type.F-12

NTP 8(D)d. Antenna should exhibit a voltage standing wave ratio of2:1 or less at operating frequency.F930. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM ANTENNA SPECIFICATIONSa. Antennas shall have vertical polarization.b. Antennas shall be omnidirectional except whencircumstances warrant, in which case, a cardioid or otherappropriate directional pattern antenna may be used. (i.e., whenservice area is concentrated in one or two quadrants.)c. Antennas shall be gain types whenever practical.d. Antenna shall have a minimum power rating of twice thetransmitter rated power output.F940. VHF REPEATER SYSTEM LINK FREQUENCY ANTENNAa. Antennas shall be horizontally polarized except wherevertical polarization would result in attenuation of interference,extend range, or improve reliability.b. Antenna shall be directional with minimum attenuation ofradiation in the horizontal plane of:(1) 9 db at 90° and 270°(2) 12 db at 180°Additional directional attenuation may be required in the stationauthorization to reduce likelihood of interference.c. Antenna type shall be governed by frequency band andavailability consistent with specifications.d. Antenna shall have a minimum power rating of twice thetransmitter rated power output.F-13

NTP 8(D)THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKF-14

NTP 8(D)ANNEX GSPECIALTY NETWORKSG100. SPECIALTY NETWORKS: INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEWG110. PURPOSEThe purpose of this Annex is to provide instructionsand guidelines for the administration and operation of thevarious MARS specialty networks.G120. DEFINITIONA specialty network is a network established for thepurpose of providing other than general NAVMARCORMARSstate/region/area administrative, message traffic andtraining nets. Afloat and overseas shore stationcommunications, dedicated traffic networks to and fromAntarctica, and similar specialized operations are includedin this category.G200. RESPONSIBILITYG210. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARSa. Responsible for establishing specialty networks asrequired and appointing to his/her staff a nationalcoordinator for each specialty network.b. Responsible to provide overall administrative andpolicy direction to each Specialty Network Coordinator.c. Responsible to provide the required support foreach Specialty Network Coordinator to perform the functionsof his/her assignment.G220. MARS AREA DIRECTORSEndorse all nominations for appointments to eachspecialty network from applicants within his/her area. Oneprerequisite for a member to participate as a member of aspecialty network is that the member must faithfullysupport his state, region and/or area traffic nets.G230. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATORSG-1

NTP 8(D)Duties and responsibilities are contained in Chapter2.G240. SPECIALTY NETWORK STATIONSa. Responsible to actively participate in the net'sassigned activity.b. Follow the direction, guidance, and policiesestablished by the Specialty Network Coordinator.c. Operate on the network's assigned frequencies andobserve the frequency tolerances as prescribed in Annex B.d. Submit a monthly report, as prescribed by theSpecialty Network Coordinator, not later than the 5th ofthe following month.e. The following criteria constitute cause fortermination from a specialty network:(1) The failure to comply with the direction of theSpecialty Network Coordinator.(2) Unsuitable net participation, as determined bythe net coordinator.(3) Failure to submit monthly activity reports.f. Eligibility for reassignment to any specialtynetwork is at the discretion of the net coordinator.G300. SPECIALTY NETWORK STATION ASSIGNMENTSa. Specialty network coordinators will provideinformation relative to specific net requirements forapplicants to the NAVMARCORMARS area directors.b. Specialty network station assignments areauthorized by the appointed specialty network coordinator.MARS member stations desiring an assignment shall submit arequest to the appropriate network coordinator via themember's state and area director. Requests shall includelisting the station capabilities (to ensure the applicantmeets the requirements for the type of network for whichhe/she is applying.) The network coordinator will effectstation assignments based upon net requirements and stationcapabilities of the applicants.G-2

NTP 8(D)G400. NAVMARCORMARS SPECIALTY NETWORKSG410. PHONE PATCH AND EMERGENCY OPERATIONS NETWORKa. Mission Statement: The Phone Patch and EmergencyOperations Network provides reliable radio phone-patch anddigital communications to military ships and aircraft aswell as local governments at all levels and authorized nongovernmentalorganizations. The Phone Patch and EmergencyOperations Network accomplishes this through a cadre oftrained radio operators using personally owned equipmentand Department of Defense policies and principles. Thismission includes, but is not limited to, times of emergencysuch as humanitarian assistance/disaster response usingvolunteer resources of the Military Auxiliary Radio System.b. Mission Vision: Provide complete radio phone patchand digital communications resources in time of emergency.c. Mission Goals:(1) Establish a premier, world class radio networkfor emergency communications.(2) Allow for growth to accommodate government andnon-governmental organizations.(3) Center operations on phone patch and digitalcommunications in times of emergency.(4) Develop communications radio teams to supportthe missions assigned.d. Stations applying to this network should have thefollowing minimum capabilities:(1) Possess the necessary telephone and ancillaryequipment to effect radio to telephone connections andoperate in current digital modes.(2) Possess radio equipment with sufficient powerand suitable antenna system for effective communications.(3) Be able to operate on assigned networkfrequencies.G-3

NTP 8(D)(4) Be available during times of network operationson a continuing daily basis or as required.e. Additional information is available in theSpecialty Network Operations Guide.G500. SPECIALTY NETWORK STATION RECORDSa. Communication logs and station records will bemaintained in accordance with requirements prescribed inChapter 5. Each station assigned to a specialty network isrequired to submit no later than the fifth day of eachmonth (standard reporting period from the first to the lastof the preceding month) a detailed report to the specialtynetwork coordinator with a copy to the station's statedirector to ensure that activities and participation arenoted and credited. The report shall include the number ofparticipation hours, messages, radio-telephone calls,pictures, call signs and locations of stations worked,frequencies and time of actual transmission, etc., as thecase may be, as well as other information required todepict the station activity. Reports may also containcomments and recommendations concerning the network.b. Stations assigned to any specialty network willfollow the direction and guidance from their SpecialtyNetwork Coordinator relative to specific records and logformats required.G600. LANGUAGE RESTRICTIONThe use of the English language on specialty networksis encouraged during operations. A second language isauthorized provided an operator conversant in the languagespoken is monitoring the transmission to ensure sensitiveinformation is not passed. Official communications and allauthorized record traffic must be in the English language.G-4

NTP 8(D)H100. DEFINITIONSANNEX HGLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS, SHORT TITLES,AND COMMUNICATION TERMSa. The word abbreviation, as used in this annex, means ashortened form of a word or phrase which will, in its condensedform, convey the same meaning as though the word or phrase itselfwere used.b. The term short title, as used in this annex, refers to thecondensed form of those proper names which together make up thetitle of a command, document, or device. An example of a shorttitle would be SECDEF, the condensed form for Secretary ofDefense.H200. UTILIZATIONa. Abbreviations and short titles are intended for use inmessages in order to shorten the text, consequently saving time.They provide an easy-to-read symbol for often repeated phrases andlong, cumbersome titles. Many abbreviations and short titles canbe spoken as single words, and may carry over into oral use. Asan example, it is much easier to say or write "CINCUSNAVEUR"than "Commander in Chief, United States Naval Forces Europe".b. Although abbreviations shorten messages and are intendedto ease communications, indiscriminate, injudicious, and excessiveuse results in loss of intelligibility. Over-usage ofabbreviations places the criterion of brevity above the criterionof clarity with a consequent loss of preciseness incommunications. The brevity and economy being sought is more thanoffset by the error, delay, and misunderstanding that comes froman excessively abbreviated message.c. Use of abbreviations must be limited to, and kept within,the confines of assured intelligibility. The increase in messagepreparation and transmission time, sometimes brought about byrestricting the use of abbreviations, is acceptable, since suchrestrictions will eliminate the administrative effort and circuittime inevitably lost in sending service messages, obtainingrepetitions, and clearing garbles to clarify message content.H-1

NTP 8(D)H300. NAVY POLICYa. General Navy/Marine Corps use of abbreviations adheres tothe policy prescribed for joint usage.b. The Chief of Naval Operations (CNO) is the authorityresponsible for coordinating and promulgating the abbreviatedtitles of U.S. Naval activities and other naval abbreviations foruse in communications to ensure standardization and dissemination,and to hold, within reasonable limits, the number of abbreviationsauthorized for use.c. When drafting messages, brevity in message texts will notbe de-emphasized. Rather, brevity will be achieved through theproper choice of words and good writing techniques.d. Well recognized abbreviations that definitely fall intoone of the following categories may be used in the preparation ofmessages when they will serve a useful purpose:(1) Abbreviations for medals, badges, or other marks ofdistinction.(2) Abbreviations for points of the compass and mapcoordinates.(3) Authorized model designations and symbols for commontypes of aircraft, ships, or vehicles.(4) Abbreviations for titles, ranks, and grades except inmessages of commendation, congratulation, acceptance or regret,etc., where the full title and rank will be used to give afundamental degree of formality.(5) Abbreviations commonly used for geographical locationsand standard English dictionary abbreviations.(6) Other technical abbreviations customarily used byspecialists and technicians when communicating with activities orpersons in the same field as that of the originator, and to noothers.e. Abbreviations, other than those categorized above, may beused in the text of messages after they have been initiallyspelled out and identified in each item of correspondence ormessage. For example, the abbreviation ICAO could be used, butH-2

NTP 8(D)only if the first reference to the organization read:International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO).f. The usage of abbreviations will at all times be governedby the principle of immediate comprehension. Abbreviations willnot be used in messages unless the originator can reasonablyassume that the meaning of the abbreviation will be immediatelyclear to the addressee(s).H400. COMMUNICATION TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONSThe following is an alphabetical listing of the mostfrequently used abbreviations and communication terms with theirdefinitions. Their use is governed by paragraphs H200 AND H300.- A -ACK :ACPT:ACT :ADCON :ADDEE :ADMIN :ADMSG :ADP :ADTAKE :ADV :AFSK :AIG :ALCON :ALTNCS:AMTOR :ANS :APP :APPL :Acknowledge(ment)AcceptAct(ing) (ive) (ion)Advise all concernedAddresseeAdministrat(e) (ive) (ion)Advise by electrically transmitted messageAutomatic Data Processing. ADP systems are designedfor the purpose of gaining access to computers orproviding direct exchange of information betweencomputers. These systems use various digitalteletypewriter or information codes.Request advise action takenAdv(ance) (ice) (ise)Audio Frequency Shift Key(ing) - modulation of RFcarrier wave with audio tones, to provide shift infrequency of the carrier waveAddress Indicating GroupAll concernedAlternate Net Control Station - a station appointed asback-up to the appointed net control station. Thedesignated alternate NCS should take charge of the netwhen the primary NCS is inoperative for any reason.When in control, ALTNCS will assume NCSresponsibilities.A digital communication mode that uses errorcorrection protocol (See Chapter 9)AnswerAppendixAppli(cable) (cant) (cation)H-3

NTP 8(D)APPR :APPROX :STATEDIRARR :AUTH :AUTHGRA :AUTOVON :Approve(d)Approximate(ly)State directorArriv(al) (ed)Authority (zed)Authority grantedAutomatic Voice Network - An automatic circuitswitching network which offers rapid, direct voicequality interconnection for military and otherinstallations in continental United States and certainoverseas areas- B -BAUD: A unit of modulation rate - One baud corresponds to arate of one unit interval per second.BBS : Bulletin Board SystemBIT : The smallest unit of information used in computerlanguage/operationBOOK MESSAGE: A message which is destined for two or moreaddressees and is of such a nature that the originatorconsiders no addressee need be informed of any otheraddressees. Addressees of a book message are dividedinto groups according to the relay stations whichserve them.BROADCAST FILE: This file contains a copy or filler of eachmessage transmitted or received by the broadcastmethod.BYTE : Combination of eight BITS in computer language and/orprogramming- C -CALL SIGN : Any combination of characters or pronounceable wordsthat identifies a communication facility, a command,an authority, an activity, or a unit; used primarilyfor establishing and maintaining communications (Seealso COLLECTIVE CALL)CGBASE : Coast Guard BaseCGDIST : Coast Guard DistrictCHNAVMARCORMARS : Chief, Navy-Marine Corps Military AuxiliaryRadio SystemCIRCUITRY : A complex of circuits describing inter-connectionwithin or between systemsCKT : Circuit - (1) an electronic path between two or morepoints capable of providing a number of channels; (2)H-4

NTP 8(D)a number of conductors connected together for carryingan electrical currentCLASSIFICATION : The determination that official informationrequires, in the interest of national defense, aspecific degree of protection against unauthorizeddisclosure, coupled with a designation signifying thatsuch a determination has been madeCLASSIFIED INFO: Official information that has been determined torequire, in the interest of national defense,protection against unauthorized disclosure and whichhas been so designatedCLASSIFIED MATTER : Official information or matter in any form orof any nature that requires protection in theinterests of national defenseCOGOFF :MARS cognizant officer on the staffs of each fleetCommander in Chief, Naval Force Commander and CNOCODRESS MESSAGE : A type of message which carries in the encryptedtext the entire address; i.e., the originator and alladdresseesCOLLECTIVE CALL : Any call sign that represents two or morefacilities, commands, authorities, or units - Thecollective call sign for any of these includes thecommander thereof and all subordinate commanderstherein.COMCON :A phased communications readiness condition to prepareNAVMARCORMARS stations for an emergency conditionCOMMAND NET : A communications network which connects an echelonof command with some or all of its subordinateechelons for command controlCOMMCEN :Communications center: A major component of acommunication complex charged with the responsibilityfor receipt, transmission and delivery of messagesCOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK : An organization of stations capable ofinter-communication, but not necessarily on the samechannelCOMMUNICATION SATELLITE : An orbiting vehicle, either active orpassive, which relays signals between communicationstationsCOMNAVNETSPAOPSCOM : Commander, Naval Network and Space OperationsCommandCOMPROMISED : A term applied to classified matter, knowledge ofwhich has (in whole or in part) passed to anunauthorized person or persons, or which has beensubject to risk, of such passing (See alsoCLASSIFIED MATTER)H-5

NTP 8(D)CONUS :CW :CWO :Continental United States - United States territory,including adjacent territorial waters, located withinthe North American continent between Canada and MexicoContinuous wave - Commonly used to denote on-offkeying of a carrier using the International Morse CodeCommunication Watch Officer or Chief Warrant OfficerDCA :DCS :DIGITAL :- D -Defense Communications AgencyDefense Communications SystemReferenced to system(s) using two states, e.g.high/low, on/off, 0/1 for transfer of informationDIRECTED NET : A net in which requirements dictate that netstations obtain the net control station's permissionprior to transmitting on the netDIRLAUTH : Direct liaison authorizedDOD :DRAFTER :DTG :Department of DefenseA person who actually composes a message for releaseby a releasing officer (See also ORIGINATOR)Date-time-group - An identifying date and time,expressed in digits and zone suffix, assigned to themessage when prepared for transmission. The DTG isexpressed as six digits followed by the month, year,and zone suffix (first pair of digits denoting thedate, second pair the hours, third pair the minutes).DUPLEX CIRCUIT : A duplex (full duplex) circuit provides twochannels or frequencies linking two differentstations, allowing the simultaneous exchange ofinformation.ECOM :EEI :EHF :ECM :- E -Emergency Communication(s)Essential Elements of InformationExtremely High Frequency (30-300 GHz)Electronic countermeasures: That major subdivision ofelectronic warfare involving actions taken to preventor reduce the effectiveness of enemy equipment andtactics employing or affected by electromagneticradiations and to exploit the enemy's use of suchradiationsELECTRONIC JAMMING : The deliberate radiation, reradiation, orreflection of electromagnetic signals to impair theuse of electronic devicesH-6

NTP 8(D)EMCON :Emission control orders : Orders, referred to as EMCONorders, used to authorize, control or prohibitelectronic emissions- F -FAA : Federal Aviation AgencyFAX : FACSIMILE - A system of telecommunication fortransmitting fixed imagesFCC : Federal Communications CommissionFEMA : Federal Emergency Management AgencyFLEACT : Fleet Activit(ies) (y)FONECON : Telephone conferenceFORAC : For actionFREE NET : When operational factors permit, the Net ControlStation may authorize member stations to communicatewith other net stations without obtaining priorpermission from the Net Control Station. During thisperiod full call signs must be used.FREQUENCY (FREQ) : Frequency is the number of vibrations or cyclesof the radio signal occurring in one second.FREQUENCY STANDARDS : Devices used to compare the accuracy oftransmitters and receivers with a signal known to beaccurateFSK : Frequency Shift Keying, shifting a carrier byelectrical/mechanical operationsFYI : For your information- G -GARBLE : An error in transmission, reception, encryption ordecryption which renders a message or a portionthereof incorrect or undecipherableGENERAL MESSAGE FILE : This file is a record of all generalmessages which require retention. It is subdivided bytitle of each general message and filed in serialnumber order.- H -HERTZ (Hz): Cycles per secondHF : High frequency - 3 to 30 MHz- I -IAW : In accordance withIDN : International Digital Network (See Annex E)H-7

NTP 8(D)INFO :IRT :InformationIn response to; in reference toLL :LF :LINK :- J -- K -- L -Landlines and cables are metallic wire conductors thatprovide a direct path for transmitting informationbetween two or more stations (usually telephones).Low frequency - 30 to 300 KHzA general term used to indicate the existence ofcommunication facilities between two pointsLISTENING WATCH : A continuous receiver watch established forreceiving traffic addressed to, or of interest to,one unit- M -MARS : Military Auxiliary Radio SystemMARSCOGOFF : Navy-Marine Corps MARS Cognizant Officer - Anofficer on the Staff of each Fleet Commander, NavalForce Commander and CNO State director for the purposeof maintaining appropriate administrative MARS liaisonbetween the Commander/Commandant and the Commander,Naval Network and Space Operations CommandMARSOFF : MARS Officer - An officer at a command or activitywith an established Navy-Marine Corps MARS RadioStation who provides supervision for its operation andadministrationMARSREPSYS : Navy-Marine Corps MARS VHF Repeater System (SeeAnnex F)MBO : Mailbox: An electronic store and forward messagehandling system operating on radio frequencies (SeeAnnex E)MESSAGE, MSG: Any thought or idea expressed briefly in a plain orCRYPTIC language, prepared in a form suitable fortransmission by any means of communicationsMESSAGE PRECEDENCE : Designations employed to indicate therelative order in which a message is handled withrespect to other messagesMF : Medium Frequency - 300 to 3000 KHzMINIMIZE : A condition wherein normal message and telephonetraffic is drastically reduced in order that messagesH-8

NTP 8(D)MUX :connected with an actual or simulated emergency shallnot be delayedMultiplex - The equipment or technique of combiningtwo or more independent channels (voice, telegraph,data, etc.) into a composite signal which is thentransmitted via the transmission medium to a liketerminal where the process is reversed, restoring thechannels to their original state- N -NAVCOMTELSTA : Naval Computer and Telecommunications Station : Anactivity which operates and maintains thosefacilities, systems, equipments and devices necessaryto provide requisite fleet support and fixedcommunication services for a specific areaNAVMARCORMARS : Navy-Marine Corps Military Auxiliary Radio System(MARS)NCTAMS : Naval Computer and Telecommunications Area MasterStationNCS : National Communication System - existing communicationfacilities of certain federal departments and agenciesto provide communications for the President andcertain federal agenciesNDN National Digital Network (See Annex E)NCS : Net Control Station - A station designated byappropriate authority to direct and control theoperation and flow of all traffic on the netNEED TO KNOW : A criterion used in security procedures whichrequires holders of classified information toestablish, prior to disclosure, that the intendedrecipient must have access to the information toperform his official dutiesNET : An organization of stations capable of directcommunications on a common channel or frequencyNET CALL SIGN : A call sign which represents all stations within anet (See also CALL SIGN)NLT : Not later thanNOTAL : Not to all nor needed by all- O -OPERATING SIGNALS : Operating signals (Q and Z) are a conciseunclassified code designed for use by communicationpersonnel in exchanging information incident tohandling messages or establishing communications.H-9

NTP 8(D)OPORD :OPLAN :ORIG :They are also used in service messages and other formsof messages between communication personnel.Operation(s) OrderOperation(s) PlanOriginator - The command or station by whose authoritya message is sent- P -PACKET : Packet radio mode of digital communications (seeChapter 9)PACTOR : PACTOR radio mode of digital communications (seeChapter 9)PASEP : Being passed separately or has been passed separatelyPERGRA : Permission grantedPLAINDRESS MESSAGE : A message in which the originator andaddressee designations are indicated externally of thetextPRECEDENCE : A designation assigned to a message by the originatorto indicate to communication personnel the relativeorder of handling and to the addressee the order inwhich the message is to be noted (See also MESSAGEPRECEDENCE)PRIORITY MESSAGE : A category of precedence reserved for messageswhich require expeditious action by the addressee(s)and/or furnish essential information for the conductof operations in progress when ROUTINE precedence willnot suffice. Normally, PRIORITY is the highestprecedence which may be assigned to administrativetraffic and such traffic must be transmitted viaadministrative circuits when they are available."Normally" in the foregoing sentence provides forcircumstances of extreme urgency and shall not beconstrued as a pretext for the abuse of highprecedence.PROFORMA : (1) a message, the nature of the successive elementsof which is understood by prearrangement; (2) astandard formPROSIGNS : Procedural signs consisting of one or more letters orcharacters or combinations thereof. They are used tofacilitate rapid communication by conveying incondensed standard form certain frequently usedorders, instructions, requests, reports andinformation.PROWORDS : Word equivalents of PROSIGNSH-10

NTP 8(D)- R -RADIO CIRCUIT : Any means of communication between two or morestations which uses the radiation of electromagneticenergy to transmit informationRADIO SILENCE : A period during which all or certain radioequipment capable of radiation is kept inoperativeRADIOTELEGRAPHY : See CWRECORD TRAFFIC : That information which has been electricallytransmitted and must be received by the ultimate userin such a form as to permit permanent storage.(Includes narrative and data formatted messages.)ROUTINE MESSAGE : A category of precedence to be used for alltypes of messages which justify transmission by rapidmeans unless of sufficient urgency to require a higherprecedence (See also MESSAGE PRECEDENCE)ROUTING INDICATOR : A group of letters assigned to indicate thebasic geographic location of a stationRTTY : Radio Teletypewriter - communications usingteletypewriter on radio circuits- S -SAR : Search and Rescue - The use of aircraft, surfacecraft, submarines and other special equipment tolocate and rescue personnel in distress on land andseaSATCOM : Satellite Communications - The SATCOM systemintegrates military communication facilities into aworldwide network through satellites which orbit theearth.SCD : Single Channel DataSERVICE MESSAGES : Short, concise messages between communicationpersonnel relating to message trafficSHARES "Shared Resources" - Federally implemented multiagencyECOM programSHF : Superhigh Frequency - 3 to 30 GHzSITREP :SOP :SVC :- T -Situation ReportStanding Operating Procedure - A set of instructionscovering those features of operations which lendthemselves to a definite or standardized procedurewithout loss of effectiveness. Procedure isapplicable unless prescribed otherwise in a particularcase.Service MessageH-11

NTP 8(D)TELECOMMUNICATION : Any transmission, emission, or reception ofsigns, signals, writing, images and sounds orinformation of any nature by wire, radio, visual, orother electromagnetic systemsTELECON (or TELCON) : Teleconference - a conference betweenpersons remote from one another but linked by atelecommunication systemTNC : Terminal Node Controller - The hardware used toconvert computer information to digital communicationsformat used in Radioteletype, Packet, AMTOR, PacTOR,and other digital modesTHISTA : This stationTOD : Time of delivery - the time at which addressees orTOR :relay facilities receipt for a messageTime of receipt - the time at which a receivingstation completes reception of a messageTRACER ACTION : The process by which an investigation is conductedto determine the reason for inordinate delay indelivery or non-delivery of a message- U -UHF : Ultrahigh Frequency - 300 to 3000 MHzUHF/HF RELAY : A relay method that permits long-rangeuninterrupted communications during periods when HEROrestrictions are in effect by transmission of a UHFsignal to a relay station. The relay stationretransmits the signal via HF by use of specialequipment.UNCLAS : Unclassified - a message classification category,indicating the message is not classifiedUNODIR : Unless otherwise directedURSTA : Your StationUTC : Universal Coordinated Time - time zone "Z"VHF :VLF :WRT :- V -Very High Frequency - 30 to 300 MHzVery Low Frequency - Below 30 KHz- W -With reference to (or with respect to)- X -- Y -- Z -H-12

NTP 8(D)I100. INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEWI110. PURPOSEANNEX IEQUIPMENT PROGRAMThe purpose of this Annex is to provide policies andregulations governing the management for the acquisition,accounting, and utilization of excess equipment and materialwithin Navy-Marine Corps MARS.I120. SCOPEThe provisions of this annex are applicable only to theNavy-Marine Corps MARS Program and only to excess property clearlydetermined to meet MARS requirements per this annex. The issue ofexcess property in the name of MARS to MARS Radio Stations,(except NAV, the Navy-Marine Corps MARS Radio Station), requestedthrough other than the procedures outlined herein and without theapproval of Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, is prohibited. This does notpreclude the commanding general/commanding officer or officer incharge of a military activity from authorizing the use by theactivity sponsored MARS radio station of equipment and materialwithin the activity's assets. Excess property obtained for aMilitary Auspices MARS station by a military activity must be inthe name of the activity and not MARS and accounted for perappropriate instructions. Equipment and material provided by theactivity shall be clearly identified as OTHER (O) indicating thatit is not part of the MARS Equipment Program.I200. ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITYI210. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARSa. Retains overall supervision and control of the MARSequipment program.b. Promulgates implementing instructions and ensures that theprovisions of the program are complied with by good managementpractices and periodic inspections.I220. NAVMARCORMARS AREA DIRECTORa. Maintains control of the excess equipment made availablefor issue.I-1

NTP 8(D)b. Ensures strict adherence to the policies and proceduresoutlined herein and those issued by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.c. Maintains records of issued equipment from time of receiptto disposition.I230. STATIONS UNDER MILITARY AUSPICESStation custodians will maintain accountability by category,as specified in this annex, of equipment received. An inventoryshall be conducted on such equipment annually, on 31 December, andupon the occasion of a change in station custodian. An inventorylist and the results of the inventory shall be forwarded, notlater than 15 days after the completion of the inventory, to theappropriate MARS area director.I240. MARS INDIVIDUAL STATIONSPer procedures specified by the MARS area director,individual MARS radio stations may request issue of items whichare needed and can be effectively utilized to improve theiroperating capability and/or for experimental purposes. Equipmentissues will be limited by quantities available and by eligibilityrequirements as follows:a. Be a member of MARS for at least 6 months.b. Minimum participation of at least 18 hours per quarterduring the preceding quarter.c. Favorable recommendation by the state director to the areadirector based on the requirements to meet MARS functions and theneed and ability of the member station.d. Each station shall maintain a record of custody receiptson excess property received and any authorizations for transfer,modifications, or cannibalizations associated therewith.I300. EQUIPMENT SOURCESTwo types of excess property are made available to the MARSprogram: DOD and GSA Excess Property, and Navy Excess Property.I-2

NTP 8(D)I310. DOD AND GSA EXCESS PROPERTYDOD and GSA excess property is property that has beendetermined to be Department of Defense excess per the DefenseDisposal Manual (DOD 4160.21-M) and made available by the DefenseReutilization Management System (DRMS) or by local disposalauthorities. There is also DOD and civilian Federal agency excessproperty which has been made available by the General ServicesAdministration (GSA). Such property is available for issue to thegeneral membership for operational and experimental purposes.I320. NAVY EXCESS PROPERTYNavy excess property is property that has been declaredexcess to the Department of the Navy needs and made available toChief, NAVMARCORMARS for issue to and for use in MARS Stationsunder Military Auspices and offices of the administrative andoperational appointments. Most of this equipment is carefullycontrolled and inventoried under Minor Plant Property Custodyaccounts or similar custody programs.I330. ACCOUNTABILITY AND CONTROLEquipment, except that identified as being for assignment toa Military Auspices Station allowance, shall be removed fromaccounting and control of Class 3 plant property per NAVCOMPTManual, Article 036301-4, Item 22.I400. ACCOUNTING IDENTIFICATIONFor accounting and identification of equipment entering theMARS Equipment Program, the following categories are establishedand shall be cited on requisition actions:a. Category A - Property that is obtained for issue to andfor use in Military Auspices Stations only.b. Category B - Property that is obtained for issue to thegeneral membership for operational and experimental purposes.c. Category C - Property that is obtained for issue to theoffices of various appointments and stations having specialfunctions to assist in administrative or operational functions.I-3

NTP 8(D)I500. POLICY AND PROCEDURESI510. POLICY GOVERNING EXCESS PROPERTY REQUESTSa. General Services Administration (GSA) and DefenseReutilization Management System (DRMS): Chief, NAVMARCORMARS andarea directors are authorized to screen excess property listed byGSA and DRMS. This authority may not be delegated by thedirectors. Area directors are authorized to screen only propertylocated within their area. In extreme cases where excess propertyis located in an adjacent area and can be effectively utilizedimmediately within the area concerned, coordination with theapplicable adjacent area director is necessary.b. Non-reportable property at local military and federalagency disposal activities: MARS area directors are authorized toscreen non-reportable property located at the local military andfederal agency activities. Upon recommendation of the statedirector, the authority to screen may be delegated in writingusing NAVSUP Form 1309 or other appropriate authorization forms toresponsible volunteer civilian and/or military MARS members. Thisauthority may also include receipt of property, however, therelease of the property shall be made only if a DelegationAuthority, NAVSUP Form 1309 or similar form is on file and uponpresentation of a copy of the approved Requisition.I520. POLICY GOVERNING EXCESS PROPERTY ACQUISITIONChief, NAVMARCORMARS and the MARS area directors are the onlypersons within MARS who possess requisitioning authority forexcess property made available to Navy-Marine Corps MARS. Theapproval endorsement from the Chief, NAVMARCORMARS, is required onproperty requests. Disposal authorities will not recognize MARSproperty requests received from any source other than via theChief, NAVMARCORMARS.I530. REQUISITIONSRequests for excess property will be prepared on DD Form 1348(series) for excess/surplus DOD equipment or DD Form 1149 forexcess/surplus GSA equipment. One form must be prepared for eachcontrol number. It is imperative that a word description of theproperty, nomenclature, serial numbers, if available, and thecondition code be included. Additionally, each line item shallindicate the unit price, the total cost, and the sheet total inthe space provided. The DD Form will be signed by the MARS areaI-4

NTP 8(D)director and submitted to the Chief, NAVMARCORMARS for review,approval, signature, and forwarding.I540. COMMODITY GROUPSEquipment from federal stock classes listed below, clearlydetermined to meet MARS requirements, will be the only propertyconsidered for use within MARS. All other equipments andmaterials will be considered on a case-by-case basis when properlyjustified.FSC EQUIPMENT3610 DESK TYPE COPIERS5445 PREFABRICATED TOWER STRUCTURE5820 RADIO AND TV COMM EQUIPMENT, EXCEPT AIRBORNE5821 RADIO AND TV EQUIPMENT, AIRBORNE5985 ANTENNAS, WAVEGUIDES, AND RELATED EQUIPMENT6115 GENERATORS, GENERATORS SETS ELECTRICAL6117 SOLAR ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS6150 MISC ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT6625 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC PROPERTIES MEASURING AND TESTINGINSTRUMENTS7010 ADPE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION7020 ADP CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU, COMPUTER, ANALOG)7021 AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING, PROCESSING UNIT COMPUTER,DIGITAL7022 ADP CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU, COMPUTER), HYBRID7025 ADP INPUT/OUTPUT STORAGE DEVICES7030 ADP SOFTWARE7035 ADP SUPPORT EQUIPMENT7045 ADP SUPPLIES7050 ADP COMPONENTSNote: FSC 3610 and 7030 are restricted to state, region andarea directors, and other formally appointed MARSofficials.FSC 6115 is restricted to generators and relatedequipment, 15KW OR LESS. FSCFSC 6150 AND 7021 are restricted to generator relatedequipment.I550. PICKUP OF EQUIPMENT FROM HOLDING ACTIVITYThe pickup by volunteer civilian and military MARS members ofexcess property made available to MARS is authorized, subject tothe following stipulations and conditions:I-5

NTP 8(D)a. The member has been nominated by the state director andrecommended to the area director and approved by Chief,NAVMARCORMARS for such authority.b. The release of the property to the member by the propertydisposal officer is only authorized upon presentation of a copy ofthe approved letter signed by Chief, NAVMARCORMARS.c. The member will acknowledge receipt of the property to thestate director immediately. A monthly status report will beprovided by the state director by forwarding a signed copy of therequisition annotated with date of receipt, nomenclature of theequipment(s), model and serial numbers. The state director willalso execute one signed Custody Receipt Form 2070-4, marked "FORFURTHER ISSUE".d. The state director will be responsible for properlyexecuting and obtaining the associated custody receipts andforward them to the area director within 60 days from the date ofpickup.e. The sale, barter, or other disposition of the property,except as provided herein, and as directed by the area director orhis authorized representative, is illegal and will result ineither civil or military action.I560. POLICY GOVERNING EQUIPMENT ISSUEa. Equipment will be distributed only as directed by the areadirector or his authorized representative.b. Excess and surplus property of a non-expendable natureissued to MARS individual stations is and shall remain theproperty of the U.S. Government.c. Issued property is subject to recall at the direction ofChief, NAVMARCORMARS or his authorized representatives.d. The U.S. Government assumes no liability in connectionwith the use or transportation of property issued.e. The U.S. Government will not assume support or storagecosts in any manner for issued property.f. The individual station will agree to accept issuedproperty in an "as is" condition.I-6

NTP 8(D)g. Packing, handling, and/or transportation costs forshipment to an individual station will be at the station'sexpense.h. Property may be modified or cannibalized to facilitateinstallation, operation and experimentation ONLY upon the advancewritten approval of the area director. In cases where this typeof "cannibalization" is authorized, the cannibalized equipment"carcass" remains accountable to the member who has custody.i. Except as provided herein, sale, barter, or otherdisposition of Government owned property issued per this Annex, isillegal and will result in either civil or military action. Theissue of property as prizes or unsolicited gifts is prohibited.I570. EXCESS PROPERTY ISSUE PROCEDURESI571. RECORDSa. The area director will keep a file of all requisitions, innumerical order by requisition serial number appearing in therequisition number, Block 6.b. Additionally, the area director will keep documents andcorrespondence associated with requisitions, such as bills oflading, shipping receipts, acknowledgment of receipts from theholding activity by the member, original signed custody receipts,etc., to provide the history of the equipment.I572. EQUIPMENT ISSUE ACKNOWLEDGMENTa. Stations under Military Auspices: Equipment issuetransactions shall be accomplished using NM-2070-4 forms. Theacknowledgment receipt will be signed by the station custodian.b. Individual Stations: Equipment issue transactions,including the transfer of equipment between members whenauthorized by the area director, shall be accomplished onNM-2070-4 (Custody/Receipt Form). The NM-2070-4 will include allnecessary information, including the description and serial numberof equipment at time of issue. When transactions are conductedbetween members, the same control number shall be used as thatshown on the custody receipt when the equipment was originallyissued.I-7

NTP 8(D)I573. DISTRIBUTION OF CUSTODY RECEIPT FORMSUpon issue of equipment, custody receipt forms (NM-2070-4)will be executed and distributed as follows:a. Signed Original - filed in associated requisition file(area director's records).b. Copy - to member station file (area director's records).c. Copy - to the individual member.d. Copy - to the member's state director.e. Copy - to the member the equipment was transferred from(only required for transfer of issued equipment between members).I574. CUSTODY/RECEIPT FROM NM-2070-4a. "Request Number" block: the request number to be insertedin the Control Number Block in the left hand column of theNM-2070-4 Form is derived by the Requisition Document number ofthe associated requisition (DD-1348 or DD-1149, etc.) and theconsecutive number of each unit of a line item. For example, therequisition number consists of the Unit Identification Code (UIC),Julian Date and Requisition Serial Number, all separated by slantsigns. (N0574A/7179/0045). A requisition containing more thanone item will be consecutively numbered (e.g.,N0574A/7179/0045/01).b. "From" block: the name and call sign of the member to whomthe equipment is issued will be inserted.c. "Cannibalization or Modification Authorized" block: whenit is apparent that the equipment must be modified or cannibalizedto facilitate installation, operation, or experimentation, theauthority for such action may be included and shall be signed bythe area director.d. "Transfer Custody From" block: when transactions areconducted between members as authorized by the director, the nameand call sign of the member from which the equipment is beingtransferred shall be indicated. In this regard, the same controlnumber shall be used as that shown on the custody receipt when theequipment was originally issued.I-8

NTP 8(D)e. "Signature of Recipient" and "Date" blocks: the writtensignature of the member to whom the equipment is issued and thedate of receipt shall be inserted in the appropriate blocks.I600. EQUIPMENT ISSUE LOGAn Equipment Issue Log will be kept by each area director onrequisitions containing non-expendable equipment. This log willbe kept in requisition serial number order. The Request Number isassigned to the unit and will be cited in all transactions untilthe final disposition of the equipment. All materials (exceptconsumable items) are accountable. The area director must have asigned custody receipt associated with each unit issued.I-9

NTP 8(D)THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANKI-10

NTP 8(D)J100. COORDINATIONANNEX JJOINT SERVICE MARS INTEROPERABILITYThe contents of this annex have been coordinated among allthree service MARS chiefs.J110. HISTORYArmy and Air Force MARS began full interoperability on allcircuits in April 1997. Army and Air Force MARSinteroperability with Navy-Marine Corps MARS was limited only byNavy-Marine Corps MARS frequencies not being authorized on anation-wide basis.J200. JOINT OPERATIONSAll service MARS interoperability is authorized on anation-wide basis subject to the following restrictions:a. All service MARS stations are authorized to use any VHFcircuits for digital and voice communications within the hostservice's established guidelines.b. All service MARS stations are authorized to enter anyother MARS HF traffic net.c. All service MARS stations are authorized to enter anyservice MARS emergency communications net during an actualemergency.d. This interoperability does not apply to HF phone patchnets to and from Navy and Coast Guard ships. Operations forthese units is restricted to Navy-Marine Corps MARS circuits byfleet commander frequency authorizations.J210. MESSAGE FORMAT AND REFILINGAll three services basically use the same 16 line messageformat, however, there are minor differences. The followingguidance is provided for refiling messages between servicenetworks:a. Message precedence will not be changed.J-1

NTP 8(D)b. Any other changes to messages needed to comply withanother service's policies or procedures will be made by thereceiving station.J300. NET OPERATIONSBy tri-service MARS Chiefs agreement, the host service willprovide the net control station who is the governing authorityon procedures. Host net procedures will be observed withoutcomment or debate. If the guest is unwilling to follow the hostprocedures, a tactful withdrawal from the frequency isrecommended.J-2

NTP 8(D)ANNEX KCALL SIGNS, SPECIAL CALL SIGNS AND COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNSK100. OVERVIEW AND INTRODUCTIONK110. PURPOSEThis annex promulgates policies, instructions, and guidanceconcerning call signs, special call signs, and collective callsigns in NAVMARCORMARS. The term MARS, as used in this annex,refers to Navy-Marine Corps MARS only. When referring to otherMARS, the service shall be identified.K120. SUMMARY: CALLS ASSIGNED TO NAVMARCORMARSMARS has been assigned the block of call signs with theNNNØ prefix. All MARS stations will be assigned a call signfrom this block. Call signs are allocated by Chief, MARS, on asequential basis beginning with NNNØAAA except as listed below.Assignments are made by Chief, MARS, area directors, specialtynetwork coordinators and state directors.NNNØASA - NNNØASZ Chief MARS, staff, area directors andassistantsNNNØASØ - NNNØAS9 Region directorsNNNØCAA - NNNØCZZ U.S. Navy and U.S. Coast Guard ShipsNNNØDAA - NNNØDAZ Region One Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDBA - NNNØDBZ Region Two Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDCA - NNNØDCZ Region Three Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDDA - NNNØDDZ Region Four Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDEA - NNNØDEZ Region Five Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDFA - NNNØDFZ Region Six Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDGA - NNNØDGZ Region Seven Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDHA - NNNØDHR Region Eight Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDHS - Department of Homeland SecurityNNNØDHT - NNNØDHZ Region Eight Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDIA - NNNØDIZ Region Nine Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDJA - NNNØDJZ Region Ten Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDKA - NNNØDKZ Region One Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDLA - NNNØDLZ Region Two Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDMA - NNNØDMZ Region Three Auxiliary Radio TeamsK-1

NTP 8(D)NNNØDNA - NNNØDNZ Region Four Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDOA - NNNØDOL Region Five Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDOM - Director of Military Support (DOMS)NNNØDON - NNNØDOZ Region Five Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDPA - NNNØDPZ Region Six Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDQA - NNNØDQZ Region Seven Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDRA - NNNØDRZ Region Eight Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDSA - NNNØDSZ Region Nine Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDTA - NNNØDTZ Region Ten Auxiliary Radio TeamsNNNØDUA - NNNØDZZ Collective call signs assigned to areadirectors to use at their discretion.NNNØDUA – NNNØDUZ Northeast AreaNNNØDVA – NNNØDVZ Central AreaNNNØDWA – NNNØDWZ Southern AreaNNNØDXA - NNNØDXZ Pacific AreaNNNØDYA – NNNØDZZ ReservedNNNØGAA – NNNØGCZ State directorsNNNØGDA - NNNØGEZ Agency Call SignsNNNØGFA - NNNØGJZ Senior Chief Navy-Marine Corps MARS OperatorsNNNØGKA - NNNØGOZ Master Chief Navy-Marine Corps MARS OperatorsNNNØGPA - NNNØGZZ Agency Call signsNNNØMAA - NNNØMZZ Agency StationsNNNØNAA - NNNØNZZ U.S. Navy Military Auspices Stations; U.S.Navy and U.S. Coast Guard Ships; licensedunits in the Afloat and Overseas OperationsNetworkNNNØNCS is assigned to National Communications SystemNNNØPPA - NNNØPPZ Specialty Network CoordinatorsK121. SPECIAL CALLS ASSIGNED FOR VHF AND WINLINK USESince Amateur VHF systems allow only six-character callsigns the following block of call signs has been assigned toK-2

NTP 8(D)NAVMARCORMARS. They shall be used on VHF systems and theWINLINK 2000 system:NNA0AA through NNZ9ZZSeven-character call signs listed above in K120 are converted tothese six-character call signs by taking the first characterafter the zero, substituting it for the third "N" prior to thezero, substituting the members region number in place of the"zero" in the seven-character call sign, followed by the lasttwo letters of the seven character call sign.Example: NNN0ASA VA becomes NNA3SA VAK130. DEFINITIONS AND TERMSK131. ADDRESS DESIGNATORSCall signs, address groups, plain language addresses(including abbreviated titles), and routing indicators (seeChapter 8).K132. CALL SIGNSCall signs, assigned to individuals, are used on MARScircuits as personal radio call signs. MARS officials and staffassistants are assigned administrative call signs for use whenconducting matters pertaining to their administrative orspecialty appointments.K133. PLAIN LANGUAGE ADDRESSAn abbreviated title and associated geographical locationof a station, MARS official, staff or a predetermined groupwithin MARS.Examples:CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURG VA(Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS, Williamsburg, VA)ALNAVMARCORMARS PACIFIC AREA(All Navy-Marine Corps MARS Stations in Pacific Area)ALNAVMARCORMARSTA REGION ONE(All Navy-Marine Corps MARS Stations in Region One)K-3

NTP 8(D)K134. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNSIdentify a predetermined group within MARS.Example:NNNØALD (All Navy-Marine Corps MARS Area Directors)NNNØALR (All Navy-Marine Corps MARS Region Directors)K200. GENERAL INFORMATIONa. This annex provides a list of call signs and a plainlanguage address directory for MARS officers, assistants, area,region and state directors and specific predetermined groupswithin MARS and instructions for their use. It also providesthe format, with titles and suffix numbers, for the assistantsto each director's staff. These titles (and correspondingsuffix numbers) will be used throughout MARS where incumbentsare assigned.b. Call signs are used primarily for initiating andmaintaining communications. Call signs assigned to MARSstations may serve as address designators.c. The use of MARS call signs normally shall be restrictedto MARS networks. When specifically authorized by competentauthority, MARS call signs may be used while representingNAVMARCORMARS on other U.S. Government agency networks (as anexample, the federal government inter-agency SHARES network).d. U.S. Military and U.S. Government agency call signs maybe used on MARS networks during actual or exercise communicationemergencies or when otherwise authorized by competent authority.e. Use of MARS call signs in the amateur bands is notauthorized.f. Routine requests for additions, changes and deletions toMARS Collective Call Signs will be submitted via letter toChief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS, via area, region and statedirectors as appropriate. Messages are not acceptable forrequesting modifications to collective call signs unless theyare of an urgent nature. Requests for routine modificationsshall be submitted 60 days in advance of the desired effectivedate.K-4

NTP 8(D)K300. DESIGNATED CALL SIGNS FOR MARS OFFICESK301. CHIEF, NAVMARCORMARS, ASSISTANTS AND REGION DIRECTORSNNNØASA: Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARSNNNØASB: (Not issued)NNNØASC: Assistant for Communications SecurityNNNØASD: (Not issued)NNNØASE: Director, Navy-Marine Corps MARS Pacific AreaNNNØASF: Director, Navy-Marine Corps MARS South AreaNNNØASG: Director, Navy-Marine Corps MARS Central AreaNNNØASH: (Not issued)NNNØASI: Director, Navy-Marine Corps MARS Northeast AreaNNNØASJ: (Not issued)NNNØASK: (Not issued)NNNØASL: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forAutomatic Link Establishment (ALE)NNNØASM: (Not issued)NNNØASN: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forTrainingNNNØASO: (Not issued)NNNØASP: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forPublic AffairsNNNØASQ: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forTechnical Library Coordination and EquipmentModificationNNNØASR: (Not issued)NNNØASS: (Not issued)K-5

NTP 8(D)NNNØAST: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forTelecommunicationsNNNØASU: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forDigital Communications SoftwareNNNØASV: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forComputers and ProgrammingNNNØASW: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forWinlink 2000 OperationsNNNØASX: (Not issued)NNNØASY: (Not issued)NNNØASZ: Assistant to the Chief, Navy-Marine Corps MARS forEmergency CommunicationsK302. REGION DIRECTOR CALL SIGNS AND ASSIGNED STATESNNNØAS1: REGION ONE (NNE, SNE)NNNØAS2: REGION TWO (NJ, NNY, SNY)NNNØAS3: REGION THREE (MDE, PA, VA, WV)NNNØAS4: REGION FOUR (ALM, FL, GA, KY, NC, PR, SC, TN)NNNØAS5: REGION FIVE (IL, IN, MI, MN, OH, WI)NNNØAS6: REGION SIX (AR, LA, NMW, OK, ETX, STX)NNNØAS7: REGION SEVEN (IA, NEK, MO)NNNØAS8: REGION EIGHT (CWY, MT, SND, UT)NNNØAS9: REGION NINE (NCA, SCA, AZ, NV, HI, GU)NNNØASØ: REGION TEN (WA, OR, ID, AK)K-6

NTP 8(D)K310. STATE DIRECTOR CALL SIGNSState directors are assigned call signs from the blockNNNØGAA through NNNØGEZ as follows:NNNØGAA - ALM (AL and MS)NNNØGAB - AKNNNØGAC - AZNNNØGAD - ARNNNØGAE - NCANNNØGAF - SCANNNØGAG – CWY (CO and WY)NNNØGAH - Not issuedNNNØGAI - Not issuedNNNØGAJ - Not issuedNNNØGAK - Not issuedNNNØGAL - FLNNNØGAM - GANNNØGAN - HINNNØGAO - IDNNNØGAP - ILNNNØGAQ - INNNNØGAR - IANNNØGAS - Not issuedNNNØGAT - KYNNNØGAU - LANNNØGAV – NNE (ME, NH and VT)NNNØGAW – MDE (MD, DC and DE)NNNØGAX – SNE (CT, MA and RI)NNNØGAY - MINNNØGAZ - MNNNNØGBA - Not issuedNNNØGBB - MONNNØGBC - MTNNNØGBD – NEK (NE and KS)NNNØGBE - NVNNNØGBF - Not issuedNNNØGBG - NJNNNØGBH - Not issuedNNNØGBI – NMW (NM and West TX)NNNØGBJ - Northern NY (NNY)NNNØGBK - Southern NY (SNY)NNNØGBL - NCNNNØGBM - Not issuedNNNØGBN - OHNNNØGBO - OKNNNØGBP - ORNNNØGBQ - Not issuedNNNØGBR - Not issuedNNNØGBS - SCNNNØGBT – SND (SD and ND)NNNØGBU - TNNNNØGBV - Not issuedNNNØGBW – ETXNNN0GBX - Not issuedNNNØGBY - STXNNNØGBZ - UTNNNØGCA - AustraliaNNNØGCB - VANNNØGCC - WANNNØGCD - WVNNNØGCE - WINNNØGCF - Not issuedNNNØGCG - Cuba (CU)NNNØGCH - Not issuedNNNØGCI - Philippines (RP)NNNØGCJ - Japan (JA)NNNØGCK - Not issuedNNNØGCL - Not issuedNNNØGCM - Guam (GU)NNNØGCN - Diego Garcia (DG)NNNØGCO - Okinawa (OA)NNNØGCP - PANNNØGCQ - Not issuedNNNØGCR - Puerto Rico (PR)NNNØGCS - Not issuedNNNØGCT - Not issuedNNNØGCU - Not issuedNNNØGCV - Not issuedNNNØGCW - Not issuedNNNØGCX - Not issuedNNNØGCY - IcelandNNNØGCZ - Canal Zone (Panama) (CZ)K-7

NTP 8(D)K320. ASSIGNMENT OF REGIONS TO AREASRegions are assigned to areas as follows:a. Northeast Area: Regions 1, 2, and 3b. Central Area: Regions 4 and 5c. South Area: Regions 6 and 7d. Pacific Area: Regions 8, 9 and 10K330. SPECIALTY NETWORK COORDINATOR CALL SIGNSThe following administrative call signs are assigned tospecialty network coordinators:NNNØPPC: National Digital Network CoordinatorNNNØPPE: Afloat and Overseas Operations Network CoordinatorK400. NAVMARCORMARS STAFF DESIGNATORS (CALLSIGN SUFFIXEXTENSIONS)K410. GENERAL INFORMATIONAssistants to area, region and state directors and expandedstaffs for certain assistants to Chief, MARS, and specialtynetwork coordinators will be assigned administrative call signsfor use when conducting official business pertaining to theirrespective appointments. These identifiers are labels and donot necessarily establish that any one position is senior inauthority to a subsequent position. (The exception: the ONEposition may act instead of the area, region or state directoror specialty network coordinator). These call signs will beformed using the basic administrative call followed by a suffixnumber from the list in paragraph 223.K420. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONSa. Other permanent assistants, as necessary, may beassigned with suffix numbers TWO ZERO through TWO NINE with theconcurrence of Chief, MARS.b. Directors may authorize assignment of temporary area,region or state assistants, as necessary, using the suffixK-8

NTP 8(D)numbers THREE ZERO through THREE NINE during emergencies.Directors will inform Chief, MARS by priority message of suchassignments and circumstances under which they were made.Concurrently, this information should be promulgated area,region or state wide (as appropriate) to expedite recognitionand traffic routing associated with such assignments.K500. NAVMARCORMARS HEADQUARTERS STATIONNAV: Headquarters, Navy-Marine Corps MARS Radio StationCheatham Annex Bldg 117108 Sanda AveWilliamsburg VA 23185-5830K600. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNSK610. AUTHORIZED USERS OF COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNSThe use of Collective Call Signs is limited to those whoare administratively senior to, or equivalent to, the group(s)addressed, i.e. Chief, MARS (or Chief, MARS staff) to address"All MARS directors"; or state director Virginia (or staff) orhigher authority, to address "All Navy-Marine Corps MARS RadioStations, Virginia".K611. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNS WITH VARYING MEMBERSHIPThe collective call signs NNNØAFL and NNNØMDS listed inarticle K620 below have varying memberships. NNNØPPE (forNNNØAFL) and NNNØPPC (for NNNØMDS) shall recapitulate theconstituents of their respective collective call signs asnecessary.K620. AUTHORIZED COLLECTIVE CALL SIGNSThe following Collective Call Signs are authorized:NNNØAFL: All members and staff of the Afloat and OverseasOperations Specialty NetworkNNNØALA: All Assistants to Navy-Marine Corps MARS Area DirectorsNNNØALB: All Special Assistants to Chief NAVMARCORMARS and allNAVMARCORMARS Specialty Network CoordinatorsNNNØALC: All Navy-Marine Corps MARS State directorsK-9

NTP 8(D)NNNØALD: All Navy-Marine Corps MARS Area DirectorsNNNØALE: All Stations this Navy-Marine Corps MARS Emergency NetNNNØALL: All Navy-Marine Corps MARS Radio StationsNNNØALL AIR FORCE: All Air Force MARS StationsNNNØALL ARMY: All Army MARS StationsNNNØALM: All U.S. Marine Corps Military Unit Radio StationsNNNØALN: All U.S. Navy Military Unit MARS Radio StationsNNNØALR: All Navy-Marine Corps MARS Region DirectorsNNNØALS: All Stations this NetNNNØALX: All U.S. Marine Corps Military Auxiliary MARS RadioStationsNNNØALY: All U.S. Navy Military Auxiliary MARS Radio StationsK621. COLLECTIVE CALL SIGN LIMITATIONS AND MODIFIERSa. The size of a predetermined group identified by acollective call sign may be limited by the use of an area,region, state or specialty network designator.b. Examples:NNN0ALL NORTHEAST AREA - All NAVMARCORMARS Stations NortheastAreaNNN0ALL CENTRAL AREA - All NAVMARCORMARS Stations CENTRAL AreaNNN0ALL SOUTH AREA- All NAVMARCORMARS Stations SOUTH AreaNNN0ALL PACIFIC AREA - All NAVMARCORMARS Stations PACIFIC AreaNNN0ALL REGION ONE- All NAVMARCORMARS Stations REGION ONENNN0ALC REGION THREE - All NAVMARCORMARS State Directors inRegion ThreeNNN0ALL FLORIDA - All NAVMARCORMARS Stations in FloridaNNN0ALL CWY - All NAVMARCORMARS Stations in Colorado/WyomingK-10

NTP 8(D)NNN0ALM OKINAWA - All USMC Military Unit MARS Stations Okinawac. The use of a number suffix with Collective Call Signs isnot authorized. Area, Region and State assistants to Chief,Navy-Marine Corps MARS and specialty network assistants will beaddressed individually.K700. RADIO STATION LOCATION IDENTIFIERSa. When using station call signs as address designators ina record message, the station location will be included as partof the address by inserting the state or country abbreviation,as shown in paragraph K310 above, following the call sign(s).For example:R 251235Z JAN 2Ø1ØFM NNNØGAQ INTO NNNØASG MIINFO NNNØASA VANNNØPPC MIb. Individual member call signs and locations of area,region or state director staff assistants may not be well known.Message routing and delivery may be expedited by appending thepersonal call sign to the administrative call sign, separated bya slant sign and followed by the state abbreviation.Example:NNNØASE FIFTEEN/NNNØOIY NCAc. MARS states are not necessarily synonymous with USPSstates. For example, Texas is divided into South Texas (STX),East Texas (ETX) and New Mexico/West Texas (NMW). California isdivided into SCA and NCA for Southern and Northern California,respectively. Conversely some states are combined. Forexample, South and North Dakota comprise the SND state.Stations in combined states should use the combined stateabbreviation regardless of the state in which they live.K800. PLAIN LANGUAGE ADDRESS DESIGNATOR (PLAD)a. PLAD's generally are not used in everyday MARSoperations, but they are the established way of identifyingaddressees in a standard military message. It is, therefore,essential that MARS members have some guidance and training inK-11

NTP 8(D)their use in order to be able to support the basic mission ofthe MARS program.b. The PLAD's listed below are the only designatorsauthorized for use in message addressing by Navy-Marine CorpsMARS. Deviations from the PLAD in spelling, spacing orformatting cannot be tolerated by automated equipment in theNaval Telecommunications System. Therefore, changes ordeviations are not authorized. The use of PLAD's as addressesin messages is limited to Chief MARS, area directors and deputydirectors. PLAD's and call signs in message headings shall notbe mixed.c. Activity PLAD's are listed below in conjunction withtheir official mailing address. The entire PLAD, including cityand state, must appear on one line, in capital letters, asshown:CHNAVMARCORMARS WILLIAMSBURG VAChief, Navy-Marine Corps MARSCheatham Annex BLDG 117108 Sanda AvenueWilliamsburg VA 23185-5830ALNAVMARCORMARSTADIRAll NAVMARCORMARS State DirectorsALNAVMARCORMARSREGDIRAll NAVMARCORMARS Region DirectorsALNAVMARCORMARSARDIRAll NAVMARCORMARS Area DirectorsALNAVMARCORMARSAll NAVMARCORMARS Radio Stationsd. The size of a predetermined group identified by acollective PLAD may be limited by the addition of a geographicalregion or area.Examples:ALNAVMARCORMARS PACIFICALNAVMARCORMARS REGION THREEALNAVMARCORMARS NORTH CAROLINAK-12

NTP 8(C)ANNEX LABBREVIATED TEXTSL100. GENERALAbbreviated texts are established to enhance the transmissionof messages of a standard text. When using an abbreviated text,members are cautioned to ensure correct transposition.Abbreviated texts shall be transposed to the proper meaning priorto delivery to addressees. The messages shall never be presentedto addressees in abbreviated form.L110. NAVY-MARINE CORPS MARS ABBREVIATED TEXTS (NMAT)Navy-Marine Corps MARS Abbreviated Texts (NMAT) have beenestablished as listed below. The NMAT shall not be filed into theArmy and Air Force MARS or Amateur radio networks since theabbreviated text meanings are not widely disseminated. Requestsfor the establishment of an NMAT shall be submitted to Chief,NAVMARCORMARS with sufficient justification.NMAT ONE:NMAT TWO:NMAT THREE:NMAT FOUR:NMAT FIVE:NMAT SIX:NMAT SEVEN:NMAT EIGHT:NMAT NINE:NMAT TEN:NMAT ELEVEN:ARRIVED SAFELY MARINE CORPS RECRUIT DEPOT, SANDIEGO, CA.ARRIVED SAFELY NAVAL TRAINING CENTER, GREAT LAKES,IL.ARRIVED SAFELY AT NAVAL RECRUIT TRAINING COMMAND,GREAT LAKES, IL.(UNASSIGNED)(UNASSIGNED)(UNASSIGNED)(UNASSIGNED)ARRIVED SAFELY OKINAWA.(UNASSIGNED)(UNASSIGNED)ARRIVED SAFELY NAVAL SUBMARINE BASE NEW LONDON,GROTON, CT.L-1

NTP 8(C)NMAT TWELVE:REPLY VIA NAVY-MARINE CORPS MILITARY AUXILIARYRADIO SYSTEMNMAT THIRTEEN: ARRIVED SAFELY GUAML120. ARRL NUMBERED RADIOGRAMSThe ARRL numbered radiograms can be used in MARS messages andsuch use is encouraged. The numbers shall always be spelled.Refer to current American Radio Relay League publications fornumbered radiogram definitions. ARL SEVEN is not authorized forNAVMARCORMARS use.L-2

NTP 8(D)ANNEX MTELECOMMUNICATIONSM100. INTRODUCTIONTelecommunications is the transmission of text, data, soundor images in the form of electronic or electromagnetic signals.In NAVMARCORMARS the transmission media for these signals is HFor VHF radio (RF), facsimile (FAX), telephone and the Internet.RF transmission is covered in other parts of this document.This annex contains guidance for the utilization of fax,telephone and Internet by NAVMARCORMARS to enhance our abilityto communicate.M110. TELEPHONETelephone voice communications are used to deliver messagesto third parties and whenever immediate two-way interaction isrequired or for sensitive administrative communications.M120. FAXFax is authorized for the transmission of documents and forsensitive administrative communications.M130. INTERNETThe Internet is a network that enables computers tocommunicate with other computers on a global basis and consistsof the World Wide Web (Web) and electronic mail (e-mail.)a. The Web is a graphical Internet service that is based ondocuments called pages that combine text, pictures, sounds, andanimation. Navigating from one page to another is accomplishedby hyperlinks.b. E-mail is the postal system of the Internet and allowsusers to send messages to any recipient that has an e-mailaddress. Most e-mail programs allow the attachment of files ofall types for transfer from one computer to another.M200. E-MAILThe primary means of communication for NAVMARCORMARS is RFand e-mail is not to be used in lieu of RF. E-mail may be usedto supplement RF communications as follows:M-1

NTP 8(D)a. IDN - E-mail transmission of messages between ships anddeployed units on the ships active list and IDN stations isauthorized if transmission via RF is not feasible.b. Local area delivery - a MARS station and a third partymay utilize e-mail in lieu of telephone for transmission ofmessages. If delivery of a message would entail a toll call forthe member, the message may be delivered by e-mail. Similarly,if a message has been delivered by e-mail, it may haveinformation attached so the recipient can send a response backby e-mail.c. Station to station - E-mail may be utilized forunofficial or sensitive communications between stations. RF,not e-mail, shall be used for official administrativecommunications.d. Broadcasts - E-mail should not generally be used todisseminate broadcasts. Stations are to pick up theirbroadcasts by RF via their area, region or state nets or bydownloading the Chief, MARS broadcasts from the national website and their area, region and state broadcasts from theirlocal area, region and state web sites. Because each member’sparticipation schedule varies greatly, it is recognized thatmembers may not be aware of all transmitted general messages.To ensure that all members receive all general messages, it isrecommended that states set up a method of forwarding generalmessages to all members by regular mail or e-mail if unable todeliver them by RF.e. Computer programs - E-mail may be used to send computerprograms from one computer to another. This type of operationis encouraged since it obviates the need to mail programs withthe attendant disk, package and postage costs.f. E-mail signature - all members should sign their e-mailmessages with their call sign so the recipient knows who sentthe e-mail. Many e-mail addresses give no clue as to their MARSidentity so a signature may be the only way a recipient knowswho sent the message.M300. WORLD WIDE WEBM301. NATIONAL WEB SITENNN0AST shall maintain a NAVMARCORMARS national web sitethat provides information to the NAVMARCORMARS membership and toM-2

NTP 8(D)the general public. NNNØAST shall also provide a site thatallows the general public to send MARSGRAMS to authorizedindividuals.M302. AREA, REGION AND STATE WEB SITESAll area, regions and states may utilize the Web for homepage sites that provide information of interest to the MARSmembers in their areas, regions and states. The area directorauthorizes an area web site and region and state directorsauthorize the establishment of region and state web sitesrespectively. The following conditions apply:a. Only MARS related information is to be posted on thesesites and a link to the national web site shall be provided.b. Information that is on the national web site is not tobe duplicated or similar information posted on these sites. Forexample, the chief, MARS broadcasts are not to be posted but alink to the broadcasts page on the national web site may beprovided. Information as to what is MARS and how to join MARSis not to be posted on these sites; this information is on thenational web site.c. Area sites should provide only MARS related informationof interest to the area membership and region and state sitesshould provide only MARS related information of interest to theregion and state membership respectively. Each area site shallprovide a link to the national site and links to the regionsites within their area. Each region site shall provide a linkto their area site and to each state site. Each state siteshall provide a link to their region site. The area directormust authorize the information posted on an area site and theregion and state directors must authorize information posted ona region and state site respectively. Each area -FIVE is giventhe user ID and password for the national site including thesecure site. All area, region and state web masters havepermission to use the national server for their web pages.d. The only personal data of a member that may be posted ona non-secure web site is the stations MARS call (staff orpersonal or both), state and/or area, and first name. Forexample:NNNØTGV/NNNØASE TEN SCA BOBNNNØAAB MA SNE EDWARDM-3

NTP 8(D)There are no exceptions to this.e. Member’s personal data from a signed NMC 2093/1 form maybe posted on a secure page that requires a password to access.The password may only be given to Navy-Marine Corps MARSmembers. The password is not to be given to TANGO stations.f. MARS frequencies may only be posted on a passwordprotected site. The one exception to this is the commonfrequencies 7382.5 KHz, 14385 KHz and 4042.5 KHz.g. No references shall be made or links provided tocommercial entities. Exceptions to this will be made on a caseby-casebasis and authorization obtained from NNN0AST.h. The area -FIVE should provide guidance to the site webmasters in their area and insure compliance with the conditionsset forth in this annex.M-4